Skip to main content

Full text of "Cantor lectures on photography and the spectroscope"

See other formats


w®m®m 


Qllje  TObrary 

of  ilic 

JJaliib  ;QunIap  (DbscrViatoru 


:]9resriiieu  lig 

Dr..  ..&,..  A.,.  .Chant.. 

April..  23  j.  19.35 


SOCIETY  FOE  THE  ENCOURAGEMENT 


ARTS,    MANUFACTURES,    AND    COMMERCE. 


CANTOR    LECTURES 


PHOTOGRAPHY  AND   THE   SPECTROSCOPE, 


CAPT.  AJ3NEY,  F.R.S. 


DELIVERED   BEFORE   THE   SOCIETY    OF   ARTS,  APRIL   20TH  AND  2-th,  1885. 

a*Js 


LONDON : 

PRINTED    liV     W.    TROUJCCE,    10,    GOTJGH    SQUARE.    FLEET    STREET,    E.C. 


1885. 
Prict  One  Shilling. 


PHOTOGRAPHY    AND    THE    SPECTROSCOPE 


CAPT.  ABNEY,  F.R.S. 


LECTURE  I.— Delivered  April   io,    1885, 


Every  lecturer,  when  he  begins,  must  have 
a  text  of  some  description,  and  I  propose  to 
make  my  text  for  the  lectures  a  plate  exposed 
to  the  spectrum.  You  see  before  you  a  spectro- 
scope comprising'  a  collimator,  two  prisms, 
and  a  camera,  with  a  lens  of  13-inch  focal 
length,  and  in  this  slide  is  a  sensitive  collodion 
plate. 

The  spectrum  of  the  hot  carbons  of  the 
electric  light  is  upon  the  focussing  screen 
which  you  see  before  you,  and  I  will  simply 
expose  this  plate,  and  refer  to  it  from  time  to 
time  as  my  lecture  continues. 

The  plate  is  given  six  seconds'  exposure  to 
the  light  of  that  spectrum,  and  now  in  the 
subdued  light  coming  from  this  lantern,  whose 
sides  are  covered  with  translucent  orange 
paper,  I  see  the  picture  is  coming  out  under  the 
action  of  the  ferrous  oxalate  developer.  After 
fixing,  we  see  that  we  have  the  photographed 
spectrum  on  the  plate. 

This  is  the  text  on  which  I  have  to  hang  my 
lectures.  We  have  three  things  to  consider. 
First  of  all,  we  have  got  the  light,  then  we 
have  the  apparatus,  and  then  the  sensitive 
material  on  which  the  spectrum  is  taken. 
The  white  light  from  the  carbon  poles,  in 
passing  through  the  apparatus,  is  spread  out 
into  a  coloured  band,  which  we  call  the 
spectrum  ;  and  the  spectrum  has  effected  a 
(  hange  in  the  sensitive  salt  of  silver,  as  is 
shown  by  the  blackening  on  the  application  of 
what  is  called  a  developer.  The  cause  of  the 
change  in  the  sensitive  material  is  what  I  first 
ess  myself  to. 


To  conceive  a  right  notion  of  photographic 
action  we  must  first  of  all  conceive,  in  the  most 
elementary  manner,  the  structure  of  matter. 
The  structure  is  beyond  our  actual  visual 
acquaintance,  but  we  may  be  able  to  visualise 
it  from  the  way  it  behaves ;  we  have  to  draw 
our  conclusion  about  it  from  evidence  of  an 
experimental  nature.  What  we  want  to  get 
is  a  mental  picture  of  matter. 

Physicists  have  come  to  the  conclusion  that 
homogeneous  matter  is  composed  of  molecules, 
or  small  masses  which  are  altogether  similar 
one  to  another,  i.e.,  they  have  the  same  com- 
position. In  different  matter  these  molecules, 
have  different  weights.  Further,  it  is  believed 
that  the  molecules,  or  the  small  particles  of 
matter,  are  themselves  composed  of  atoms, 
which  we  take  to  be  the  fundamental  unit  of 
matter.  Now,  from  experimental  data,  Sir 
William  Thomson  and  others  have  come  to 
conclusions  as  to  the  limits  of  the  size  of  these 
molecules,  and  also  as  to  their  distribution  in 
space.  From  the  kinetic  theory  of  gases,  it  is 
concluded  that  the  diameter  of  a  molecule  lies 
somewhere  between  one  twenty-five  millionth 
part  of  an  inch  and  one  two  hundred  and  fifty 
millionth  part  of  an  inch.  Further,  in  gases 
it  is  conceived  that  the  molecules  are  free  to 
move  in  straight  lines  in  any  direction,  the 
direction  being  altered  only  when  the  molecules 
collide ;  that  is  to  say,  when  they  strike  one 
against  another.  In  a  liquid,  the  particles  are 
bonded  much  more  closely  together,  and  the 
free  path  of  the  molecules  is  very  much 
shorter.    That  is  to  say,  that  they  cannot  go 


4 


from  one  place  to  another  without  very  much 
more  frequently  coming  into  contact  with 
other  molecules  ;  and  the  molecules  pass  from 
place  to  place  at  a  very  much  slower  rate  than 
they  do  in  gases.  A  solid,  such  as  is  our  silver 
salt,  is  conceived  to  be  such  that  the  molecule 
has  no  free  path,  but  is  confined  in  a  limited 
space  in  which  it  can  oscillate,  moving  round 
a  mean  centre.  As  to  the  distribution  of  these 
molecules  in  liquids  and  solids,  Sir  William 
Thomson  has  arrived  at  very  definite  con- 
clusions also.  In  a  lecture  at  the  Royal 
Institution,  he  said  that  he  concludes  that  in 
every  ordinary  liquid,  or  transparent  solid,  or 
seemingly  opaque  solid,  the  mean  distances 
between  contiguous  particles  is  less  than  one 
twelve  millionth  of  an  inch,  and  more  than  one 
two  thousand  five  hundred  millionth  part  of 
an  inch.  Those  are  big  figures,  but  still  the 
distance  apart  is  very  small.  "  To  form  a  con- 
ception of  this,"  he  says,  "  imagine  a  globe 
of  water  as  large  as  an  ordinary  football  to  be 
magnified  to  the  size  of  the  earth,  each  con- 
stituent molecule  being  similarly  magnified. 
The  magnified  structure  would  be  more  coarse 
grained  than  a  heap  of  small  shot,  but  probably 
less  coarse  grained  than  a  heap  of  footballs." 
So  you  see  that,  by  magnifying  to  this  extent, 
you  have  a  coarse-grainedness  which,  of 
course,  is  only  relatively  coarse  grained  after 
such  an  enormous  magnification.  Or  you  may 
put  it  in  a  different  sense.  If  you  magnify 
eight  thousand  diameters  by  an  ordinary 
microscope — and  that  is  about  the  limit  to 
which  a  microscope  will  magnify ;  and  if  you 
magnify  that  eight  thousand  diameters  again 
eight  thousand  times,  you  would  be  able  to  see 
the  molecular  structure  of  water.  So  much, 
then,  for  molecules. 

We  will  now  turn  to  the  atoms.  These  will 
not  bear  such  a  very  large  disproportion  of 
size  to  the  molecules  as  do  the  molecules  to  the 
smallest  visible  particles.  We  must,  however, 
I  think,  conceive  that  every  atom  (and  this  is 
an  important  point)  is  charged  with  energy 
very  much  in  the  same  way  that  the  magnet  is 
charged ;  only,  instead  of  two  poles,  as  a 
magnet  has,  each  atom  has  only  one  pole.  It 
is  unipolar. 

Now,  suppose  that  this  energy  is  something 
like  electrical  energy.  We  know  that  positive 
repels  positive,  and  that  negative  repels 
negative.  And  further,  we  know  that  the 
positive  energy  will  attract  what  is  called  nega- 
tive energy ;  and  if  the  two  be  exactly  equal 
when  they  combine,  of  course  there  will  be  a 
neutral  state.     But  in  the  case  of  the  atoms  of 


matter,  circumstantial  evidence  tells  us  that 
the  amount  of  electrical  energy  which  is  upon 
a  given  atom  of  matter— if  you  like  to  put  it 
in  that  way — is  never  the  same  as  it  is  upon 
another  atom  of  matter;  that  is  to  say,  there 
is  always  a  surplus  of  one  over  the  other.  Thus 
we  may  have  an  atom  charged  with  what  we 
may  call  fi/tis  2  of  energy,  and  another  one 
charged  with  minus  1  of  energy.  Those  two 
atoms,  on  coming  together,  give  you  a  result  of 
energy  of  plus  1,  and  this  would  again  be 
capable  of  attracting  another  atom  of  matter 
which  was  charged  with  a  negative  energy, 
and  so  on.  From  chemical  considerations,  it 
would  appear  that  plus  and  minus  energies  of 
different  atoms,  as  I  have  said  before,  are 
never  exact  multiples  of  one  another,  and  that 
when  they  are  bonded  together  there  is  always 
an  excess  one  over  the  other.  A  good  example 
of  the  energy  of  the  combination  of  atoms 
together  may  be  shown  by  the  combination 
between  a  gas,  chlorine,  which  we  have  here, 
and  the  metal  antimony,  and  you  will  see 
that  when  the  latter,  as  powder,  is  thrown  into 
the  former,  the  two  combine  with  an  evolution 
of  heat,  showing  that  a  vast  amount  of  energy 
is  given  out.  The  chlorine  and  the  antimony 
form  chloride  of  antimony  ;  that  is  to  say,  five 
atoms  of  chlorine  and  one  of  antimony.  [A 
small  quantity  of  finely  powdered  antimony 
was  dropped  into  a  jar  of  chlorine.]  You  see 
the  evolution  of  heat  between  those  two  ;  so 
much,  in  fact,  that  the  chloride  of  antimony,  as 
it  was  formed,  was  at  a  perfectly  bright  white 
heat.  The  case  immediately  before  us  is  the 
silver  salt.  Let  us  experiment  with  that  in  a 
similar  way.  Into  the  chlorine  I  will  throw 
some  powdered  silver,  and  I  wish  you  to  notice 
the  difference  between  the  results  in  the  two 
cases.  [A  small  quantity  of  the  powdered 
silver  was  dropped  into  a  jar  of  chlorine.] 
You  see  that  the  combination  between  the 
silver  and  the  chlorine  only  produces  a  red 
heat,  whereas  antimony  produced  a  white 
heat.  In  other  words,  the  combination  between 
antimony  and  chlorine  is  much  more  vigorous 
than  the  combination  between  silver  and 
chlorine.  If  you  had  to  separate  the  atoms  of 
chlorine  from  those  of  the  antimony,  you  would 
have  to  use  very  much  greater  force  than 
if  you  had  to  separate  the  atoms  of  silver  from 
the  atoms  of  chlorine. 

When  two  electrified  bodies  attract  one 
another,  they  attract  one  another  inversely  as 
to  the  square  of  the  distance.  That  is  to  say, 
if  there  is  a  distance  of  one  foot  between  them, 
they  attract  one  another  with  a  force  of  say — 


1 .  If  they  are  two  feet  from  one  another,  they 
only  attract  one  another  with  a  quarter  that 
amount.  Supposing  atoms  attracted  one 
another  according  to  the  same  law,  then  of 
course  they  being  so  very  close  to  one  another, 
the  attraction  would  be  considerably  greater 
than  if  they  were  visibly  apart. 

But  besides  this  attraction  between  atoms 
comprised  in  the  molecules,  there  also  seems 
to  be  a  repulsive  action,  into  which  I  will  not 
enter  more  fully  now,  because  that  would  be 
almost  beside  my  subject  ;  but  I  may  say  that 
besides  the  atoms  attracting  one  another  (we 
will  take  chloride  of  silver  for  instance)  when 
they  get  within  a  certain  distance  of  one 
another,  they  repel  one  another,  and  so  there 
is  a  continual  oscillation  between  the  atoms 
composing  those  molecules. 

I  will  try  to  show  you  on  the  screen  how  we 
can  picture  the  motion  to  ourselves.  It  is  only 
a  mental  picture,  but  still  it  will  give  us  a  sort 
of  idea  of  what  happens.  [An  image  was 
thrown  on  the  screen  by  means  of  reflection]. 

In  this  circular  glass  trough  of  water  is 
floating  a  little  magnet,  the  magnet  being 
held  at  the  surface  of  the  water  by  a  cork. 
Passing  round  this  coil,  which  is  large  enough 
to  surround  the  trough,  is  an  electric  current 
from  three  Grove  cells,  and  if  I  place  it  round 
ell  which  contains  the  little  magnet,  and 
not  quite  on  a  level  with  the  water,  you  will 
find  that  the  single  magnet  goes  into  the 
centre  of  the  water.  It  is  repelled  from  the 
sides  by  the  current  that  is  floating  round  that 
wire.  Well,  now,  we  have  here  one  magnet. 
Suppose  I  put  another  magnet  in.  The 
ends  attached  to  the  cork  have  poles 
of  the  same  name.  They  repel  one  another 
to  a  certain  extent,  and  yet  the  force 
from  outside  makes  them  go  as  near  one 
another  as  possible.  By  moving  this  coil 
vertically  we  can  make  them  separate  and 
oscillate,  and  we  can  picture  to  ourselves  the 
way  in  which  two  atoms  in  a  molecule  may 
oscillate,  and  be  attracted,  and  yet  repelled 
one  from  another.  I  put  another  little  magnet 
in,  so  now  there  are  three ;  and  here  perhaps  we 
haveapicture  of  chloride  of  silver,  which  I  say  is 
composed  of  one  atom  of  silver  and  two  atoms 
of  chlorine.  We  can  still  make  them  vibrate 
and  oscillate.  Here  we  have  a  mental  picture 
— at  least  it  is  a  mental  picture  to  me — of  the 
way  in  which  the  atoms  of  chloride  of  silver 
may  be  made  to  oscillate.  Again  1  take  four, 
and  we  repeat  the  same  thing.  Here  we  have 
a  picture  of  ammonia — three  atoms  of  hydro- 
gen and  one  of  nitrogen  oscillating.     And  so 


I  might  go  on.  I  might  put  five  or  six  or  a 
dozen  in,  and  we  might  get  some  idea  of  the 
way  in  which  they  would  all  oscillate. 

Here,  then,  we  have  endeavoured  to  draw 
from  visible  phenomena  a  mental  picture  of 
the  way  in  which  atoms  of  a  molecule  are 
vibrating. 

I  must,  however,  call  to  your  mind  that 
those  magnets  are  vibrating  only  in  one  plane, 
whereas  of  course  the  atoms  of  a  molecule  are 
vibrating,  not  in  one  plane,  but  in  space  of 
three  dimensions ;  but  anyhow,  I  hope  that 
you  have  got  into  your  mind  at  all  events  the 
same  kind  of  mental  picture  regarding  the 
oscillations  or  vibrations  of  the  atoms  which  I 
have  in  mine.  I  think  that  the  case  of  the 
magnets  is  a  particularly  happy  one,  because 
from  all  the  svidence  which  we  have  at  present 
we  are  led  to  the  conclusion  that  all  atoms  of 
matter  are  really  charged  with  electricity,  or 
what  answers  to  electricity  of  either  one 
name  or  the  other;  that  is,  either  positive  or 
negative. 

Now,  we  will  throw  a  spectrum  on  the  screen. 
I  will  call  to  your  recollection  what  it  is.  I 
am  now  going  to  send  the  light  of  the  lamp 
through  this  bisulphide  of  carbon  prism,  and 
I  need  scarcely  say  that  the  prism  has  to  play 
an  important  part  in  spectrum  photography. 
The  wave  length  of  the  red  is  about  one  forty* 
thousandth  of  an  inch,  and  the  wave  length  of 
the  violet,  which  is  on  the  left  of  the  screen, 
is  about  one  fifty-seven  -  thousandth  of  an 
inch.  Each  ray  of  light  is  transmitted  in 
air  at  the  rate  of  about  190,000  miles  in 
a  second.  Thus  the  number  of  vibrations 
of  the  red  rays  is  500  million  millions,  and  700 
million  millions  in  the  case  of  the  violet  rays, 
and  this  rapid  succession  of  blows  batters 
against  anything  upon  which  they  fall.  The 
mean  violet,  I  may  say,  is  the  photographic 
light  par  excellence,  and  we  shall  recollect 
that  such  rays  might  beat  upon  the  sensitive 
salt  which  we  expose  to  it  700  million  million 
times  in  a  second.  Therefore,  you  see,  if  you 
give  an  exposure  of  the  100th  of  a  second 
you  still  have  seven  million  millions  of  vibra- 
tions beating  on  the  sensitive  plate,  so  there  is 
ample  vibration  to  effect  any  change  on  the 
molecule  of  silver  chloride,  supposing  -always 
the  amplitude  (or  distance  of  swing)  is 
sufficient.  Instantaneous  photography  will 
not  be  complete,  I  suppose,  until  you  can  reduce 
by  a  million  times. 

We  may  take  it  that  an  atom  vibrates  some- 
what in  the  same  way  that  a  pendulum 
vibrates.     Here  I  have  a  very   rough  contriv 


ance  to  show  what  I  mean.  I  set  the  pendulum 
swinging.  Now  picture  to  yourself  that  the  bob 
is  an  atom,  and  picture  to  yourself,  also,  a 
wave  of  light  falling  upon  that  pendulum  ;  if 
the  wave  of  light  be  synchronous  with  the  pen- 
dulum, it  will  increase  the  swing,  or,  in  other 
words,  it  will  increase  the  amplitude  of  the 
swing  of  the  pendulum.  For  a  rude  illustra- 
tion, suppose  I  take  puffs  of  my  breath  as 
illustrating  the  beating  of  the  wave  of 
light,  and  suppose  the  atom  to  be  at  rest ;  I 
begin,  and  I  blow ;  every  time  I  give  a  well- 
timed  puff  to  that  pendulum,  the  pendulum 
increases  in  amplitude,  or  swing.  But  if  my 
breath  does  not  come  in  unison  with  that  pen- 
dulum [blowing  irregularly],  you  see  that  very 
soon  I  should  bring  that  pendulum  to  rest ;  in 
other  words,  unless  the  wave  of  light  beats  in 
unison  with  the  atom,  the  amplitude  cannot 
be  much  increased.  It  is  true  that  as  long  as 
the  breath  strikes  the  bob  as  it  is  going  away 
from  me  the  amplitude  is  increased,  but  if  the 
puffs  are  regular  and  slightly  more  rapid  or 
slower  than  the  pendulum  oscillation,  the 
amplitude  must  eventually  be  diminished. 

Here  we  are  met  with  a  difficulty,  and  a  very 
great  difficulty.  I  exposed  the  plate  to  the 
spectrum,  and  you  see  the  blackening  not  only 
was  where  one  wave  of  light  synchronised 
with  that  atomic  motion,  but  that  there 
were  a  great  many  waves  of  light,  extend- 
ing from  the  ultra-violet  as  far  as  the 
blue  which  affected  it.  How  are  we  to  get 
over  that  ?  That  is  a  difficulty  which  has 
puzzled  a  great  many  people.  I  would  ask 
you  again  to  form  a  mental  picture  of  how  that 
could  possibly  arise.  I  do  not  say  that  it  is 
the  correct  way,  but  all  I  say  is  that  you  can 
form  a  picture  in  your  own  mind,  can  conceive 
of  how  it  could  be  done.  Here,  I  have  another 
pendulum,  but  in  this  case  the  bob  is  attached 
to  an  elastic  band.  The  time  of  the  vibration 
of  a  pendulum  depends  upon  the  length  of  the 
pendulum.  Therefore,  if  during  the  time  of 
the  oscillation  of  the  pendulum  I  alter  the 
length,  I  also  alter  the  rate  at  which  the  pen- 
dulum vibrates  during  any  instant.  I  pull 
down  the  weight  of  the  pendulum,  and  at 
the  same  time  set  it  swinging,  and  you  will 
see  that  during  every  part  of  this  motion  the 
length  of  the  pendulum  is  altered  so  that  a 
great  many  differently  timed  puffs  of  breath 
might  be  synchronous  with  the  pendulum.  It 
is  not  like  this  other  rigid  one,  where  it  is  of 
a  definite  length,  but  here  the  length  of  the 
pendulum  keeps  altering.  I  only  ask  you  to 
form  a  mental  picture  of  the  way  in  which  such 


a  thing  might  happen.  In  this  way  you  can 
picture  to  yourself  how  a  molecule  might 
vibrate,  and  still  be  synchronous  with  more 
than  one  vibration  of  light. 

Proceeding  another  step,  I  may  say  at  once 
that,  to  my  mind,  the  theory  of  the  photographic 
image  is  well  established.  I  know  that  there 
are  some  people  who  differ,  but  in  my  own 
mind  the  formation  of  the  photographic 
image  is  not  a  working  hypothesis,  but  it  is  a 
theory.  The  difference  between  a  working 
hypothesis  and  a  theory  is  this — that  you  adopt 
a  certain  idea  and  say,  "  I  will  work  upon  that 
idea,  and  see  whether  every  experiment  fits  with 
the  idea  I  have  conceived.  If  it  does  not  fit, 
then  that  working  hypothesis  is  no  use.  I 
must  give  it  up,  I  must  take  some  other  work- 
ing hypothesis."  As  regards  the  idea  of  the 
formation  of  the  photographic  image,  I  think 
that  it  has  passed  from  the  stage  of  the  work- 
ing hypothesis  into  one  of  a  really  acceptable 
theory.  It  does  not  follow  that  everybody  will 
accept  it,  but  still  it  is  an  acceptable  theory, 
accepted  by  most  people.  I  am  not  going  to 
enter  into  that  very  strongly  to-night.  At  the 
next  meeting  of  the  Photographic  Society,  I 
propose  to  deal  with  it  more  fully ;  but,  at  the 
same  time,  I  just  wish  to  state  publicly,  to 
perhaps  a  more  extended  audience  than  I  shall 
see  at  the  Photographic  Society  in  about  three 
weeks'  time,  that  this  photographic  image 
theory — that  is  to  say,  the  theory  as  to  the 
action  of  light  upon  molecules  of  silver — is  as 
well  established  as,  at  all  events,  the  wave 
theory  of  light  itself.  Now,  I  am  going  to 
show  you  an  experiment  which,  perhaps,  will 
help  to  illustrate  what  I  mean  by  the  vibrations 
of  atoms.  In  this  slide  I  have  got  a  gelatine 
plate,  and  I  have  a  little  flat  iron  which  has 
been  made  warm.  It  is  rather  too  warm  to  be 
borne  comfortably.  Here  I  have  a  phosphores- 
cent plate,  which  I  propose  to  illuminate  with 
magnesium  wire,  in  order  to  give  an  even 
source  of  light ;  I  press  this  flat  iron  against 
the  back  of  the  plate  which  is  in  this  slide  for 
a  short  time.  I  shall  not  let  the  plate  cool,  but 
while  it  is  warm  I  will  expose  it  to  the  phos- 
phorescent light  for  about  fifteen  seconds.  The 
plate  is  now  allowed  to  become  cold,  and  is 
developed.  If  everything  has  gone  right,  we 
ought  to  have  something  which  shows  us  that 
the  oscillations  of  the  atoms  of  bromide  of 
silver  (which  is  the  silver  salt  on  this  plate) 
have  been  given  extra  amplitude  by  the  action 
of  the  heated  iron  to  the  back  of  the  plate. 
I  am  afraid  that  I  cannot  show  you  the 
development  in  the  light.    [When  the  develop- 


ment    had    been    carried    out  the   plate  was 
shown.] 

You  now  see  we  have  a  picture  of  this  flat 
iron  produced  by  the  deeper  blackening  of  the 
heated  part,  though  the  whole  plate  was  given 
but  a  short  exposure  to  the  light  from  the 
phosphorescent  plate.  I  will  impress  this 
further  upon  you.  I  have  here  a  collodio- 
bromide  emulsion  plate.  But  in  this  case, 
instead  of  heating  it  by  a  flat  iron,  we 
will  heat  it  by  immersion  in  hot  water. 
Of  course  a  collodion  plate  is  not  so  sensi- 
tive as  a  gelatine  plate.  I  put  it  into  cold 
water  for  a  short  time  to  moisten  it,  and  then 
dip  half  of  it  into  some  nearly  boiling  water; 
on  withdrawing  it,  I  expose  it  to  this  candle, 
and  develop  it  when  it  gets  cool,  which  we 
effect  by  placing  it  a  short  time  in  cold  water. 
It  will  be  seen  that  the  part  immersed  in  hot 
water  is  much  blacker  than  that  which  was 
exposed  cool.  If  I  heat  the  plate  and  allow 
it  to  cool  and  then  expose,  there  will  be  no 
effect.  The  plate  will  develop  normally,  for 
the  increased  amplitude  of  vibration  will  have 
ceased,  and  the  light  will  have  to  perform  the 
same  work  on  each  part  of  the  plate.  Now, 
in  whatever  manner  increased  amplitude  is 
given,  when  the  cause  of  the  increased  ampli- 
tude is  withdrawn,  the  amplitude  will  cease  in 
the  same  manner.  The  case  before  us  next 
was  the  cause,  and  it  will  cease  after  a  very 
short  period,  in  other  words,  when  the  plate 
gets  cold.  One  of  the  chief  reasons  against 
what  we  may  call  the  "vibration  theory" 
of  the  photographic  image,  namely,  that  the 
molecule  is  unaltered  by  the  action  of  light, 
is  this— that  the  increased  amplitude  would 
cease  with  the  same  rapidity  with  which  it 
would  cease  when  the  hot  iron  was  applied 
to  tin'  back  ;  that  is  to  say,  after  five  or  ten 
minutes  the  amplitude  of  the  vibrations  would 
come  back  to  the  normal  extent,  a  condition 
which  is  not  fulfilled  in  the  photographic 
image. 

I  can  illustrate  this  in  a  very  visible  manner. 
I  think  you  can  all  see  this  phosphorescent 
plate.  Now,  what  is  the  reason  of  that  phos- 
phorescence taking  place?  It  is  that  the 
atoms  of  the  molecules  which  comprise  this 
phosphorescent  material  are  swinging  in  a 
certain  rhythm,  which  gives  us  the  sensation 
of  light.  Now,  if  I  apply  a  hot  iron  to  the 
back  of  this  plate,  I  think  at  once  you  will  see 
that  the  image  of  the  hot  iron  is  present. 
Here  is  the  same  kind  of  action  taking  place 
in  the  one  case  as  in  the  other. 

Now  we  come  to  another  point,  which  is  a 


slightly  different  one,  and  that  is  the  energy 
of  radiation.  I  may  say  that  the  energy  of 
radiation  is  a  subject  on  which  I  could  dis- 
course for  a  good  many  hours,  but  here  I  can 
devote  but  two  minutes  to  it.  I  must  try  to 
make  it  as  clear  as  I  can.  I  hold  in  my  hand 
a  little  instrument  which  is  called  a  thermo- 
pile, which  you  see  has  a  narrow  slit  which 
could  be  narrowed  to  any  degree  of  fineness  ; 
attached  to  it  is  a  screw  motion,  which  will 
make  that  slit  travel  along  the  base  of  the 
instrument ;  beneath  that  slit  are  some  thermo- 
electric couples.  It  is  not  my  business  to 
enter  into  how  they  are  made,  but  still  we 
know  that,  when  thermo-electric  couples  are 
heated,  an  electric  current  is  generated  suffi- 
ciently strong  to  cause  the  needle  of  a  galvano- 
meter to  deviate  ;  and  the  amount  of  energy 
of  radiation  which  falls  upon  the  face  of  the 
pile  can  be  measured  by  the  deviation  of  the 
galvanometer  needle,  from  the  energy  heating 
the  lampblack  at  the  junction  of  the  couples. 
In  a  great  many  experiments  which  were  made, 
this  thermopile  was  caused  to  travel  along 
the  spectrum  by  the  screw  motion,  and  at 
every  part  of  the  spectrum  at  distances  of, 
say,  a  quarter  of  a  turn  or  half  a  turn  of  the 
screw,  the  amount  of  deviation  which  was 
given  to  the  galvanometer  needle  was  read  off. 
By  that  means  we  are  able  to  compare  the 
energy  existent  at  different  parts  of  the 
spectrum.  The  spectrum  used  was  that  of 
the  electric  light,  the  comparative  energies 
at  different  parts  of  its  spectrum  I  have  in  the 
diagram— at  five  turns  of  the  screw  we  have 
the  end  of  the  red,  and  at  different  turns  we 
have  the  yellow,  the  green,  the  blue,  and  the 
violet ;  whilst  from  five  to  twenty  we  have  the 
dark  rays  which  lie  below  the  red,  and  with 
which  we  are  not  to  deal  to-night  at  all  events. 
The  energy,  I  may  say,  being  measured  by 
taking  the  amount  of  the  deflection  of  the 
galvanometer  needle,  you  will  see  that  the 
dotted  line  divides  the  energy  area  into  two 
parts. 

On  measuring  this  area  of  the  curve  in 
which  lie  all  dark  rays,  and  the  area  of  the 
curve  for  the  visible  rays,  it  will  be  found  that, 
roughly  speaking,  the  energy  of  the  latter 
rays  are  about  half  that  of  the  former.  But 
for  photographic  action  we  do  not  have  any- 
thing like  that  amount.  The  red  rays  for 
ordinary  photographic  work  are  useless  ;  and 
why  that  is  we  shall  see  by  and  by.  We  will  say 
that  the  photographic  action  stops  at  the  blue, 
and  we  find  that  the  total  energy  of  radiation 
which  is  used  for  photographic  purposes   in 


8 


the  electric  light,  is  only  about  one-hundredth 
part  of  the  whole  energy  of  radiation.  The 
remaining  ninety-nine  parts  are  wasted  as  far 
as  photography  is  concerned,  except  in  so  far  as 
they  heat  up  the  molecules  in  the  same  way  as 
the  flat  iron  heated  up  the  molecules  on  the 
photographic  plates.  The  other  curves  show 
the  energy  of  incandescent  lamps.  You  will 
see  that  they  have  very  little  of  what  is  called 
actinic  power ;  that  is  to  say,  they  have  very 
little  blue  ray  at  all  compared  with  the  arc 
light.  In  the  lowest  curve  we  have  a  lamp  at 
only  a  yellow  heat,  the  middle  curve  being 
that  at  a  white  heat,  and  you  will  notice  the 
enormous  difference  there  is  in  the  energy 
between  the  two.  The  energy  of  the  middle 
curve,  which  measures  the  total  energy  of 
radiation  from  the  incandescent  light,  is  about 
twelve  times  that  of  the  visible  power.  Yet, 
when  you  have  to  measure  the  photographic 
part  of  the  spectrum,  you  will  see  that  it  is 
only  about  eighty.  That  is  to  say,  supposing 
you  have  a  filament  of  an  incandescent  lamp 
which  is  one-hundredth  of  an  inch  wide  and 
half-an-inch  long,  then  if  you  take  an  arc 
electric  light  and  cut  off  from  the  glowing 
positive  pole  the  same  area,  the  photographic 
value  of  the  one,  area  for  area,  is  about  eighty 
times  that  of  the  other.  [A  spectrum  was 
thrown  on  the  screen.] 

I  will  ask  my  assistant  to  put  in  front  of  the 
slit  something  which  I  showed  you  at  my  last 
Cantor  Lectures,  and  which  I  dare  say  you  have 
forgotten  all  about.  That  something  is  a  film  of 
the  same  silver  salt  with  which  I  photographed 
the  spectrum  at  the  commencement  of  the 
lecture.  You  see  that  it  cuts  off  all  the  violet, 
and  well  down  into  the  blue.  I  want  to  show 
you  that  the  colour  of  the  photographic  spec- 
trum is  perfectly  different  from  that  which  the 
human  eye  can  see.  I  wish  to  show  you  a 
little  device  by  which,  perhaps,  I  shall  be  able 
to  give  you  an  idea  of  the  integrated  colour. 
A  tolerably  bright  spectrum  is  on  the  screen 
of  the  camera  ;  I  raise  the  screen  so  that  the 
spectrum  falls  on  a  lens  placed  a  little  beyond 
it ;  and  if  we  had  time,  I  dare  say  that  we 
should  be  able  to  get  a  screen  placed  in  the 
focus  of  the  second  lens,  so  that  the  recom- 
bined  colours  would  form  a  white  patch,  with- 
out the  slightest  tinge  of  colour.  We  have 
got  a  white  circle,  however,  which  is  sufficient 
for  our  purpose,  though  at  one  margin  there 
is  a  very  narrow  red  fringe  to  it.  [A  white 
patch  about  6  inches  in  diameter  was  formed 
on  a  transparent  screen  about  6  feet  away 
from  the  camera.]     In  the  place  where  the 


coloured  spectrum  is  in  focus,  I  place  a  hori- 
zontal aperture,  about  £-inch  wide,  and  by  a 
little  arrangement  I  can,  by  strips  of  card,  cut 
off  any  colour  I  like  from  falling  on  the  collect- 
ing lens,  so  that  it  recombines  only  the  re- 
maining colours. 

You  remember  that  the  photographic  spec- 
trum does  not  extend  as  far  as  the  green, 
ordinarily  speaking,  so  now  I  cut  off  all 
rays  as  far  as  where  the  photographic  spec- 
trum begins,  and  you  can  see  the  colour  of  the 
light,  which  is  really  useful  for  photography. 
It  is  a  sort  of  sea-green  colour.  If  I  were  to 
take  that  light,  and  pass  it  through  a  slit  and 
a  prism,  you  would  soon  find  that  the  whole  of 
that  spectrum  would  be  photographically 
active,  because  all  the  light  which  is  not 
photographically  active  has  been  cut  off.  I 
shall  have  to  revert  to  this  in  my  next  lecture. 

I  will  show  you  one  more  method  of  re- 
combining  the  photographically  effective  colour 
disc  ;  that  is  by  taking  the  ordinary  disc,  and 
cutting  out  the  red  and  orange.  We  have,  then, 
only  the  green,  the  blue,  and  the  violet ;  and 
those,  when  they  are  combined  together,  ought 
to  give  you  pretty  nearly  the  integration  of  the 
colours  which  are  ordinarily  photographically 
active.  I  will  ask  my  assistant  to  spin  it  in 
front  of  the  lantern.  [The  instrument  was 
rotated.]  I  do  not  know  whether  you  can  all 
see  the  colour-chart  which  I  hold  in  my  hand, 
but  those  who  can  will  see  that  the  colours, 
when  placed  in  the  blue-green  light,  appear 
totally  different  from  what  they  did  in  the 
whiter  light.  The  yellows  are  much  deepened, 
and  the  reds  are  much  blacker. 

I  will  ask  now  to  have  the  spectrum  thrown 
upon  the  screen  once  more,  and  we  will 
again  pass  this  colour-chart  througli  the 
spectrum.  The  colours  are  very  pure  for 
pigments.  I  think  that  it  is  the  finest  colour 
chart  of  the  spectrum  which  I  have  ever  seen. 
It  is  one  prepared  by  Professor  Piazzi  Smyth, 
and  appears  in  his  Madeira  spectroscopic 
observations.  Notice  that  the  blue  appears 
perfectly  black  when  the  chart  is  in  the  red, 
the  red  at  the  left  hand  being  brilliant. 
Passing  it  into  the  yellow,  the  yellow  is 
vigorous ;  the  blue  is  black,  and  the  red 
undimmed.  Upon  my  passing  it  still  farther 
on  in  the  green,  you  will  see  that  the  red  is 
blacker,  and  the  orange  is  blacker,  whilst  the 
yellow  still  keeps  its  colour,  and  the  blue 
begins  begins  to  get  more  bright.  Passing 
it  still  farther  on  into  the  violet,  we  see  that 
the  yellow  is  now  perfectly  black,  the  red  has 
gone,    and    the    blue  begins    to    shine    outi 


9 


Passing  still  further,  you  will  see  that  the  blue 
still  shines  out,  but  is  less  intense,  all  the 
other  rays  appearing  black.  Upon  my  passing 
it  again  rapidly  through,  you  will  now  be  pre- 
pared for  the  changes  that  take  place.  In 
this  lantern,  which  has  been  used  to  form 
the  spectrum,  the  light  passes  through  a  slit. 
The  slit,  you  see,  is  perfectly  straight,  with 
parallel  edges.  Now  comes  the  question,  "  Is 
it  necessary  that  light,  in  order  to  be  decom- 
posed into  a  spectrum,  should  be  passed 
through  a  slit  of  this  description,  or  what 
shapes  may  it  be  allowed  to  take  ?" 

I  propose  to  try  to  answer  this  query  in 
an  experimental  manner  a  little.  First  of  all, 
we  will  see  what  the  effect  will  be  if  we  use 
no  slit  at  all.  You  see  that  the  colours  are  not 
pure.  I  replace  the  slit,  and  you  will  see  at 
once  that  we  now  have,  not  the  various  colours 
light  overlapping,  but  a  tolerably  pure 
spectrum.  Now  let  us  take  a  slit  of  another 
shape— a  zig-zag  slit;  and  here  we  have 
another  form  of  spectrum  delineation  of  the 
rays.  Placing  a  metal  in  the  arc,  the  bright 
lines  due  to  the  vapour  flash,  and,  it  will 
be  seen,  take  the  zig-zag  form  of  the  slit. 
There  is,  then,  no  particular  reason  for 
using  a  straight  slit,  except  convenience. 
Then,  again,  I  may  take  a  ring  slit,  and  to 
test  its  value  we  will  put  a  little  silver  in  the 
arc  to  show  you.  I  am  not  simply  showing 
this  as  a  pretty  experiment,  but  I  want  to  show 
you  that  such  a  slit  is  absolutely  useful  in 
photography,  the  spectrum  of  silver  now  on 
the  screen  shows  rings  of  different  coloured 
rays.  It  is  a  very  pretty  spectrum.  This  form 
of  slit  is  extremely  useful  in  one  branch  of 
spectrum  analysis. 


You  are  perfectly  aware  that,  during  a  total 
eclipse,  the  body  of  the  moon  covers  the  sun  ; 
but  that  there  are  seen  beyond  the  dark  moon 
certain  red  protuberances  which  belong  to  the 
sun,  and  are  known  as  "prominences."  It 
has  been  the  work  of  astronomers  to  determine 
the  composition  of  those  protuberances,  and 
also  to  form  a  definite  idea  of  the  corona  of 
light  which  surrounds  the  body  of  the  sun, 
and  can  only  be  properly  seen  during  a 
total  eclipse.  The  picture  on  the  screen  is  a 
representation  of  the  total  eclipse  of  the  sun 
which  took  place  in  Egypt  in  1882.  It  is  a 
negative  picture,  and  of  course  the  dark  halo 
which  you  see  around  was  seen  as  a  bright 
halo,  and  the  white  disc  is  the  black  moon. 
On  the  left-hand  bottom  corner  you  may 
notice  the  comet  which  was  discovered  during 
the  eclipse,  and  which  received  the  name  of 
Tcwfik,  after  the  Khedive  of  Egypt.  Round 
the  disc  of  the  moon  are  little  prominences. 
Those  prominences  are  vastly  more  bright 
than  the  corona  itself,  which  is  the  halo 
extending  some  distance  round  the  sun.  Thus 
we  have  a  bright  ring  of  light  round  the  moon 
surrounded  by  a  feeble  light.  The  former, 
when  viewed  by  means  of  a  lens  in  front  of 
which  a  prism  is  placed,  shows  rings  of  colour 
composing  these  prominences,  and  of  course 
these  rings  can  be  photographed. 

I  now  show  a  transparency  of  a  photograph 
taken  in  Egypt  by  means  of  the  slitless 
camera,  from  which  much  valuable  information 
has  been  derived. 

The  ring  slit  was  used  by  an  Italian  astro- 
nomer about  1870  ;  but  the  eclipse  in  Egypt 
was  the  first  time  it  was  entirely  successful  for 
photography. 


10 


LECTURE  II.— Delivered   April    i-j,    1885. 


In  my  last  lecture,  I  left  off  with  the  use  of 
the  slit  in  the  spectroscope,  and  I  showed  you, 
I  think,  that  under  certain  circumstances  the 
slit  which  had  the  form  of  a  ring  was  useful, 
having  previously  demonstrated  that  it  was 
not  necessaiy  that  the  slit  should  be  straight, 
but  that  it  was  most  convenient  that  it  should 
be  so.  I  will  next  deal  with  the  subject  of  the 
prism.  We  know  that  prisms  are  employed  to 
separate  the  different  coloured  rays,  as  each 
colour  is  differently  refracted  as  it  passes 
through  the  prism,  and  it  is  this  difference  in 
the  index  of  refraction  between  the  red  ray  and 
the  violet  ray  which  gives  the  amount  of  dis- 
persion in  forming  the  visible  spectrum.  Of 
course,  if  we  go  beyond  the  violet,  there  are 
invisible  rays,  while  again  below  the  red  there 
are  also  dark  rays,  which  also  have  their  in- 
dices of  refraction,  but  I  wish  to  show  you  the 
influence  that  the  material  of  the  prism  itself 
has  on  the  dispersion  of  the  visible  spectrum. 

I  have  here  a  prism  of  6o°  built  up  of  six  or 
seven  different  triangles  of  glass.  It  is  appa- 
rently homogeneous,  but  when  we  pass  light 
through  it  we  shall  find  that  it  is  anything  but 
homogeneous ;  in  other  words,  the  different 
portions  are  differentlyrefractive.  The  different 
portions  of  the  prism  are  all  glass,  as  I  have 
said,  but  of  different  densities,  and  the  denser 
the  glass,  the  more  are  rays  refracted,  and  the 
greater  dispersion  between  the  red  and  violet 
there  is.  [A  slice  of  light  was  passed  through 
this  built-up  prism,  and  the  different  spectra 
thrown  on  the  screen.]  You  will  notice,  by  the 
spectra  on  the  screen,  that  the  length  of  the  top 
spectrum  between  the  red  and  violet  is  much 
smaller  than  that  of  the  bottom  spectrum.  The 
glass  which  gives  the  dispersion  to  the  latter 
is  much  denser  glass  than  that  which  gives  it 
to  the  former.  Practically  speaking,  there- 
fore, we  may  say  the  denser  the  glass  the 
greater  refraction,  and  the  greater  dispersion 
there  is.  For  most  purposes  in  spectroscopy, 
it  is  as  well  to  use  as  dense  a  glass  as  possible 
in  order  to  get  the  maximum  amount  of  dis- 
persion. I  will  now  combine  three  prisms 
together,  two  of  a  light  glass,  and  one  of  a 
denser,  and  we  get  a  combination,  in  which, 


although  the  main  beam  will  pass  straight 
on  to  the  screen,  yet  the  presence  of  dis- 
persion is  also  shown  by  the  formation  of 
a  spectrum.  This  is  an  example  of  what 
is  called  a  direct  vision  prism.  The  spectrum 
is  given  by  the  differences  of  the  refrac- 
tive indices  for  each  ray  in  the  two  kinds 
of  glass.  For  some  purposes  this  kind  of 
compound  prism  is  very  useful,  and  parti- 
cularly for  lecture  experiments,  but,  as  a  rule, 
for  photographic  purposes  I  should  not  re- 
commend it,  on  account  of  the  internal  re- 
flections which  take  place  between  the  different 
surfaces  of  the  glass,  though  they  are  cemented 
together.  You  must  recollect,  wherever  there 
is  a  difference  in  density  between  two  media, 
in  other  words,  a  difference  in  the  refractive 
indices,  there  is  always  a  certain  amount  of  re- 
flection, and  those  reflections,  being  white 
light,  are  rather  apt  to  fog  the  plate,  and  give 
you  false  notions  of  what  you  get  in  the 
photograph. 

We  come  now  to  a  much  more  important 
point  with  regard  to  the  spectrum,  and  that  is, 
what  is  the  best  material  to  use.  In  those 
prisms  which  I  have  already  shown  you,  the 
material  was  glass.  Now  glass  is,  compara- 
tively speaking,  a  mixture  of  materials,  and  has 
no  definite  chemical  formula ;  but  when  we  come 
to  a  material  which  has  some  definite  chemical 
formula,  we  find  that,  as  a  rule,  it  has  certain 
properties  which  are  invaluable  in  certain  forms 
of  spectroscopy,  more  particularly  when  the 
photographic  plate  has  to  be  brought  into 
requisition.  Quartz  is  an  example  of  this ;  it  is 
a  definite  compound  of  silicon  and  oxygen,  and 
we  find  that  it  has  certain  definite  advantages 
which  are  not  to  be  found  in  glass  prisms.  The 
dispersion  is  not  quite  so  great  as  it  is  with 
glass,  but,  on  the  other  hand,  it  lets  through 
rays  which  are  cut  off  completely  by  glass,  as 
I  hope  to  show  you  on  the  screen.  This  quartz 
prism  has  very  well-worked  faces,  and  we  will 
send  a  beam  of  light  through  it,  and  then 
proceed  to  investigate  its  behaviour.  [Spec- 
trum thrown  on  screen.] 

I  may  further  say,  in  reference  to  this,  that 
the  condenser  in  that  lamp  is  quartz,  the  lens 


n 


is  quartz,  and  the  prism  itself  is  quartz,  so  that 
we  are  dealing  with  nothing  but  quartz. 
Now,  the  question  comes,  is  thereany  advantage 
to  photographers  in  using  such  a  material  as 
quartz.  Let  us  first  see  the  extent  of  the 
spectrum.  By  placing  a  card  which  has  been 
washed  over  with  quinine  in  the  ultra-violet 
part  of  the  spectrum,  you  are  able  to  see 
these  ultra-violet  rays  glowing  with  a  pale  blue 
light,  and  you  will  notice  to  what  a  great 
length  these  rays  reach  beyond  the  ordinary 
visible  point  of  the  spectrum.  Now,  by  placing 
a  piece  of  glass  in  front  of  the  slit,  you  will 
see  thatilie  ultra-violet  spectrum  is  very  much 
shortened ;  in  other  words,  the  glass  has 
absorbed  these  rays.  I  may  repeat  the  experi- 
ment with  a  card  which  has  been  brushed  over 
with  paraffin  oil,  and  the  same  result  holds 
good. 

I  have  here  a  photograph  of  the  electric 
arc  taken  in  another  manner,  to  which  I  shall 
have  to  direct  your  attention  presently.  The 
ight  in  this  case  has  to  pass  through  no  glass 
whatever.  The  spectrum  was  taken  by  a 
diffraction  apparatus  ;  for  the  top  part  of  the 
spectrum  a  glass  was  interposed  in  front  of 
the  slit,  and  we  see  the  difference  there  is  in 
the  spectra,  owing  to  the  use  of  glass  in  one 
case,  and  not  in  the  other.  The  glass  ap- 
parently cuts  off  many  useful  rays  ;  but  I  will 
now  draw  your  attention  to  the  solar  spectrum 
taken  in  the  same  way,  in  which  there  has  been 
a  glass  placed  in  front  of  the  slit  for  one  spec- 
trum, and  not  in  the  other.  Both  spectra, 
practically,  reach  the  same  limits.  We  now 
can  answer  as  to  whether  it  would  be  advisable 
for  photographers  to  use  quartz  lenses  for 
ordinary  photographic  purposes  or  not.  Re- 
collect that  every  ray  of  light  you  saw  fluoresce 
on  the  screen  is  useful  for  photographers  when 
they  are  using  a  light  such  as  we  have  in  the 
electric  light.  You  will  see,  then,  from  that, 
if  the  electric  arc  light  was  usually  employed, 
all  those  rays  which  are  cut  off  by  the  glass 
could  not  be  utilised  by  them,  and,  therefore, 
there  would  be  so  much  power  wasted.  Now 
photographers,  as  a  rule,  do  not  work  with  the 
electric  light,  but  with  sunlight  ;  we  have 
seen  that  in  the  solar  spectrum  taken  under 
similar  conditions,  the  glass  practically  cuts 
off  none  of  the  ultra-violet  rays ;  the  atmo- 
sphere of  the  earth,  or  of  the  sun,  or  both, 
cuts  off  the  extreme  ultra-violet  rays  before 
the  light  reaches  us.  We  therefore  come 
to  the  conclusion  that,  so  far  as  photo- 
graphic work  with  sunlight  is  concerned, 
there  would  be  no  advantage  in  using  a  quartz 


lens  over  the  ordinary  photographic  lens. 
Some  years  ago,  Mr.  Claudet  made  an  agate 
lens,  which  he  considered  would  give  him 
greater  advantages  over  the  ordinary  photo- 
graphic lens,  simply  because  he  could  utilise 
the  ultra-violet  rays,  but  I  think  you  will  see 
from  this  there  is  no  advantage  in  using  such 
a  lens.  Remember,  however,  if  you  are  photo- 
graphing the  spectrum  of  the  electric  light,  or 
using  it  for  illuminating  a  sitter,  there  is  a 
very  great  advantage  in  using  quartz.  We 
may  use  another  definite  chemical  compound  in 
the  shape  of  Iceland  spar.  I  have  here  a  very 
beautifully  worked  prism  of  Iceland  spar, 
which  has  a  definite  composition  of  calcium 
and  carbon,  and  I  dare  say  that  we  shall 
reach  very  nearly  to  the  same  ray  limit  as 
we  did  in  the  quartz  experiment.  Iceland 
spar  holds  an  intermediate  position  between 
quartz  and  glass.  It  was  with  such  a  prism 
as  that  that  Dr.  Huggins  took  his  famous 
star  spectra,  and  I  thought  it  might  interest 
you  to  throw  one  or  two  of  these  on  the 
screen.  They  are  very  small,  but  the 
definition  is  very  beautiful.  Many  of  the 
black  lines  in  these  spectra  indicate,  probably, 
hydrogen.  It  remains  to  be  seen  whether  Dr. 
Huggins  has  attained  any  advantage  in  using 
Iceland  spar  instead  of  glass,  for  if  the  ultra- 
violet stellar  light  is  absorbed,  as  with  sun- 
light, no  advantage  would  be  gained.  I  may 
mention  that  he  gives  the  composition  of  the 
stars  by  reference  to  the  spectral  lines  of  well- 
known  elements. 

One  more  point  is  this  :  Would  it  be  ad- 
vantageous to  use  a  mirror  instead  of  a  lens  ? 
There  is  a  great  deal  to  be  said  about  this, 
particularly  in  spectroscopy,  where  we  have 
to  examine  everything  minutely.  The  material 
we  utilise  most  easily  in  the  case  of  a  mirror 
is  silver  ;  that  is  to  say,  we  get  a  glass  mirror, 
and  silver  it  on  the  front  surface.  Now,  the 
question  is,  does  the  silver  reflect  every  ray  in 
the  same  way  that  quartz  would  transmit  it  ? 
Here  I  have  a  photograph  which  should  give 
an  answer  to  that  question.  The  bottom  half 
of  the  spectrum  was  taken  as  reflected  from  a 
quartz  surface,  the  top  half  of  the  spectrum  was 
reflected  from  a  silver  surface,  and  you  will 
see  that  at  one  certain  part  of  the  latter  the 
rays  are  very  nearly  absent,  though  beyond 
that  again  they  are  present.  Where  those 
rays  are  wanting  is  just  at  the  end  of  the  solar 
spectrum,  and  therefore,  when  using  sunlight, 
it  is  no  great  advantage  to  use  a  quartz  re- 
flector over  a  silver  reflector.  In  spectro- 
scopy  it   is    necessary   to    know   exactly   the 


li 


qualities  of  all  the  substances  with  which  you 
are  dealing. 

One  question  in  photography  and  in  spectro- 
scopy is,  what  width  of  slit  you  would  use — 
what  slice  of  light  would  you  allow  to  pass 
through  ?  Here  let  me  give  you  a  demon- 
stration. In  the  centre  of  this  black  disc  there 
is  a  fine  line  of  light,  and  there  is  a  micro- 
meter screw  by  which  we  can  tell  how  many 
thousandths  of  an  inch  wide  it  is.  As  a  rule, 
about  ji^  of  an  inch  is  the  dimension  used  for 
ordinary  work. 

I  have  been  referring  to  the  photographs 
to  two  spectra  on  the  same  plate,  and  I 
must  show  you  how  it  is  managed.  For  this 
purpose,  it  is  necessary  to  have  an  adjunct  to 
the  slit,  and  that  is  a  shutter,  which  is  able  to 
cut  off  half  the  slit  at  one  time,  and  after- 
wards leave  that  part  open  and  close  the 
other  half  already  used.  By  this  means  we 
can  get  one  spectrum  adjacent  to  another.  In 
comparing  spectra  of  different  metals  with 
each  other,  we  are  able  to  tell  whether  we 
have  any  two  lines  coincident  one  with  the 
other. 

Photographic  spectroscopy  is  the  easiest 
thing  in  the  world  when  you  know  how  to  do 
it,  but  it  requires  a  deal  of  patience  to  learn 
every  dodge.  As  a  rule,  a  photographer  is  a 
patient  man  ;  indeed,  there  ought  to  be  no 
class  of  men  who  have  more  patience  than 
photographers ;  hence  spectroscopy  should 
not  be  difficult  to  them. 

Here  is  another  piece  of  apparatus  which  is 
very  useful  in  the  spectroscope.  It  is  an 
apparatus  by  which  you  can  take  a  great  many 
spectra  on  one  plate.  I  need  not  enter  into  its 
details,  it  is  simply  a  dark  slide,  which  by  a 
rack  and  pinion  motion  can  be  raised,  so  that 
the  plate  gives  a  fresh  surface  at  each  ex- 
posure. The  only  light  accessible  to  the  plate 
comes  through  an  opening  of  about  three- 
quarters  of  an  inch  wide  cut  longitudinally  in 
the  shade.  By  this  method  we  can  get  about 
sixteen  different  spectra  of  different  materials 
on  the  same  plate. 

Here  is  another  piece  of  apparatus  which  is 
also  useful  in  investigations  with  photo- 
graphy. It  is,  a  slide  in  which  you  can  expose 
plates  in  different  gases  or  liquids,  that  is  to 
say  in  water,  in  alcohol,  in  nitrogen,  and  so 
on.  It  is  essentially  a  glass  cell  which  slips 
into  a  dark  slide  especially  adapted  for  it ;  on 
the  top  there  is  an  air-tight  junction  which  is 
screwed  down,  and  there  are  two  little  tubes 
through  which  you  can  fill  the  cell  with  gas  or 
water,  or  whatever  other  material  you  wish  to 


use.  This  is  very  useful  in  investigating  the 
behaviour  of  different  sensitive  salts  under 
different  conditions  of  moisture,  pressure,  &c. 
This  cell  has  been  used  in  a  great  many 
hundred  experiments,  and  I  hope  it  will  be  used 
in  a  great  many  more.  Those  who  are  going  in 
for  spectroscopy  should  not  be  without  such  an 
apparatus  as  this,  for  I  do  not  believe  much 
real  investigation  can  be  done  without  some- 
thing of  the  kind.  The  sensitive  salt  of  silver 
acts  differently  when  isolated  from  its  atmo- 
spheric surroundings,  and  the  only  way  to 
ascertain  how  it  does  so  is  to  expose  it  with 
other  surroundings,  and  to  differentiate  the 
results  one  from  another.  There  is  no  such 
thing  as  a  perfect  vacuum  ;  you  cannot  say 
you  expose  a  plate  in  vacuo,  and,  for  this 
reason,  I  say  you  have  to  differentiate  between 
the  different  media  in  which  you  expose  a  plate, 
in  order  to  get  at  the  true  result  which  would 
happen  supposing  you  could  expose  the  plate 
in  vacuo. 

You  saw  last  time  how  you  could  recombine 
a  spectrum  by  means  of  a  lens,  to  form  white 
light. 

Now,  I  want  to  show  you  that  it  is  not  im- 
possible to  develop  a  plate  in  white  light.  I 
expose  a  plate  behind  a  negative  to  the  electric 
light,  and  in  the  cell  which  is  placed  in  the 
patch  of  white  light  is  some  developing  solu- 
tion (which  is  quite  colourless).  The  plate  is 
dipped  into  it.  The  image  comes  out  into  it, 
although  exposed  to  white  light,  without  fog, 
which  was  supposed  to  be  an  impossibility.  I 
have  another  plate  placed  behind  the  same 
negative.  I  expose  half  of  that  plate  for  half 
a  minute  to  the  white  light  on  the  screen,  and 
the  other  half  to  apparent  darkness,  but  in  the 
same  position  on  the  screen,  for  a  couple  of 
minutes.  The  plate  on  development  shows  that 
the  half  which  was  exposed  to  what  was  pre- 
sumably white  light  gives  no  image,  while  the 
half  exposed  in  the  dark  shows  a  perfect  picture. 
I  dare  say  many  of  you  have  guessed  my 
trick,  for  it  is  merely  a  trick,  but  for  those 
who  have  not,  I  will  show  you  how  it  is  done. 
It  is  perfectly  easy,  by  mixing  two  elements  of 
light  of  different  refrangibility,  to  produce  a 
colour  which,  at  all  events,  to  our  eyes  is  a 
white  light.  But  you  must  not  take  it  for 
granted  that  wherever  you  can  see  white 
light  you  can  photograph  with  it,  because 
it  is  quite  possible  you  may  not.  It  is 
only  a  trick,  but  some  of  these  tricks  bear 
fruit  in  a  very  practical  manner.  I  will 
re-form  white  light  again,  and  we  will  examine 
it  by  means  of  the  colour-chart  I  showed  you 


_ 


<3 


last  time.  You  will  see  that  when  the  red  is 
placed  in  the  white  light  there  is  blackness — 
no  colour  whatever — the  yellow  looks  bright, 
as  does  the  blue,  all  the  other  colours  are 
gone  except  some  few  which  are  of  a  non- 
descript colour.  The  meaning  of  it  is  this, 
we  have  simply  a  combination  of  yellow  and 
blue,  which  gives  us  the  appearance  of  white 
light.  [The  blue  and  yellow  rays  were  shown 
to  be  coming  through  two  slits  placed  at  the 
focusing  screen  of  the  camera.]  The  blue  has 
no  power  of  acting  on  the  iodide  or  chloride  of 
silver,  neither  has  the  yellow,  and,  therefore,  the 
white  light  which  is  made  by  the  combination 
of  those  two  colours  is  powerless  to  act  on 
films  made  of  such  materials  as  those.  We 
can  also  produce  a  white  light,  practically,  by 
a  red  and  green,  and  if  we  examine  this  (which 
is  a  very  good  imitation  of  white  light)  in  the 
same  way,  you  will  not  see  the  whole  series  of 
colours  in  the  colour  chart  any  better  than  you 
did  before.  The  red  comes  out  perfectly, 
but  the  blue  is  no  longer  visible  ;  the  blue 
becomes  green,  and  the  violet  becomes  red ; 
the  yellow  is  also  not  intense.  This  is  because 
we  have  only  two  colours  present,  viz.,  the  red 


and  the  green.  The  apparent  darkness  to 
which  we  exposed  the  one-half  of  the  plate  was 
in  reality  the  dark  ultra-violet  light,  and  I 
need  say  no  more  regarding  that. 

I  told  you  last  time  that  this  was  a  very 
interesting  way  of  studying  the  spectrum.  You 
see  how,  by  combining  two  lights  together,  you 
may  have  a  light  which  is  perfectly  safe  for 
certain  salts  of  silver.  On  the  screen  is  the 
spectrum  taken  on  the  three  ordinary  salts  of 
silver — chloride,  iodide,  and  bromide.  The 
iodide  stops  exactly  at  the  violet.  Below  that 
light  we  have  no  action  whatever,  and  we, 
therefore,  may  expose  an  iodide  plate  with 
impunity  to  any  rays  below  the  violet. 
A  bromide  plate,  you  see,  is  sensitive 
down  as  far  as  the  yellow,  and,  therefore, 
it  would  be  impossible  to  develop  a  bromide 
plate  in  such  a  light  as  I  showed  you  just 
now,  whereas  iodide  is  perfectly  capable  of 
being  developed  in  such  white  light;  the 
chloride  again  stopped  very  nearly  with  the 
limits  of  violet,  so  that  it  would  be  safe  to 
develop  a  chloride  plate  in  such  a  light. 

[The  lecturer  concluded  with  a  brief  explana- 
tion of  the  diffraction  spectrum.] 


LONDON:    PRI.V1KD   EY    W.   TRCINCE,    JO,    GOUGJ1  SQUARE,   EU  ET  STREET,  E,C 


SOCIETY  FOR  THE  ENCOURAGEMENT 


ARTS,    MANUFACTURES,    AND    COMMERCE. 


CANTOR      LECTURES 


ON 


LIGHT    AND    COLOUR. 


CAP1A1N  W.  DE  W.  ABNEY,  C.B.,  RE.,  F.R.S. 


Delivered  before  the  Society  of  Arts  November  26,  and  December  3,  10,  and  17,  1888. 


LONDON: 
PRINTED   BY  W.   TROUNCE,    10,   GOUGII-SQUARE,   FLEET-STREET,   LONDON,    E.C. 

1889. 


8  V  L  LABUS. 


LECTURE  I. 


The  production  of  colour  and  its  dependence  on  the  kind  of  illuminant. — The  spectrum  and  its 
recombination.— Simple  colours. — The  characteristics  of  colour.— Colours  of  pigments. 

LECTURE  II. 

Interference  colours. — Production  of  colour  by  absorption  ;  by  fluorescence. — The  measurement 
of  the  luminosity  of  colours. — Colour  contrast. — Colour-blindness. 

LECTURE  HI. 
The  effect  of  the  dilution  of  colours. — Mixtures  of  colours. — Impure  colours. — The  measurement 
of  colours  in  terms  of  a  standard. — The  reproduction  of  the  colours  of  a  pigment. 

LECTURE  IV. 
The  action  of  light  on  pigments.— The  cause  of  change.— The  effect  of  sunlight,  sky-light,  and 
artificial  light. — Rays  effective  in  causing  change. — Moisture  and  oxygen  necessary  to  cause  change.— 
Work  done  by  the  absorption  of  light.— Chemical  effect,  heating  effect. 


LIGHT     AND     COLOUR. 

BY 

CAFIAIN  W.  DE  W.  ABNEY,  C.B.,  R.E.,  F.R.S. 


LECTURE  I.— Delivered  November  26,  1888. 


I  hold  in  my  hand  a  series  of  colours  of  various 
hues  and  depths,  some  of  them  are  fugitive 
and  others  are  fast  colours,  and  it  is  the 
object  of  the  lectures  I  have  been  called  upon 
to  deliver  to  show  how  we  can  measure  and 
mix  colours,  and  what  causes  the  fading  of 
some  by  light.  In  four  lectures  this  subject 
can  by  no  means  be  treated  exhaustively,  and 
I  can  only  endeavour  to  explain,  in  as  familiar 
language  as  I  can  command,  and  by  some 
plain  experiments,  what  I  desire  to  enforce 
upon  your  minds.  A  great  deal  has  been 
written  in  the  last  two  years  on  the  subject  of 
the  fading  of  water-colours,  and  from  what 
I  have  gathered  from  the  newspaper  corre- 
spondence, it  Is  not  quite  unnecessary  that  a 
few  familiar  discourses  on  the  subject  should  be 
given,  to  prevent  a  repetition  at  all  events  of 
some  of  the  blunders  that  have  been  made  in 
physical  phenomena.  It  may  be  known  to 
some  who  are  present  here  to-night  that  Dr. 
Russell  and  myself  have  carried  on  a  series  of 
experiments  during  two  years  on  the  subject  of 
the  fading  of  water-colours,  and  as  our  report 
to  the  Science  and  Art  Department,  which  was 
presented  to  Parliament,  pleases  neither  the 
party  who  cry  out  that  water-colours  are  stable, 
nor  yet  the  party  who  proclaim  the  contrary, 
we  may  presume  that  our  results  are  not 
altogether  wrong.  To  these  experiments  I 
shall  refer  later  in  the  course  of  lectures. 

Now,  to  commence  with  the  elements  of 
colour  from  the  physicist's  point  of  view. 
I  wish  to  show  you  that  the  colour  of 
an  object  depends  on  the  composition  of  the 
light  falling  on  it,  on  the  material  on  which 
such  light  falls,  and  on  the  eye  of  the  person. 
The  screen  which  I  have  here  is  what  we  call 
white,  when  viewed  by  ordinary  daylight  or 
artificial  light,  and  such  a  screen  not  only  will 
reflect  white  light,  but  also  all  coloured  lights 
with  the  greatest  brilliancy  possible. 


Let  me  throw  a  spectrum  on  the  screen  to 
serve  as  a  text.  If  a  brilliant  spectrum  be 
looked  at,  we  see  that  it  is  really  divided 
into  three  colours,  blue,  green,  and  red,  with 
shades  of  other  colours  blending  these  colours 
into  one  another.  I  am  not  going  into  the  theory 
of  the  matter,  but  I  would  ask  you  to  remember 
that  the  mean  red  light  has  a  wave  length  of 
about  38,000  to  the  inch,  the  waves  being  in  the 
luminiferous  ether  of  whose  existence  we  only 
know  by  circumstantial  evidence,  the  green  of 
about  50,000  to  the  inch,  and  the  violet  of 
about  64,000  to  the  inch.  The  other  colours 
have  intermediate  wave  lengths. 

I  would  remind  you  of  the  old  experiment 
that  red,  green,  and  blue,  when  combined 
together  by  means  of  rotation,  give  a  grey 
light  which  can  be  matched  by  a  combina- 
tion of  black  and  white.  Here  we  have  such 
a  combination  forming  a  grey  in  the  electric 
light.  The  reason  assigned  for  this  is,  that 
in  the  eye  there  are  three  sets  of  nerves,  one 
which  responds  to  the  red,  one  to  the  green, 
and  the  other  set  to  the  blue.  When  the  disc 
is  at  rest,  an  image  of  these  three  coloured 
sectors  is  formed  on  the  retina,  and  the  nerves 
lying  at  the  parts  of  the  retina  on  which  the 
image  falls  respond  to  these  colours,  and  we 
see  the  sectors  coloured.  If  there  is  astigmat- 
ism, or  defects  in  the  optical  apparatus  of  the 
eye,  the  image  is  not  sharp,  then  we  have  an 
image  of  part  of  the  two  colours  adjacent 
blended  into  one  another,  or  again  if  the 
discs  rotate  rapidly,  s»  that  the  same  part  of 
the  retina  receives  the  coloured  images  in 
quick  succession,  all  three  sets  of  nerves  are 
brought  into  use,  and  we  have  an  impression 
of  white,  or  rather  grey,  produced.  But  this 
subject  I  shall  allude  to  again  in  one  of  my 
subsequent  lectures. 

We  can  recombine  also  the  pure  colours  of 
the  spectrum  by  several  plans,  the  simplest  to 


my  prejudiced  mind  being  that  which  I  intro- 
duced. I  take  away  the  lens  of  long  focus, 
and  put  one  of  shorter  focus  in  its  place 
attached  to  a  camera,  for  reasons  which  I  will 
shortly  explain  (Fig.  i). 

On  a  collimator,  G,  to  which  is  attached  the 
usual  slit,  is  thrown,  by  means  of  a  condensing 
lens,  a  beam  of  light,  which  emanates  from  the 
intensely  white-hot  carbon  positive  pole  of  the 
electric  light.  The  collimating  lens,  L2 ,  is  filled 
by  this  beam,  and  the  rays  issue  parallel  to 
one  another  and  fall  on  the  prisms,  Pi  and  Pa, 
which  disperses  them.  The  dispersed  beam 
falls  on  an  ordinary  camera  lens,  Lj,  of  slightly 
larger  diameter  than  the  height  of  the  prisms, 
and  a  spectrum  is  formed  on  the  focussing- 


Fig.  I. 


/// 

//// 


// 


// 


screen,  D,  of  a  camera.  When  the  focussing- 
screen  is  withdrawn,  the  rays  would  form  a 
confused  patch  of  parti-coloured  light  on  a 
white  screen,  F,  placed  some  four  feet  off  the 
camera.  The  rays,  however,  can  be  collected 
by  a  lens,  L4,  of  about  two  feet  focus,  placed 
near  the  position  of  the  focussing-screen,  and 
slightly  askew.  This  forms  an  image  on  the 
screen  of  the  near  surface  of  the  last  prism, 
P2  ;  and  if  correctly  adjusted,  the  patch  of 
light  should  be  pure  and  without  any  fringes 
of  colour.  The  card,  D  ,  is  a  strip  which  fits  into 
the  aperture  left  forthe  focussing-screen  in  the 
camera.  In  it  will  be  seen  a  slit,  s2)  the  utility 
of  which  will  be  explained  later  on. 


It  often  happens  that  a  second  patch  of 
white  light,  comparable  to  that  formed,  is  re- 
quired. Advantage  is  taken  of  the  fact  that 
from  the  first  surface  of  the  first  prism  P, ,  a 
certain  amount  of  light  is  reflected.  Placing 
a  lens.  L5,  in  the  path  of  this  reflected  beam, 
and  a  mirror,  G,  another  square  patch  of  light 
can  be  thrown  on  the  same  screen  as  that 
on  which  the  first  is  thrown,  and  this  second 
patch  may  be  made  of  the  same  size  as  the 
first  patch  if  the  lens,  L5l  be  of  suitable  focus, 
and  it  can  be  superposed  over  the  first  patch 
if  required. 

We  have  now  a  square  white  patch  upon 
the  screen,  from  the  re-combination  of  the 
spectrum.  If  I  wish  to  diminish  the  bright- 
ness of  this  patch,  there  are  at  least  two 
ways  in  which  I  can  accomplish  it.  First,  by 
closing  the  slit  of  the  collimator,  and,  second, 
by  the  introduction  of  rotating  sectors,  M,  which 
can  be  opened  and  closed  at  pleasure  during 
rotation  in  the  path  of  the  beam. 

The  annexed  figure  (Fig.  2,  p.  3)  is  a  bird's- 
eye  view  of  the  instrument.  A  A  are  two  sectors, 
one  of  which  is  capable  of  closing  the  open 
aperture  by  means  of  a  lever  arrangement,  C, 
which  moves  a  sleeve  in  which  is  fixed  a  pin 
working  in  a  screw  groove  ;  D  is  an  electro- 
motor causing  the  sectors  to  rotate,  and  the 
aperture  in  the  sectors  can  be  opened  and 
closed  at  pleasure  during  their  revolution. 
To  show  you  its  efficiency,  if  I  place  two  strips 
of  paper,  one  black  and  the  other  white,  on 
the  screen,  and  cast  a  shadow  from  a  rod, 
by  the  direct  white  light  on  the  white  strip, 
and  a  shadow  from  the  same  rod  by  the 
reflected  light  on  the  black  strip  of  paper,  and 
interpose  the  rotating  sectors  in  the  path  of 
the  reflected  light,  the  aperture  of  the  sectors 
can  be  closed  till  the  white  paper  appears 
absolutely  blacker  than  the  black  paper. 
White  thus  becomes  darker  than  lamp-black, 
owing  to  want  of  illumination  on  the  former. 

We  all  talk  about  white  light ;  we  say  that 
the  electric  light  is  white  and  that  gas  light 
is  white.  I  wish  to  show  you  that  the  white- 
ness is  a  mere  matter  of  judgment. 

I  throw  the  shadow,  by  the  electric  light,  of 
a  thick  rod  on  white  paper,  and  another 
shadow  by  gas  light,  on  the  same  paper,  and 
we  at  once  see  that  the  shadow  illuminated  by 
the  electric  light  seems  blue,  whilst  that  illumi- 
nated by  the  gas  light  appears  orange,  yet  we 
speak  of  both  gas  light  and  the  electric  light 
as  white  lights.  Evidently,  if  these  two  differ 
so  much  in  colour,  pigments  will  take  different 
hues    when    illuminated    by    them.     Putting 


paper  coloured  with  red,  blue,  and  green  pig- 
ments in  the  shadows,  the  change  in  hue  is  at 
once  apparent.  Placing  in  the  shadow  illumi- 
nated by  the  electric  light  a  strip  of  paper 
coloured  orange  (Fig.  3),  by  orange  chromeand 
aureolin,  we  see  that  now  the  electric  light  re- 
flected from  it  appears  of  very  nearly  the 
same  hue  as  the  light  from  the  gas  reflected 
from  white  paper.  Gas  light,  we  may  say 
then,  is  orange  rather  than  white,  if  we 
take  the  electric  light  as  the  standard. 

We  have  seen  that  colours  appear  of  dif- 
ferent hue  in  the  electric  light  to  that  which 


they  appear  in  gas  light,  and  I  wish  to  enforce 
this  more  strongly  upon  you  by  an  experiment 
which  I  introduced  a  year  ago.  In  front  of  the 
condenser  of  the  electric  light  lamp  I  place  a 
circular  aperture  some  inch  in  diameter,  and 
by  means  of  a  lens  throw  an  image  of  it  on 
a  white  screen.  We  may  suppose  this  to 
represent  the  sun,  the  colour  of  the  light 
being  very  much  the  same  as  that  which  it  has 
in  England  about  midday  in  the  middle  of 
May.  In  front  of  the  aperture  I  place  a 
trough  containing  a  solution  of  hyposulphite 
of  soda,  and  then  drop  into  it  dilute  hydro- 


Fig.  2. 


chloric  acid,  and  stirring  up  the  two  together 
very  fine  particles  of  sulphur  slowly  separate, 
and  the  white  light,  owing  to  the  law  of  scatter- 
ing by  small  particles,  loses  some  of  its  com- 
ponents, and  we  have  a  gradual  reddening  of 
the  sun — first  yellow,  then  orange,  and  finally 
a  red— the  series  forming  a  very  exact  repre- 

Fig.  3. 


sentation  of  the  colours  of  a  setting  sun.  If 
we  place  coloured  pigments  in  this  changing 
light,  we  see  how,  towards  sunset,  the  blues 
become  darker  whilst  the  reds  change  but  little 
in  hue.  It  may  have  been  remarked  that  in 
an  evening  the  last  colours  in  a  picture  to 
disappear  are  the  reds.   The  colour  of  sunset 


light  now  imitated  before  you  gives  a  clue  to 
the  reason  of  this. 

We  may  as  well  trace  the  cause  of  this 
change  in  colour.  Placing  a  cell  contain- 
ing hyposulphite  of  soda  in  front  of  the 
slit  of  the  spectroscope,  and  throwing  the 
spectrum  on  the  screen,  and  then  adding 
the  dilute  hydrochloric  acid,  we  find  that 
as  the  light  from  the  reflected  beam  (which 
we  throw  just  above  the  spectrum)  be- 
comes yellow,  orange,  and  then  red,  so  the 
spectrum  loses  the  violet,  then  the  blue, 
then  the  green,  till  finally  the  red  alone 
remain. 

Let  me  further  exemplify  that  you  cannot 
know  what  effect  the  colour  of  the  light  has 
upon  a  colour  unless  you  know  its  composi- 
tion. 

The  slit  S,  in  the  card  D  (Fig.  1)  can  be 
passed  through  the  spectrum,  and  as  it  cuts  off 
all  the  colours  of  the  spectrum,  except  that 
passing  through  the  slit,  we  have  different 
coloured  square  patches  of  light  thrown  by— 


what  1  will  now  call— our  patch-forming  appa- 
ratus, the  colour  of  the  patch  being  that  of 
he  colour  issuing  through  the  slit. 

Now  sodium,  when  ignited,  gives  a  peculiar 
yellow  light,  due  to  a  line  in  the  orange.  If  I 
send  the  light  from  this  sodium  line  through 
the  slit  S4,  we  have  a  square  patch  of  sodium 
light  on  the  screen.  The  rod  casts  a  shadow 
as  before,  but  instead  of  casting  a  second 
shadow  by  the  reflected  beam,  I  cast  a  shadow 
from  gas  light,  when  it  will  be  seen  that  the 
two  illuminated  shadows  have  almost  the  same 
colour. 

I  now  shall  perform  a  common  Christmas 
experiment,  and  ignite  some  spirits  of  wine 
in  which  salt  has  been  dissolved,  and  illuminate 
with  that  light  cards  on  which  various  blue,  red, 
green,  and  yellow  pigments  have  been  placed, 
and  we  see  that  all  the  pigments  partake  of 
various  shades  of  orange,  instead  of  the 
colours  seen  by  gas  light.  The  reason  of  this 
is  apparent ;  in  gas  light  we  have  all  rays 
present,  in  the  sodium  light  there  is  only 
orange  present.  We  shall  see  that  as  the  colour 
of  a  blue  pigment  depends  principally  on  the 
reflection  of  blue  rays,  that  of  a  green  of  the 
green  rays,  and  so  on,  it  is  only  to  be  ex- 
pected that  the  colours  of  pigments,  when 
illuminated  by  pure  orange  light  alone,  will 
only  give  different  shades  of  orange. 

This  shows  also  that  light  or  colour  may  to 
the  eye  appear  to  be  the  same  and  yet  be  very 
different  in  optical  composition.  I  cast  two 
shadows  of  the  rod  in  the  patch-forming  appa- 
ratus, one  by  the  recombined  spectrum  and  the 
other  by  the  reflected  beam,  and  pass  the  card, 
D,  with  the  slit,  S3.  in  it  along  the  spectrum. 
One  shadow  will  be  illuminated  by  the  white 


light  and  the  other  by  the  light  from  the  parts  of 
the  spectrum  coming  through  the  slit  S3.  If  I 
place  emerald  green  in  the  shadow  illuminated 
by  white  light,  I  find  that  there  is  one  point  in 
the  green  of  the  spectrum  which  matches  it  in 
hue,  and  I  can  make  them  of  the  same  depth 
of  colour  by  the  introduction  of  the  rotating 
sectors.  Evidently,  then,  the  coloured  light  of 
this  part  of  the  spectrum  and  that  of  the 
emerald  green  might  be  mistaken  for  one 
another,  and  so  with  other  colours.  There  are 
some  pigments,  however,  which  cannot  be 
matched  by  the  spectrum  colours. 

That  emerald  green  is  a  combination  of 
colours  I  will  at  once  show  you.  A  strip  of 
card  is  placed  in  the  spectrum,  on  one  half  of 
which  is  this  pigment.  Half  of  the  breadth 
of  the  spectrum  falls  on  the  white  card 
and  half  on  the  pigmented  card.     It  will  be 

Fig.  4. 


Emerald  Gr 

- 


seen  that  the  emerald  green  reflects  other 
colours  of  the  spectrum  besides  that  which  it 
matched  in  the  colour  patch-forming  appa- 
ratus. The  combination  of  all  these  other 
colours  in  the  proportions  reflected  from  the 
pigment,  form  the  colour  which,  in  the  simple 
colour  of  the  spectrum,  we  should  call  emerald 
green.  So  if  we  pass  other  pigments  through 
the  spectrum  we  get  similar  results,  though 
not  all  pigments  can  be  so  matched. 


LECTURE  II.— Delivered  December  3,  1888. 


In  the  last  lecture  I  finished  the  matching 
of  the  colour  of  pigments  with  parts  of  the  spec- 
trum, and  to-night  I  will  endeavour  to  showyou 
that  colourless  bodies  can  be  made  coloured, 
under  certain  conditions,  although  the  light 
that  falls  upon  them  is  colourless.  I  told  you 
last  time  that  the  waves  of  red  light  are  such 
that  if  you  put  38,000  end  to  end  they  make 
up  an  inch.  If  in  the  sea  we  have  two  sets  of 
waves,  one  set  of  which  is  exactly  half  a 
wave  behind  the  other,  then  the  crest  of  the 
one  wave  will  exactly  fill  the  trough  of  the 
other,  and  instead  of  motion  we  shall  have 
rest.  Suppose  I  have  a  colourless  body,  whose 
thickness  is  comparable  with  a  wave  of  red 
light,  and  that  a  wave  of  red  light  when 
reflected  from  the  back  surface  is  half  a  wave 
length  behind  that  reflected  from  the  front 
surface,  we  get  darkness  instead  of  light. 
The  easiest  way  to  obtain  a  colourless  body 
answering  to  the  above  conditions  is  to  use  a 
soap  film  stretched  across  a  vertical  aperture. 
Its  thickness  is  found  to  be  comparable  with 
a  wave  of  light,  and  as  it  gradually  thins  by 
gravity,  some  part  of  the  film  becomes  of  the 
thickness  that  the  reflection  from  the  back 
surface  is  half  a  wave  length  behind  that 
reflected  from  the  front  surface,  the  red  is 
annihilated  at  such  place.  There  will  be 
another  thickness  of  film  in  which  the  green 
light  would  be  similarly  absent,  and  yet 
another  in  which  the  blue  is  absent,  and  so 
on.  The  light  reflected  from  the  first  locality 
would  be  the  components  of  white  less  the  red, 
in  the  second  the  same  less  the  green,  and  in 
the  third  the  same  less  the  blue. 

I  can  show  you  the  kind  of  colour  that  is 
seen  by  the  suppression  of  one  small  part  of 
the  spectrum,  by  using  our  patch-forming 
apparatus  and  passing  a  thin  rod  along  the 
spectrum,  which  cuts  out  the  part  required. 
It  will  be  seen  that  the  patch  is  no  longer 
white,  but  coloured.  These  colours,  remember, 
are  not  simple  colours,  but  white  light,  with 
some  colour  abstracted. 

Putting  a  soap  film  on  a  ring  in  the  beam  of 
the  electric  light,  at  an  angle  of  about  450  with 
it,  the  light  is  reflected  on  the  screen,  and  a  lens 
in  the  beam  forms  an  image  of  the  ring.  At  first 


the  film  appars  white,  but  after  a  short  intervals 
of  time  coloured  bars  appear  horizontally 
across  it.  Putting  a  piece  of  red  glass  in  front 
of  the  beam,  we  have  a  succession  of  red  and 
black  bars,  the  red  glass  cutting  off  all  the 
remaining  colours.  A  piece  of  green  glass 
placed  in  the  beam  shows  green  bars,  and 
so  on. 

The  bars  are  brighter  at  the  bottom  of  the 
image,  which  is  in  reality  the  top  of  the  film, 
for  the  reason  that  the  film  is  of  a  thickness  of 
'£>  2£>  3i>  4s>  5i>  &c->  wave  lengths  of  the 
different  coloured  lights  as  we  go  from  the 
top  to  the  bottom  of  it.  The  bars  gradually 
widen  out  and  become  very  far  apart,  until  we 
see  only  3.  I  now  cause  a  gentle  current  of 
gas  to  play  on  the  film,  and  the  coloured  glass 
being  withdrawn,  we  get  a  magnificent  series 
of  colours  whirling  one  around  the  other. 
Peacock  green,  golden  yellow,  azure  blue,  suc- 
ceed one  another,  and  give  a  most  brilliant 
effect.  All  these  colours  are  due  to  white 
light  falling  on  a  colourless  body. 

The  next  experiment  is  to  throw  a  small 
image  of  the  film  upon  the  slit  of  the  spectro- 
scope. We  see  the  spectrum  traversed  by 
black  lines  curving  down  from  red  to  blue, 
and  rapidly  shifting  in  position.  These  lines 
show  the  colours  which  are  absent  in  the 
horizontal  bars  of  coloured  light  reflected  from 
the  film,  a  section  of  which  passes  through 
the  slit. 

In  this  case  we  have  a  demonstration  that 
the  colours  reflected  from  the  film  are  not 
produced  by  any  conversion  of  white  light 
into  coloured  light,  but  by  the  abstraction  of 
certain  colours  from  the  components  of  white 
light. 

In  the  opal  we  have  an  example  of  inter- 
ference colours,  caused  by  a  thin  layer  of 
material  of  different  thicknesses,  which  abstract 
a  certain  component  of  white  light  in  exactly 
the  same  manner  as  does  the  soap  film.  When 
we  have  the  light  from  the  varying  thicknesses 
close  together,  as  we  have  in  the  reflected 
beam  in  the  patch-forming  apparatus,  they 
have  very  much  the  same  appearance  as  has 
the  opal. 

But    one    more  example    of   interferences, 


which  is  very  beautiful,  as  time  will  not  allow 
me  to  go  into  the  theory  of  the  matter ;  suffice 
it  to  say  that  if  parallel  lines  be  ruled  on  a 
surface  very  close  together,  and  the  beam  of 
light  be  thrown  on  them,  the  "  interferences  " 
are  such  that  pure  colours  are  produced,  and 
we  have  a  spectrum. 

Next  let  me  show  you  that  the  colour  of 
transparent  bodies  is  also  due  to  the  abstrac- 
tion of  colour  or  colours  from  the  white  light. 
In  a  cell  I  have  a  liquid  which  appears 
green.  A  spectrum  is  formed  on  the  screen 
and  in  front  of  the  slit  of  the  spectroscope 
the  cell  is  placed.  You  will  see  that  the  blue 
and  most  of  the  red  is  cut  off,  and  that  we  only 
have  the  green  and  a  small  band  in  the  red  left 
of  the  spectrum.  Recombining  the  remainder 
of  the  spectrum  to  form  a  patch  as  before,  we 
have  a  square  of  green  light,  and  side  by  side 
with  it  is  the  patch  formed  by  the  reflected 
beam,  which  is  coloured  by  the  light  which 
has  not  passed  through  the  prisms,  but  only 
through  the  cell  and  the  collimator.  They  are 
both  absolutely  of  the  same  hue,  showing  that 
the  recombined  spectrum  gives  the  same 
colour  as  the  light  after  passing  through  the 
cell.  Repeat  the  same  with  a  red  liquid  or  a 
blue  liquid,  and  we  obtain  the  same  results. 

A  paper  is  coloured  with  the  green  dye 
which  I  had  in  the  cell,  and  I  allow  the 
patch  of  white  light  to  play  on  it,  and  you 
see  the  light  reflected  from  it  is  green.  In 
the  path  of  the  reflected  beam  I  place  a 
cell  containing  the  green  liquid,  and  throw  the 
patch  on  white  paper.  The  two  patches,  viz., 
the  white  light  on  the  green  paper,  and  the 
green  light  on  the  white  paper,  are  the  same 
colour.  The  white  light  which  penetrates 
colouring  matter  is  the  same  in  the  two  cases, 
though  when  on  the  paper  itself  it  traverses 
the  colouring  matter  twice.  This  leads  to  an 
important  axiom,  viz.,  that  the  effect  is  the 
same  whether  the  colouring  matter  is  in  con- 
tact with  the  paper  or  at  a  distance  from  it,  so 
long  as  the  eye  receives  the  light  which  has 
traversed  such  colouring  matter.  I  shall  im- 
mediately take  advantage  of  this,  for  I  wish  to 
show  you  that  the  depth  of  colour  depends  on 
the  thickness  of  colouring  matter  through 
which  the  light  passes.  Of  a  double  wedge- 
shaped  trough,  half  is  filled  with  pure  water, 
and  the  other  half  with  coloured  water. 
Different  thicknesses  of  the  blue  colouring 
matter  are  passed  in  front  of  the  slit,  and  as 
the  thickness  is  increased  so  the  spectrum 
gets  fainter  in  the  blue  than  in  the  red. 

The  patch  of  white  light  is  next  formed,  and 


the  wedge  of  coloured  liquid  is  again  passed 
across  the  slit,  and  you  will  see  that  the 
colour  deepens  as  it  passes  through  different 
thicknesses.  As  this  is  true  when  the  colour- 
ing matter  is  in  front  of  the  light,  so  must  it 
be  true  when  the  colouring  matter  is  in 
contact  with  the  papers. 

There  is  another  feature  which  I  must  not 
pass  over,  i.e.,  what  is  known  as  fluorescence, 
and  though  it  does  not  enter  into  the  effect  of 
pigments  used  in  water  colours,  yet  it  has 
much  to  say  to  the  coloured  materials  of 
every-day  wear.  One  of  the  most  beautiful 
examples  of  this  fluorescence  is  fluorescene. 
In  the  beam  of  the  electric  light  a  jar 
of  water  is  placed,  and  in  it  is  dropped 
a  concentrated  solution  of  the  fluorescene. 
We  have  a  fine  example  of  fluorescence ; 
the  fine  threads  of  liquid  as  they  stretch 
towards  the  bottom  appear  of  a  brilliant 
green.  I  take  another  jar  and  repeat  the 
same  with  quinine  sulphate,  and  we  have  a 
gorgeous  blue. 

We  will  endeavour  to  trace  this  fluorescence 
to  its  source.  I  take  a  piece  of  card  and  brush 
it  over  with  the  solution  of  fluorescene,  and 
place  it  in  our  colour  patch ;  the  different 
colours  of  the  spectrum  illuminate  one  after 
the  other ;  we  now  can  readily  see  the  light 
which  causes  this  fluorescence.  It  is  the 
green  and  the  blue,  but  the  light  reflected 
from  the  fluorescene  is  of  a  totally  different  hue 
from  the  rest  of  the  colour  patch.  So  with  the 
quinine.  We  see  that  when  the  colour  patch 
is  apparently  dark,  the  paper  covered  with 
quinine  shines  out  with  peculiar  lustre.  The 
rays  which  excite  fluorescence  in  this  case  are 
the  invisible  rays  in  the  ultra  violet.  Common 
machine  oil  is  fluorescent  in  the  same  part  of 
the  spectrum,  but  shines  with  a  greenish  light, 
and  not  blue. 

We  now  come  to  the  point  when  we  must 
ascertain  the  second  constant  of  colour,  viz.,  its 
luminosity  or  brightness.  Before  showing  how 
this  is  done  for  pigments,  it  will  be  necessary 
to  show  you  how  we  can  ascertain  the  lumin- 
osity of  the  spectrum  itself.  The  luminosity  of 
the  spectrum  varies  greatly  in  different  parts, 
the  maximum  luminosity  of  the  prismatic 
spectrum  derived  from  bright  lights,  such 
as  the  electric  light,  being  in  the  yellow,  and 
there  is  a  degradation  of  brightness  as  we  go 
towards  each  end  of  the  spectrum.  Now  suppose 
we  find  that  the  reflected  beam  of  white  light, 
when  the  rotating  sectors  are  as  widely  open 
as  possible,  is  slightly  brighter  than  a  yellow 
patch  formed  from  the  yellow  of  the  spectrum 


— it  is  manifest  that  other  parts  of  the  spec- 
trum will  be  dimmer  than  that.  If,  now, 
in  the  reflected  beam,  I  rotate  the  sectors 
at  less  than  full  aperture,  less  light  will 
reach  the  screen,  and  it  is  evident  that  there 
are  two  parts  of  the  spectrum,  one  on  each  side 
of  the  yellow,  which  will  match  the  brightness 
of  this  degraded  white. 

In  order  to  make  this  match,  we  place  the 
rod  as  before  in  front  of  the  colour  patch. 
One  shadow  is  thrown  on  the  white  screen 
by  the  spectrum  colour,  and  another  shadow 
is  thrown  alongside  it  from  the  reflected 
beam.  The  white  light  and  the  coloured 
light,  each  light  up  one  of  the  shadows. 
The  slit  in  the  card  is  moved  across  the 
spectrum  till  we  find  (say)  that  when  in 
the  blue  the  illuminated  shadow  is  too  dark, 
and  when  the  slit  is  in  the  green  the 
green  illuminated  shadow  is  too  light.  It 
is  evident  that  at  some  intermediate  place 
in  the  spectrum  the  coloured  shadow  is 
neither  too  light  nor  too  dark.  This  place  in 
the  spectrum  is  found  by  moving  the  slit 
rapidly,  making  the  coloured  shadow  first 
too  light  and  then  too  dark,  diminishing  the 
extent  of  the  oscillations  till  equality  of  bright- 
ness is  seen  to  the  eye.  The  same  procedure 
is  carried  on  on  the  red  side  of  the  yellow. 
The  angular  aperture  of  the  sectors  is  again 
altered,  and  a  fresh  determination  made.  Now 
the  card  in  which  the  slit  is  cut  carries  a 
scale,  and  by  means  of  a  pointer  the  scale  is 
read  off,  which  tells  us  the  exact  part  of  the 
spectrum  where  the  different  equalities  of 
brightness  are  established.  We  then  use  the 
apertures  used  as  giving  the  relative  lumin- 
osities of  the  different  parts  of  the  spectrum 
as  measured,  and  make  such  a  curve  as  we 
have  below. 

Fig.  5. 


The  method,  then,  of  ascertaining  the  lumin- 
osity of  a  colour  depends  on  the  rapid  oscil- 


lation of  either  the   white  or  coloured  patch 
between  "  too  light  "  and  "too  dark." 

This  gives  us  a  clue  by  which  we  can  measure 
the  luminosity  of  a  coloured  surface  in  a  direct 
manner.  The  rotating  sectors  in  Fig.  2  give 
us  the  means  of  doing  this  in  an  easy  manner. 
Suppose  the  luminosity  of  a  vermilion-coloured 
surface  had  to  be  compared  with  a  white 
surface  when  both  were  illuminated,  say, 
by  gas  light,  the  following  procedure  is 
adopted  : — A  square  space  of  such  a  size  is 
cut  out  of  black  paper  so  that  its  side  is  rather 
less  than  twice  the  breadth  of  the  rod  used  to 
cast  a  shadow.     One  half  of  the  aperture  is 


filled  with  a  white  surface,  and  the  other  half 
with  the  vermilion-coloured  surface.  The 
light,  L,  illuminates  the  whole,  and  the  rod, 
R,  is  placed  in  such  a  position  that  it  casts 
a  shadow  on  the  white  surface,  the  edge 
of  the  shadow  being  placed  accurately  at 
the  junction  of  the  vermilion  and  white  sur- 
face. A  flat  silvered  mirror,  M,  is  placed 
at  such  a  distance  and  at  such  an  angle  that 
the  light  it  reflects  casts  a  second  shadow  on 
the  vermilion  surface.  Between  R  and  L  is 
placed  the  rotating  sectors,  A.  The  white 
strip  is  caused  to  be  evidently  too  dark  and 
then   too   light   by   altering   the    aperture  of 

Fig.  7. 


sf::^T-::;;i 


•$ 


the  sectors,  and  an  oscillation  of  diminish- 
ing extent  is  rapidly  made  till  the  two 
shadows  appeared  equally  luminous.  A 
white  screen  is  next  substituted  for  the  ver- 
milion, and  again  a  comparison  made.  The 
mean  of  the  two  sets  of  readings  of  angular 
apertures  give  the  relative  value  of  the  two 
luminosities.  It  must  be  stated,  however,  that 


8 


if  the  screen  remained  unshaded,  as  repre- 
sented, the  values  would  not  be  correct,  since 
any  diffused  light  which  might  be  in  the  room 
would  relatively  illuminate  the  white  surface 
more  than  the  coloured  one.  To  obviate  this 
the  receiving  screen  is  placed  in  a  box,  in 
the  front  of  which  a  narrow  aperture  is  cut 
just  wide  enough  to  allow  the  two  beams  to 
reach  the  screen.  An  aperture  is  also  cut 
at  the  front  angle  of  the  box  through  which 
the  observer  can  see  the  screen.  When 
this  apparatus  is  adopted,  its  efficiency  is 
seen  from  the  fact  that  when  the  apertures  of 
the  rotating  sectors  are  closed  the  shadow 
on  the  white  surface  appears  quite  black, 
which  it  would  not  have  done  had  there 
been  diffused  light  in  any  quantity  present 
within  the  box.  The  box,  it  may  be  stated, 
is  blackened  inside,  and  is  used  in  a  darkened 
chamber.  The  mirror  arrangement  is  useful, 
as  any  variation  in  the  direct  light  also  shows 
itself  in  the  reflected  light.  Instead  of  gas 
light,  reflected  skylight,  the  electric  light, 
or  sun  light  can  be  employed  by  very  obvious 
artifices,  in  some  cases  a  gas  light  taking  the 
place  of  the  reflected  beam. 

It  will  be  in  your  recollection  that  I  said 
that  the  colour  of  an  object  depended  on  the 
eye  of  the  observer.  Vision,  I  have  told  you, 
depends  on  the  fact  that  three  colour  sensa- 
tions are  necessary  for  the  normal  eye  to 
see  white  light.  There  are  in  fact,  as  I  have 
said,  three  sets  of  nerves,  one  responding  to 
the  blue,  one  to  the  green,  and  one  to  the  red. 


Fig.  8. 


White   Light 


White    Light 


Slue 


Green       YelloujOrange  Red 


If  one  of  these  sensations  be  absent,  then  the 
eye  does  not  see  white  light  as  we  know  it,  but 
as — what  would  to  us  be — coloured  light.  The 
above  diagram    shows  the   three   sensations 


derived  from  Clerk  Maxwell's  measures.  The 
top  line  is  supposed  to  be  the  spectrum  as 
the  eye  sees  it,  all  colours  being  of  equal 
value.  It  will  be  noticed  that  at  only  three 
places  in  the  spectrum  is  the  colour  due  to 
single  colour  sensations,  and  all  intermediate 
colours  are  made  up  by  mixtures  of  two  sen- 
sations, the  height  of  the  curves  added  together 
giving  the  height  of  the  straight  line  parallel 
to  the  base  of  the  curve. 

Now,  in  order  to  test  the  eye  for  colour- 
blindness, it  is  only  necessary  to  get  a  person 
so  afflicted,  to  measure  the  luminosity  of 
the  spectrum.  For  evidently,  if  deficient  (say) 
in  red  sensation,  the  spectrum  would  begin 
where  the  green  colour  sensation  commences, 
and  even  then  the  luminosity  would  be  much 
smaller,  owing  to  the  absence  of  such  red 
sensation.  Such  a  luminosity  curve  is  seen  in 
Fig.  5  (p.  7),  and  in  the  same  figure  is  shown  the 
colour  deficiency.  It  is  comparatively  easy 
to  show  the  colour  of  the  light  which  colour- 
blind people  see.  If  a  certain  proportion  of 
the  light  near  the  position  which  the  blue 
lithium  line  occupies  in  spectrum  be  mixed 
with  a  certain  proportion  of  the  green  light  of 
the  spectrum  near  E,  and  the  two  be  combined 
in  a  patch,  the  colour  of  the  patch  will  be  that 
seen  by  a  red  colour-blind  person.  [This 
was  shown  on  the  screen,  and  the  vermilion, 
emerald  green,  ultramarine  and  gamboge 
were  placed  in  the  mixed  light,  and  the  alter- 
ation in  colour  of  the  pigments  noted.]  In 
the  same  way  the  white  light  which,  blue  and 
green  colour-blind  see,  can  be  shown. 

In  measuring  the  luminosity  of  the  spectrum 
you  cannot  but  have  noticed  that  the  shadow 
illuminated  by  the  white  light  never  appeared 
as  white,  but  always  coloured.  Thus,  when 
placed  in  juxtaposition  with  the  yellow,  the 
shadow  illuminated  by  the  white  light  appeared 
bluish;  when  with  the  green,  reddish;  and 
when  with  the  blue,  yellowish.  The  colour 
given  to  the  shadows  illuminated  by  the  white 
light  is  merely  the  effect  of  contrast,  and  is 
due  to  error  of  judgment  by  the  eye.  The 
tendency  of  white  in  proximity  to  a  colour  is  to 
make  it  to  appear  of  the  hue  of  the  comple- 
mentary colour,  to  which  I  shall  draw  attention 
in  my  next  lecture. 


LECTURE  HI— Delivered  December  10,  1888. 


My  first  business  to-night  is  to  show  you 
the  third  constant  of  colour.  You  will  re- 
collect I  told  you  that  the  hue  is  one  constant. 
the  luminosity  of  colour  the  second,  and  that 
the  third  is  the  purity  of  colour.  The  purity 
of  colour  is  that  which  is  perhaps  the  most 
difficult  to  measure,  but  not  so  difficult  to 
describe.  No  colour  is  pure  unless  it  is  un- 
mixed with  white  light.  I  propose  to  show 
you  how  you  can  get  colour  so  impure  that 
eventually  the  colour  will  entirely  disappear 
and  will  leave  to  your  eyes  only  the  impression 
of  white.  I  think  my  first  experiment  will 
very  likely  demonstate  this. 

The  apparatus  is  exactly  that  which  you 
saw  before,  viz.,  the  colour-patch  apparatus. 
I  am  only  allowing  a  small  beam  of  light  to 
come  through  the  prisms,  to  get  a  small  round 
patch  on  the  screen,  instead  of  the  big  white 
patch  square  to  which  you  are  accustomed. 
Now,  supposing  I  pass  the  slit  in  the  card 
through  the  spectrum,  that  patch  becomes 
coloured  with  any  of  the  colours  with  which  I 
wish  to  experiment.  The  reflected  beam  gives 
js  a  large  square  of  white  light,  which  I 
superpose  over  the  small  coloured  patch. 
Let  us  see  whether  we  can  extinguish  that 
coloured  light  or  not.  I  may  take  red,  green, 
or  blue,  and  then  if  I  place  the  rotating  sectors 
in  front  of  the  coloured  beam  you  will  see  that 
by  making  the  coloured  patch  fainter  it  will 
entirely  disappear.  This  is  the  case  whether 
we  have  a  blue,  red,  or  a  green  patch.  That 
the  colour  is  still  present  I  can  demonstrate 
by  cutting  off  the  white  light,  when  you  see 
the  colour  on  the  screen. 

The  lesson  I  wish  to  inculcate  is  this  —  that  the 
blue,  green,  and  red  which  you  saw  disappear, 
and  which  were  mixed  with  more  and  more 
white  light,  are  essentially  impure  colours, 
and  most  impure  where  the  white  light  is 
strongest.  It  was  by  this  method  that  origin- 
ally the  luminosity  of  the  spectrum  was 
measured.  It  was  seen  how  much  white  light 
it  took  to  extinguish  a  colour  on  a  screen,  and 
according  to  the  white  light  it  took,  so  the 
luminosity  was  supposed  to  be  proportional  to 
it.  To  my  mind  it  is  not  a  very  satisfactory 
way  of  testing   luminosity,  and   I   think   the 


way  I  showed  you  in  the  last  lecture  is  far 
preferable. 

There  is  another  deduction  I  want  to  point  out 
with  reference  to  this,  which  is  of  importance 
to  artists.  In  water-colour  painting  it  is  well 
known  that  in  order  to  get  what  artists  call  a 
certain  amount  of  warmth  in  the  picture,  a 
wash  of  yellow  ochre  is  very  often  given  to  the 
white  paper  before  it  is  worked  upon.  Those 
of  you  who  are  water-colour  painters  know 
very  well  that,  although  you  may  appear 
to  have  a  wash  of  colour  on  the  paper 
when  it  is  moist,  yet  when  it  is  very  dry 
apparently  there  is  nothing  but  white  left 
behind.  The  colour  is  so  diluted  with  white 
that  it  does  not  appear  to  the  eye,  but  the 
colour  is  there  all  the  same,  and  if  you 
increase  but  slightly  the  amount  of  pigment 
the  colour  may  be  visible.  All  the  colours  you 
place  on  that  apparently  white  paper  mix 
with  the  yellow  ochre.  Remember,  then,  that 
if  you  have  a  wash  of  water-colour  on  a 
sheet  of  white  paper,  and  it  does  not  appear 
to  the  eye,  yet  subsequent  washes  of  any 
colour  will  bring  out  that  colour,  and  in  the 
case  of  yellow  ochre  will  give  that  warmth 
which  artists  so  often  desire  to  have  upon 
their  sketches. 

Now,  then,  as  to  the  question  of  diluting 
one  colour  with  another.  We  have,  so  far, 
only  diluted  a  pure  colour  with  white  light; 
but  in  diluting  one  colour  with  another  we 
enter  into  a  region  which  has  been  traversed 
by  a  great  many  experimenters,  amongst  others 
by  Clerk  Maxwell  and  Lord  Rayleigh,  and 
there  is  an  immense  amount  of  interest  in  the 
results  which  have  been  obtained.  Some  of 
them  1  hope  to  show  you  in  as  simple  a  manner 
as  I  possibly  can.  But  I  want  you  to  recollect 
that  one  can  only  touch  on  the  fringe  of  the 
subject,  as  it  were,  in  an  hour's  lecture. 

Let  me  pass  some  slits  through  the  spectrum 
of  this  patch-forming  apparatus.  First  we  have 
a  patch  of  white  light,  and  by  a  simple  means 
I  propose  to  show  you  what  colours  come 
through  the  slits  placed  in  the  spectrum.  If  I 
put  another  lens  L6,  Fig.  i,  in  front  of  the  big 
lens,  which  condenses  the  spectrum  to  form 
the  white  patch,  you  will  find  I  can  get  the 


lo 


spectrum  itself  fairly  defined  upon  the  same 
screen  as  that  on  which  the  patch  was  formed. 
The  second  lens  in  reality  produces  an  image 
of  the  first  spectrum  which  was  formed  in 
the  plane  usually  occupied  by  the  focus- 
sing screen.  Now  suppose  I  pass  a  series 
of  slits  through  the  spectrum  you  will  see 
the  kind  of  light  I  am  going  to  use.  I 
have  here  two  colours,  and  I  will  show  you 
what  is  the  effect  of  blending  those  two— green 
and  red — together;  I  have  only  to  remove  this 
lens,  and  we  see  an  orange  patch,  I  will  allow 
another  colour  to  come  through  a  third  slit 
(the  card  has  several),  and  replacing  the  small 
lens  we  see  the  three  colours.  If  I  blend  those 
three  I  get  a  green,  and  so  I  may  go  on  blend- 
ing the  colours  by  passing  more  slits  through 
the  spectrum.  Here  I  have  four,  and  I  dare- 
say we  shall  get  a  different  result  again— still 
it  is  a  green.  Perhaps  one  of  the  most  inter- 
esting ways  of  showing  colour  mixtures  is  to 
take  away  both  lenses,  and  let  different  parts 
of  the  spectrum  pass  through  the  slits,  and  paint 
themselves  upon  the  screen.  We  begin  with 
the  red,  and  here  we  have  a  red  patch.  Then 
I  add  yellow  which  forms  orange,  and  then  I 
shall  add  a  third  patch,  and  pink  is  formed, 
then  green  and  blue  by  adding  others  until  we 
get  nearly  a  white  light  in  the  centre ;  so  I 
can  keep  passing  these  slits  through  the 
spectrum,  and  get  many  varieties  of  colour. 

Thus  we  see  it  is  not  necessary  to  have  the 
whole  spectrum  in  order  to  get  certain  coloured 
lights.  All  we  have  to  do  is  to  take  certain 
portions  of  the  spectrum,  and  if  properly 
chosen  their  combination  gives  us  what  we 
call  a  white  light.  For  example,  I  wish  to 
show  a  crucial  experiment.  I  believe  every 
artist  will  tell  you  that  the  combination  of  blue 
and  yellow  gives  a  green.  Now  I  want  to 
demonstrate  that  blue  and  yellow  do  not  give 
you  a  green  in  accordance  with  the  artist's 
notion,  but  something  totally  different.  I  form 
my  white  patch  on  the  screen,  as  before,  and 
by  means  of  the  small  lens  put  a  big  spectrum 
on  the  screen.  Passing  through  the  small 
spectrum  two  slits,  cutting  off  in  the  one  case 
all  the  spectrum  except  the  yellow,  and  in  the 
other  all  except  the  blue,  which  you  see  on  the 
screen,  and  then  removing  the  small  lens,  in 
stead  of  getting  green  we  get  white.  Thus  it 
requires  only  two  parts  of  the  spectrum  to  be 
combined  in  order  to  get  white.  So  we  see 
blue  and  yellow  give  white,  not  green.  This  is 
a  crucial  experiment,  because  on  this  is  based 
a  great  deal  of  the  theory  of  colour  mixtures, 
and  I  want  you  to  bear  that  in  mind. 


I  would  once  more  ask  you  to  remember  that 
the  eye  only  appreciates  three  colour  sensa- 
tions, viz.,  red,  green,  blue,  and  that  all  the 
other  colours  which  are  seen  by  the  eye  are  com- 
posed of  two  or  more  of  these  three  colour  sensa- 
tions. I  told  you  the  luminosity  of  the  spectrum 
was  greatest  in  the  green.     In  the  diagram 

Fig.  9. 


Yellow  Orange 


(Fig.  9)  we  have  the  luminosity  curve  on  a 
normal  or  wave  length  scale  ;  the  maximum 
luminosity  is  therefore  a  little  bit  more  towards 
the  violet  end  of  the  spectrum  than  in  the  pris- 
matic spectrum  ;  the  red  component,  the  green 
component,  and  the  blue  component  of  the 
luminosity  of  white  light,  are  shown  in  the 
diagram.  These  three  luminosities  together 
make  up  the  luminosity  of  the  spectrum  of 
white  light.  The  blue,  you  will  notice, 
has  but  little  luminosity  compared  with 
the  green  and  the  red.  The  luminosity  in 
the  green  is  far  greater  than  any  of  the 
other  two  sensations.  This  I  wish  to  get 
firmly  impressed  in  your  minds,  noting  that 
the  blue  is  a  much  less  important  colour  than 
green  or  red ;  in  other  words,  it  is  far  prefer- 
able to  be  colour-blind  to  blue  light  than  to 
green  or  to  red  light.  This,  of  course,  is 
founded  on  Clerk  Maxwell's  theory,  though 
the  curves  are  derived  from  our  own  measure- 
ments. I  think  the  researches  which  General 
Festing  and  I  have  made  bear  out  in  a  very 
great  measure,  although  they  differ  in  some 
respects  in  detail,  the  results  which  Clerk 
Maxwell  himself  got. 

It  may  be  said  that  we  have  been  dealing 
with  spectrum  colours,  and  not  the  colours 
of  every-day  life.  Is  it  possible  that  if  you 
are  not  dealing  with  spectrum  colours  that 
yet  you  get  the  same  result?  The  answer 
to  this  question  I  will  give  by  experiment  in  a 
very  simple  manner,  and  we  shall  see  that  we 
do  get  the  same  result  whether  we  are  using 
the  colours  of  pigments  or  the  pure  colours 
of  the  spectrum.  Recollect  there  were  only 
two  rays    combined    to    form    white    in    the 


II 


experiment  I  showed,  whereas  in  the  colour  of 
a  pigment  you  may  have  a  great  many  colours 
combined,  although  they  give  the  sensation  of 
one  colour  to  the  eye. 

The  electric  light  illuminates  a  circular 
aperture,  behind  which  is  ground  glass,  and 
by  a  lens  I  can  throw  an  image  of  this  aperture 
upon  the  screen.  Instead  of  a  simple  lens  I 
have  here  a  lens  which  is  divided  into  two 
halves.  The  centre  of  one  half  lens  is  raised 
slightly  above  the  other.     Now  every  portion 

Fig.  10. 


of  the  lens  will  give  an  image  by  itself,  and 
therefore  each  half  of  the  lens  will  give  a 
separate  image,  one  overlapping  the  other. 
Thus  on  the  screen  we  now  have  two  images 
of  the  aperture  which  is  in  front  of  the  lantern. 
If  I  put  a  piece  of  yellow  glass  in  front  of  one 
half  of  this  lens,  I  form  a  yellow  disc,  and 
if  I  put  a  piece  of  blue  glass  in  front  of  the 
other  I  form  a  blue  disc,  and  where  the  two 
overlap  you  have  the  real  colour  which  a 
mixture  of  the  blue  and  yellow  lights  will  give. 
You  can  see  that  yellow  and  blue  do  not  make 
green,  but  white. 

But  the  artist,  after  all  said  and  done, 
is  not  wrong  in  one  way,  because  he  more 
often  than  not  mixes  his  pigments  together 
and  not  the  colours  reflected  from  them. 
Supposing  I  put  the  yellow  glass  in  front 
of  the  aperture,  I  then  get  two  yellow 
discs ;  if  the  blue  glass  be  placed  in  front  of 
the  yellow  glass,  however,  I  get  two  green 
discs. 

Now  let  us  see  why  this  is  the  case.  I 
must  come  back  to  my  spectrum,  to  which 
we  have  always  to  refer  when  we  are  dealing 
with  colour.  I  will  put  the  two  pieces  of  glass 
successively  in  front  of  the  light  passing 
into  the  slit,  and  ask  you  to  notice  what 
happens.  With  the  blue  glass  a  great  deal 
of  red  is  cut  off,  and  a  good  deal  of  yellow  ; 
the  blue  is  nearly  as  bright  as  it  was  before, 
and  the  green  is  fairly  bright.  If  I  substi- 
tute a  piece  of  yellow  glass  for  the  blue,  the 
blue  is  cut  off,  and  the  green  left  almost  as 
bright  as  it  was  before,  and  the  yellow 
and  red  are  also  left.  In  the  one  case, 
recollect,  we  had  the  blue  and  the  green  left, 
and   the    red   and    yellow    cut    off.      In    the 


other  case  we  had  the  blue  cut  off,  and 
the  green  and  the  red  left.  If  we  take  one 
from  the  other  we  get  the  green  left,  so  that 
if  I  put  these  t;vo  glasses  together  in  front 
we  ought  to  get  only  the  green  left,  which  is 
the  case.  Now  if  I  take  away  the  small  lens 
from  the  front  of  the  big  lens,  and  form 
a  patch,  we  have  that  patch  of  the  same 
greenwhich  you  saw  in  our  previous  experi- 
ment. Here,  then,  we  have  the  combination 
of  blue  and  yellow  making  up  the  green. 
Now  for  one  more  experiment  in  relation 
to  this.  If  a  blue  sector  and  a  yellow 
sector  be  rotated  together,  and,  if  what  I 
have  said  be  true,  instead  of  forming  green 
they  ought  to  form  grey,  i.e.,  degraded 
white.  Let  us  see  whether  it  does  so.  The 
two  discs  are  now  rotating,  and  we  get  what 
is  not,  at  all  events,  far  from  grey.  Thus 
we  get  a  blue  or  a  yellow  forming  a  grey 
or  white,  when  the  blue  and  the  yellow  are 
each  presented  to  the  eye  separately. 

Now,  I  shall  have  to  show  you  why  it  is  that 
when  they  are  not  presented  to  the  eye  sepa- 
rately they  form  the  green.  This  is  a  yellow 
chromate  solution  in  a  cell.  I  place  the 
chromate  solution  in  front  of  the  lantern  ;  the 
yellow  light  falls  on  the  blue  sector,  which  is 
now  at  rest,  and  we  have  a  green.  The  yellow 
is  almost  unaffected,  but  there  is  no  doubt 
about  the  blue  becoming  green.  Prussian 
blue  used  in  a  similar  manner  leaves  the  blue 
sector  nearly  unaltered,  but  the  yellow  has 
now  become  greeu.  If  I  take  a  still  darker 
blue,  the  green  becomes  more  pronounced 
than  it  was  before.  You  recollect  I  proved 
to  you,  or  tried  to  do  so,  that  it  did 
not  matter  whether  a  pigment  was  next  to 
the  paper,  or  away  from  the  paper,  so  long 
as  it  was  in  front  of  the  source  of  light. 
Now  in  the  case  before  you,  when  you 
mix  yellow  and  blue  together,  as  an  artist 
mixes  pigments,  you  have  one  particle  of 
yellow,  say,  in  front  of  a  particle  of  blue, 
and,  therefore,  the  light  which  passes  through 
the  yellow  is  that  which  reaches  the  blue 
particle,  and  that  they  both  absorbed  I  showed 
you  in  the  spectrum.  The  yellow  absorbed  in 
the  blue  alone,  and  the  blue  absorbed  in  the 
yellow  and  red,  green  rays  would,  therefore, 
only  come  through  the  two. 

For  the  same  reason,  when  I  held  the 
yellow  glass  in  front  of  the  beam  of  light, 
the  blue  became  green,  simply  because  the 
yellow  glass  blocked  out  the  blue,  and  the 
blue  particles  on  the  paper  only  allowed  the 
green    to    pass    through.      This    exemplifies 


12 


again  what  I  told  you,  that  it  does  not  matter 
where  you  have  your  colouring  matter, 
whether  it  is  miles  away  from  the  paper  or 
absolutely  in  contact  with  it,  so  long  as  it  is 
between  the  source  of  light  and  the  paper 
itself.  But  artists,  whether  they  do  so  know- 
ingly or  not,  employ  the  method  of  mixing  the 
light  reflected  from  the  pigments,  as  well  as 
mixing  the  pigments  themselves,  of  mixture 
of  colour.  We  know  perfectly  well  that 
gamboge  and  cyanine  blue  are  a  very  favourite 
mixture  for  greens ;  but,  on  the  other  hand, 
you  will  find  that  in  some  of  the  most  beauti- 
ful works  of  art  broad  washes,  to  obtain  light 
and  shadow,  are  not  adhered  to,  but,  as  in 
the  execution  of  portraits,  stippling  is  resorted 
to.  Now  stippling  means  that  different 
colours  in  fine  dots  are  placed  close  to 
one  another,  so  close  that  the  eye  cannot 
separate  them,  and  the  colours  blend  one  into 
the  other.  Thus,  if  you  have,  for  instance, 
a  great  many  yellow  (gamboge)  dots  distri- 
buted amongst  a  great  many  blue  (cyanine) 
dots,  the  result  is  exactly  the  same  as 
you  saw  on  the  screen,  viz.,  instead  of 
getting  a  green  the  general  effect  is  a  grey. 
This  is  the  whole  principle  on  which  stippling 
depends,  viz.,  the  juxtaposition  of  very 
different  colours  to  give  an  effect  which  other- 
wise cannot  be  obtained.  Now,  the  explana- 
tion may  be  new  or  it  may  be  old,  but  from 
having  examined  a  large  number  of  stippled 
water-colour  drawings,  one  can  only  come  to 
the  conclusion  that  many  of  the  tender  greys 
which  are  often  seen  in  stippled  works  are 
simply  due  to  the  fact  that  you  have  two  or  more 
colours  in  dots  and  fine  lines  in  juxtaposition 
one  to  another,  which  colours,  when  combined 
in  a  rotating  apparatus  such  as  you  have  seen, 
give  the  effect  of  grey  to  the  eye. 

I  must  nowrepeatthe  experiment  with  which  I 
began  my  series  of  lectures,  viz.,  that  the  three 
colours,  vermilion,  emerald  green,  and  ultra- 
marine blue,  will  give  you  white  ;  and  I  think 
that  this  will  be  a  proof— at  all  events,  a  minor 
proof— that  the  three  sensations  which  the  eye 
distinguishes  are  green,  blue,  and  red,  and  not 
yellow,  blue,  and  red,  as  used  to  be  held. 
Here  we  have  three  colours  rapidly  rotating, 
and  those  three  brilliant  colours  give  the  sensa- 
tion of  white.  What  proof  is  there  in  this 
that  the  three  primary  colours  are  red, 
blue,  and  green  ?  Recollect  that  I  showed 
you  just  now  that  blue  and  yellow  made 
white,  therefore  red  and  green  must  make 
yellow.  Is  that  the  case  ?  If  that  be  the  case, 
I  think  the  point  is  proved.    Let  us  see  whether 


such  is  the  case.  We  will  go  back  to  our 
apparatus  consisting  of  the  half-lenses.  There 
is  a  reddish  glass  in  front  of  one  half-lens, 
green  in  front  of  the  other  half,  the  part  of  the 
discs  which  overlap  is  yellow ;  hence  red  and 
green  make  yellow.  We  have  already  seen 
that  blue  and  yellow  make  white,  but  it  takes 
red,  green,  and  blue  to  make  white  ;  therefore 
yellow  is  equal  to  red  filus  green. 

Let  me  further  show  this.  I  have  a  lens  in 
front  of  the  lantern  which  forms  a  slightly 
larger  image  of  the  aperture  than  before. 
Cemented  alongside  one  another  I  have  three 
coloured  glasses — green,  red,  and  blue.  These, 
when  placed  in  front  of  the  lens,  and  in  close 
contact  with  it,  will,  with  a  little  manipulation, 
show  a  disc  of  light,  something  approaching 
white.  The  three  colours  combine  to  give  this 
result. 

I  am  next  going  to  show  you  how  we  can 
get  complementary  colours.  A  patch  of  white 
light  is  now  upon  the  screen  by  means  of  our 
much  used  apparatus.  I  have  a  card  in  which  is 
cut  a  wide  slot  to  allow  the  whole  spectrum  to 
pass  through,  and  suspended  from  it  is  a  little 
prism,  which  will  cut  off  a  certain  amount 
of  the  spectrum.  The  part  so  cut  off  will  be 
reflected  on  to  a  mirror,  and  by  means  of  a  lens 
will  form  a  patch  on  the  screen.  The  rest  of 
the  spectrum  will  go  through  to  the  usual  lens, 
and  form  another  patch  of  white  minus  the 
colour  reflected.  The  two  patches  when  super- 
posed give  white,  but  a  rod  placed  in  the  front 
give  two  complementary  colours  side  by  side. 
The  complementary  colour  is  that  which  with 
the  colour  itself  will  give  white.  I  will  cut  off 
the  different  parts  of  the  spectrum,  and  you 
will  see  the  real  complementary  colour.  On 
cutting  out  the  different  colours  you  will  notice  I 
get  almost  every  variety  of  hue,  and  the  colours 
complementary  to  them.  This  seems  a  very 
simple  way  of  getting  complementary  colours, 
and  I  think  it  is  instructive,  as  at  the  same 
time  it  is  seen  that  the  background,  where  the 
two  overlap,  is  white. 

The  next  point  we  come  to  is  one  that  is 
very  germane  to  our  subject,  and  that  is  how 
are  we  to  measure  the  intensity  of  pigments  in 
any  satisfactory  way  ?  As  far  as  I  know,  a 
paper  which  General  Festing  and  I  recently 
read  before  the  Royal  Society  explains  the 
only  method  which  has  been  satisfactory,  so 
far,  and  I  hope  to  show  you  how  that  is 
done. 

The  desideratum  is  to  compare  the  intensity 
of  any  colour  of  the  spectrum  which  is  reflected 
from  any  pigment  with  that  which  is  reflected 


•3 


from  a  surface  of  white  paper.  When  you  get 
that  you  know  exactly  the  colour  value  of  the 
pigment.and  by  certain  methods  which  I  shall 
show  you  bye-and-bye,  you  can  at  any  time 
make  upon  the  screen  by  the  spectrum  alone  the 
exact  colour  of  the  pigment  you  have  measured. 
In  order  to  take  these  measurements  it  is 
necessary  to  have  two  similar  spectra  one 
above  the  other,  and  this  we  get  in  the  follow- 
ing manner.  Upon  the  screen  a  lens  forms  an 
image  of  an  aperture  placed  in  front  of  the 
lantern.  Where  the  rays  passing  through  the 
lens  cross,  I  put  what  is  known  as  a  double- 
image  prism,  and  by  it  we  get  two  discs  of 
light,  which  will  rotate  round  a  centre  as  the 
prism  is  turned  round  its  axis.  This  double- 
image  prism  is  of  Iceland  spar,  made  by  Mr. 


Fig.  ii 


iff 

i 

i 


13- 


-Ev 


Hilger  with  his  usual  ability.  It  gives  us  the 
means  of  at  once  getting  two  spectra  one  above 
the  other  having  exactly  the  same  quality  of 
light. 

In  contact  with  the  lens  of  the  collimator,  as 
it  is  called  (which  makes  the  rays  which  strike 
the  prism  parallel),  is  placed  the  double  image 
prism ;  we  thus  get  two  sets  of  parallel  rays, 
one  set  inclined  at  a  slight  angle  to  the  other. 
Two  spectra  by  this  artifice  are  formed  by 
the  prisms,  one  above  the  other,  and  separated 
by  a  breadth  of  about  one-eighth  of  an  inch. 
Passing  a  slit  through  those  two  spectra,  the 
same  colour  is  cut  off  from  each  when  the 
double  image  prism  is  properly  in  adjustment. 
To  the  card,  C,  in  which  the  slit  is  cut,  two 
right-angle  prisms  are  attached,  as  shown,  and 
so  adjusted  that  the  beam,  r,  from  the  top 
spectrum  is  reflected  first  by  the  prism  A,  and 
then  by  the  prism  B,  on  to  the  screen.  A 
lens,  F,  of  about  two  feet  focus,  in  front  of  B, 
makes  a  coloured  patch  on  the  screen,  over- 
lapping a  patch  of  the  same  colour  formed  by 
the  lens  D,  which  comes  from  the  bottom  spec- 
trum. By  this  means  we  get  a  parallax  of 
lights  of  exactly  the  same  colour,  one  from 


the  bottom  spectrum,  and  the  other  from  the 
top  spectrum.  A  rod  placed  in  front  of  the 
patch  will  cast  two  shadows,  one  illuminated 
by  one  spectrum,  and  the  other  by  the  other. 
The  colour,  orange,  which  I  propose  to 
measure,  is  on  one  half  of  this  card ;  the  other 
half  is  left  white,  the  coloured  and  the  white 
adjacent  rectangles  surrounded  by  a  black 
mask.  In  the  left  hand  shadow  is  the  white 
card,  and  on  the  right  hand  is  the  colour 
which  we  wish  to  measure.  In  front  of  the 
beam  which  illuminates  the  shadow  cast  on 
the  white  surface  are  placed  the  rotating 
sectors,  and  by  altering  their  aperture  I  can 
make  the  two  coloured  shadows  of  exactly 
the  same  intensity.  Stopping  the  motor,  the 
angular  aperture  is  read  off.  With  another 
part  of  the  spectrum  exactly  the  same  thing  is 
done ;  by  that  means  we  are  able  to  compare 
the  amount  of  light  which  is  reflected  for  the 
pigment,  and  from  the  white  card. 

It  is  on  this  principle  that  these  particular 
colours  were  measured.  To  graphically  show 
their  reflective  power  for  different  parts  of 
the  spectrum,  the  following  plan  was  adopted. 
Suppose,  for  instance,  that  for  one  spec- 
trum to  match  the  other  in  intensity  through- 
out its  length  required  an  angular  aperture 
of  ioo,  and  if  for  emerald  green  at  a 
wave  length  of  (say)  5,500,  it  required  an 
angular  aperture  of  45,  then  in  forming 
this  curve  we  set  off  the  wave  lengths  as  a 
base  line,  and  at  5,500  set  up  this  angular 
aperture,  which  gives  us  a  point  on  the  curve, 
whilst  the  light  reflected  from  the  white  sur- 
face is  represented  by  100.  Thus,  at  this 
point,  emerald  green  reflects  only  iVbths  of 
this  particular  light.  By  taking  numerous 
other  parts  of  the  spectrum  you  are  able  to 
build  up  a  curve,  which  is  an  absolute  measure 
of  the  light  reflected  from  the  pigment,  as 
compared  with  that  reflected  from  the  white 
surface.  I  want  you  to  notice  how  very 
peculiar  are  the  curves  of  the  yellow  pigments. 
There  seems  to  be  very  little  difference  in  the 
intensity  of  light  reflected  from  them,  but 
to  the  eye  they  appear  of  decidedly  different 
hues.  It  is  just  these  little  differences  in  the 
curves  which  make  up  the  difference  in  the  hues 
which  are  so  noticeable.  Again,  I  want  you  to 
notice  cobalt.  You  see  what  a  large  proportion 
of  red  there  is  in  cobalt,  and  what  a  little  red 
there  is  in  Prussian  blue,  Antwerp  blue,  indigo, 
or  French  ultramarine.  If  we  take  a  line  tan- 
gential to  the  bottom  of  these  curves,  and 
parallel  to  the  base  line,  the  height  of  this 
tangent  shows  the  amount  of  white  light  which 


»4 


Fig. 

I  2 

ioo  White 

90 
BO 

70 

00 

2 

70 
6(1 

y 

^^ 

7 

' 

r^w 

.. 

40 
86 
10 

»' 

40 

'4- 

\  i 

/.... 

\  i 

7 

t— 

20 

ii-'i  7 

/ 

in 

1 

/ 

0 

B 

f 

\  '"HrT 

1    T 

() 

4L   P  5°°\  «°W1W  J  °    -""Vol    -'S°    fXS~7!°   7°oo  '- 

O  £O0 

Fig. 

■3 

fOOWMt* 

90 
80 
70 

eo 

50 

90 
70 

50 
40 
JO 

/ 

^S 

30 

/ 

V 

1~ 

j-P 

/ 

V 

20 

y 

"~~     ' 

JO 

2 

10 

0 
4C 

a 
i 

f 

£ 

0 

V 

r 

0 

»f^                                                                                              '    S0° 

c   c 


«3     ^  3 


«s 


I 


i.  Indigo.  2.  Antwerp  Blue. 

4.  French  Ultramarine. 

Fig.  14. 


3.  Cobalt* 


1.  Emerald  Green.      2.  Chromous  Oxide.      3.  Terre  Verte. 


Fig.  15, 


100 

< 

m 

0  Wh 

te 

10  ! 

700  (V/i  te 

90 

f 

\1  .-" 

90 

no 

90 

-, 

10 

70 

eo 
so 

— 

J^ 

70 

HO 

70 

' 



70 

— 

~ 

v/ 

if 

~ 

- 

so 

40 

50 
40 

— 

J 

50 

v: 

/? 

j- 
4 

l^***1 

— 

1 

„.-. 

le" 

20 
10 
0 

8 
2 

'1/ 
1~" 

0 

h 

1= 

— '- 

D 

1 

B 

I 

f 

f 

£ 

0 

C 

S 

I 

0 

10 

ETJ"° 

"i^koyi^1 

|     ^J"   |)"«    «u  7ooo  * 

kzj       -•-?°t  ?ji < 

i 

!         J       J     |E  I      111? 

I                II            ^ 

■a-                      -o'          J 

6 

i 

03               ca        £    v-     L.               ?^        Ot~           i5 

1.  Vermilion.          2.  Carmine. 

3.  Mercuric  Iodide. 

1.  Gamboge.      2.  Indian  Yellow.       3.  Cadmium  Yellow. 

4. 

[ndi 

in  I 

led 

< 

•  Y 

L'llu 

If  0 

Jire 

is  reflected  from  the  pigment,  and  is  a  measure 
of  its  impurity.  For  instance,  if  you  take  the 
curve  of  cobalt,  you  will  see  it  has  about  3 
per  cent,  of  white  light  mixed  with  it ;  whilst 
in  the  tint  measured  of  Antwerp  blue  there  is 
about  23  per  cent,  of  white  light  mixed  with 
the  true  colour  of  that  pigment.  You  will 
notice  that,  in  all  cases,  a  certain  amount  of 
white  light  is  reflected  from  the  pigments,  and 
therefore  not  one  is  really  a  pure  colour. 

Now  I  want  to  show  you  another  method,  and 
one  which  has  never  been  exhibited  before,  by 
which  we  can  obtain  the  intensity  of  colours  in 
a  very  simple  way.  I  use  for  convenience  sake 
a  rather  short  focussed  lens  in  the  camera,  as 
I  want  to  form  rather  bigger  patches  of  mono- 
chromatic light.  Behind  those  black  discs  of  the 
motor  is  a  disc  of  white  card,  and  I  am  going  to 
measure  the  intensity  of  spectrum  colour  re- 
flected from  a  coloured  disc  by  a  novel  method. 


I  can  put  any  coloured  disc  I  like  in  front  of  the 
sectors,  and  in  contact  with  them.  I  rotate  the 
sectors  in  the  coloured  patch,  and  I  can  alter 
the  amount  of  white  on  the  larger  disc  until  I 
get  it  to  match  the  luminosity  of  the  colour  in 
the  centre.  Knowing  how  much  black  has  to 
be  mixed  with  white,  in  order  to  bring  the  tint 
reflected  from  the  colour  in  the  centre  to  the 
same  value  as  that  reflected  from  the  rotating 
black  and  white,  I  can  readily  determine  the 
intensity  of  the  light  reflected.  (Several 
colours  were  measured  in  succession,  in  the 
manner  described.) 

Next  on  my  programme  is  the  method  of 
producing  on  the  screen  the  exact  colour  of 
any  pigment.  The  researches  of  Dr.  Russell 
and  myself  on  various  pigments  which  have 
faded  in  light  would  be  of  little  value,  unless 
in,  say,  a  thousand  years'  time  those  colours 
could  be  reproduced  with  the  same  accuracy 


'S 


with  which  they  were  measured.  We  have  a 
means  by  which  we  can,  without  having  the 
pigment  itself,  absolutely  reproduce  that  colour 
from  a  card  such  as  this.  I  will  show  you  on 
the  screen  how  it  is  done. 

Fig.  16. 


40 1  4  «ls50 

D  Prussian  Blue 


If  we  mark  off  the  scale  of  the  spectrum 
along  the  radius  of  a  circle,  and  draw  circles 
at  the  various  points  of  the  scale  from  its 
centre,  and  from  the  same  centre  draw  lines 
corresponding  to  the  various  angular  apertures 
of  the  sectors  required  at  the  various  points  of 
the  scale  to  measure  the  light  reflected  from  a 


pigment,  the  point  where  one  of  these  lines  cuts 
the  circle  drawn  through  the  particular  point  of 
of  the  scale  to  which  the  aperture  has  reference, 
gives  us  a  point  on  a  curved  figure.  Such  a 
figure,  when  rotated  in  front  of  the  spectrum 
in  the  proper  position,  will  cut  off  exactly  the 
right  amount  of  the  spectrum  at  each  part  of 
it  to  give  the  colour  required.  I  will  show 
you  one  or  two  of  these  colours,  and  by  that 
means  you  will  see  that  we  have  literally  tem- 
plates by  which  our  successors  in  science  will 
be  able  to  reproduce  the  colours  which  we 
have  measured  in  our  experiments,  and  to  see 
whether  any  alteration  has  taken  place  in 
those  particular  pigments  we  have  used,  and 
which  we  propose  to  leave,  either  at  the  South 
Kensington  Museum  or  elsewhere,  for  the 
benefit  of  those  who  come  after  us.  (The 
colours  of  various  pigments  of  blue  sky,  gold, 
and  gaslight,  were  reproduced  on  the  screen.) 
By  cutting  out  templates  like  these,  and  in 
your  laboratory  carefully  making  the  neces- 
sary adjustments,  you  can  always  reproduce 
on  the  screen  any  colour  you  may  have 
measured,  and  if  you  use  the  light  in  which 
the  colour  has  to  be  viewed,  be  it  sunlight, 
gaslight,  starlight  —  whatever  light  it  is— to 
form  the  spectrum,  you  will  get  on  the 
screen  the  colour  as  it  would  be  seen  in  that 
light. 


i6 


LECTURE  IV.— Delivered   December   17,    1888. 


We  have,  in  the  three  preceding  lectures, 
seen  how  colour  is  produced,  and  how  it 
depends  on  three  factors— the  kind  of  light 
falling  on  to  the  substance,  the  kind  of  sub- 
stance itself,  and  also  the  eye  of  the  observer. 

To-night  I  have  to  endeavour  to  explain  in 
one  hour  what  ought  to  take  many  more  hours, 
how  light  acts  in  altering  the  colour  of  pig- 
ments through  what  I  may  call  mechanical 
means.  A  water-colour  picture  (I  shall  deal 
only  with  such)  is  exposed  in  the  ordinary 
atmosphere  of  a  room.  Sometimes  that  room 
is  without  a  fire  ;  consequently  the  atmosphere 
becomes  more  or  less  damp,  and  all  absorbent 
objects,  such  as  paper,  take  up  moisture.  At 
other  times,  when  there  is  a  certain  amount 
of  warmth,  the  moisture  which  it  would 
take  from  the  air  is  less ;  so  that  a  picture  is 
exposed  to  alternations  of  damp  and  dryness. 
Dr.  Russell  and  myself  concluded  that  it 
would  be  quite  fair  for  testing  the  stability  of 
water-colour  pigments  if  we  exposed  them  to 
the  ordinary  outside  atmosphere,  and  then 
traced  the  amount  of  fading  which  took  place, 
remembering  this,  that  a  picture  inside  a  room 
would  certainly  be  more  stable,  supposing 
moisture  had  anything  to  do  with  fading. 

We  prepared  tubes,  as  in  Fig.  17,  perfectly 

Fig.  17. 


(n\ 


open  at  each  end,  but  with  a  small  cork  in  the 
unbent  end,  the  cork  being  pierced  with  a 
large  hole.  A  current  of  air  could  pass 
throughout  the  tube  when  hung  on  a  bar  by 
the  bend  and  exposed  to  the  sunlight.    Inside 


each  tube  were  strips  of  paper,  covered  with  a 
pigment  which  had  been  tinted  by  hand  in 
graduated  tints  (such  as  you  see  here).  There 
were  eight  tints  in  all.  One  such  strip  was 
placed  in  one  end  of  the  tube  and  another  in 
the  other.  The  lower  half  of  the  tube  was 
covered  with  an  opaque  covering  so  as  to  pro- 
tect it  entirely  from  the  light,  and  the  other  was 
left  free  to  the  sunlight  and  the  light  from  the 
sky.  By-and-by  I  shall  show  you  why  it  was 
we  deliberately  chose  sunlight  to  which  to 
expose  our  water  colours.  From  theoretical 
considerations  we  arrived  at  the  conclusion 
that  fading  would  take  place  in  a  shorter  time 
in  sunlight  than  it  would  do  if  we  exposed  it  to 
the  open  sky  alone. 

In  such  a  series  of  tubes,  containing  in  all 
somewhere  about  100  colours — 39  being  simple 
colours,  the  others  being  mixed  colours — 
were  exposed.  The  first  reading  of  the  amount 
of  fading  was  taken  in  August,  1886,  or  after 
four  months'  exposure,  and  we  found  that  in 
many  of  the  colours  fading  had  taken  place 
to  a  certain  extent,  although  perhaps  not  to  so 
large  an  extent  as  might  have  been  antici- 
pated. From  time  to  time  after  that  date  the 
tubes  were  examined,  and  the  amount  of  fade 
ing  noted,  our  notes  showing  the  deepest  tint 
which  was  visibly  acted  upon.  Finally,  we  were 
obliged  to  conclude  our  experiments,  owing  to 
the  impatience  of  certain  gentlemen  who  were 
anxious  to  get  the  results  we  had  obtained, 
apparently  for  their  own  advantage  rather 
than  for  that  of  the  public.  We  thus  stopped 
our  first  series  of  experiments  in  March 
of  this  year,  or  after  these  tubes  had  been 
exposed  about  one  year  and  nine  months 
outside  my  laboratory  at  South  Kensington. 

In  these  tubes,  then,  we  had  the  ordinary 
atmosphere,  to  which  moisture  and  air  had 
free  access.  If  the  tube  got  the  least  bit 
heated  a  current  passed  through  it,  much  in 
the  same  way  as  would  be  the  case  in  a  chim- 
ney. The  great  point  to  settle  was  whether 
the  fading  which  we  knew  must  take  place, 


17 


and  which  we  subsequently  noted,  was  due  to 
the  air  itself,  or  to  the  air  £lus  moisture,  or  to 
the  moisture  alone.  In  order  to  test  that,  we 
passed  air  over  various  drying  materials,  dried 
the  papers  and  tubes  very  thoroughly.  The 
papers  were  then  placed  in  straight  tubes 
sealed  at  one  end,  and  when  filled  with  dry  air 
the  other  end  was  sealed  off,  and  they  were 
exposed  to  sunlight,  one  paper  being  shaded 
from  it  as  before.  In  the  case  of  the  open 
tubes,  we  found  out  of  39  simple  colours  only 
12  were  not  acted  upon;  and  in  Table  I.  you 
have  the  39  single  colours  in  the  order  of  their 
fugitiveness. 


TABLE  I. 


Carmine. 
Crimson  lake. 
Purple  madder. 
Scarlet  lake. 
Payne's  grey. 
Naples  yellow. 
Olive  green. 
Indigo. 

Brown  madder. 
Gamboge. 
Vandyke  brown. 
Brown  pink. 
Indian  yellow. 
Cadmium  yellow 
Leitches  blue. 
Violet  carmine. 
Purple  carmine. 
Violet  carmine. 
Purple  carmine. 
Sepia. 
Aureolin. 
Rose  madder 


Permanent  blue. 
Antwerp  blue. 
Madder  lake. 
Vermilion. 
Emerald  green. 
Burnt  umber. 


Yellow  ochre. 
Indian  red. 
Venetian  red. 
Burnt  sienna. 
Chrome  yellow. 
Lemon  yellow. 
Raw  sienna. 
Terre  verte 
Chromium  oxide. 
Prussian  blue. 
Cobalt. 
French  blue. 
Ultramarine  ash. 


Vermilion  is  ordinarily  supposed  not  to 
change  at  all,  but,  as  a  matter  of  fact,  it 
does  change,  and  in  every  sample  there 
has  been  a  little  blackening.  Those  last 
on  the  list,  yellow  ochre,  Indian  red,  and 
so  on,  show  no  change  whatever  after  being 
exposed  to  as  much  sunlight  as  there  was  in 
one  year  and  nine  months.  They  remained 
perfectly  unaltered,  and,  if  you  begin  with  rose 
madder  (all  below  which  may  be  said  to  be 
practically  permanent)  you  have  a  very  good 
gamut  on  which  an  artist  could  work  in  water 
colour. 

In  the  closed  tubes  with  dry  air,  out  of 
thirty-eight  sample  colours  which  were  ex- 
posed, twenty-two  were  not  acted  upon,  so  that 
it  is  evident  that  moisture  had  something  to 
do  with  the  fading  of  some. 


TABLE  n. 

Name  of  Colour.  Dry  Air. 

Carmine    Faded  to  7. 

Crimson  lake    Gone  to  5. 

Scarlet  lake Faded  and  darkened. 

Vermilion Gone  black. 

Rose  madder No  change. 

Madder  lake No  change. 

Indian   red   No  change. 

Venetian  red  No  change. 

Brown  madder    Faded  to  4. 

Burnt  sienna No  change. 

Gamboge Faded  to  3. 

Aureolin    No  change. 

Chrome  yellow   No  change. 

Cadmium  yellow No  change. 

Yellow  ochre No  change. 

Naples  yellow No  change. 

Indian  yellow Faded  to  4. 

Raw  sienna No  change. 

Emerald   green    No  change. 

Terre  verte No  change. 

Chrom.  oxide No  change. 

Olive  green No  change. 

Antwerp  blue Faded  to  3. 

Prussian  blue Faded  to  5. 

Indigo  blue Faded  to  ". 

Cobalt  blue No  change. 

French  blue No  change. 

Ultramarine  ash No  change. 

Leitches  blue Faded  to  5. 

Permanent  blue No  change. 

Payne's  grey    No  change. 

Violet  carmine Faded  and  brown. 

Purple   carmine   Faded. 

Purple   madder    Faded  to  4. 

Sepia No  change. 

Vandyke  brown V.  si.  faded. 

Burnt  umber   No  change. 

Brown  pink Faded  to  4. 

Note. — SI.  means  slightly ;  V.  si.  means  very  slightly  ; 
No.  1  is  the  faintest  tint. 

The  next  series  was  interesting.  The  same 
kind  of  tube  was  taken  and  filled  with 
hydrogen,  and  also  with  as  much  moisture  as 
the  hydrogen  and  paper  would  take  up.  The 
tubes  were  then  sealed  and  exposed  to  light 
approximately  for  the  same  length  of  time  as 
the  other  tubes.  As  a  matter  of  fact,  out  of 
thirty-six  colours  twenty-two  remained  un- 
changed, the  same  as  before.  Hydrogen,  I 
may  say,  is  practically  an  inert  gas  for  this 
purpose,  as  we  proved  subsequently. 

Then  we  come  to  the  most  interesting  series 
of  all,  when  we  excluded  air  and  moisture  from 
the  water  colours.  We  took  exactly  similar 
tubes,  dried  the  papers  very  carefully  indeed, 
dried    the    tube,   inserted   the   papers,  put  a 


i8 


Sprengel  pump  to  work,  and  made  a  vacuum, 
and  then  when  the  vacuum  was  very  complete, 
sealed  off  the  top  and  exposed  them. 

TABLE  III. 
Name  of  Colour.  Vacuum. 

Carmine   No  change. 

Crimsonlake   No  change. 

Scarletlake No  change. 

Vermilion     Gone  black. 

Rosemadder No  change. 

Madder  lake    No  change. 

Indian  red  No  change. 

Venetianred   No  change. 

Brownmadder    No  change. 

Burntsienna    No  change. 

Gamboge No  change. 

Aureolin   No  change. 

Chromeyellow    No  change. 

Cadmium  yellow     No  change. 

Yellow  ochre No  change- 

Lemon  yellow No  chanSe- 

Naples  yellow No  chanSe- 

Indianyellow No  change" 

Raw  sienna SI.  darkened. 

Emerald  green    No  change. 

Terre  verte  No  chanSe- 

Chrom.  oxide No  change. 

Olivegreen No  chanSe- 

Antwerp  blue No  change. 

Prussianblue V.  si.  faded. 

Indigo  blue No  chanSe- 

Cobalt  blue No  change- 

French  blue.... No  change. 

Ultramarine  ash No  change. 

Leitchesblue No  change. 

Permanent  blue No  change. 

Payne's  grey  No  change. 

Violet  carmine    SI.  darkened. 

Purple  carmine    SI.  darkened. 

Purple  madder    V.  si.  gone. 

Sepia    SI.  faded  to  6- 

Vandyke  brown No  change. 

Burnt  umber No  change. 

Brown  pink No  change. 

Indian  yellow  and  rose  madder    No  change. 

Rose  madder  and  raw  sienna   No  change. 

Raw  sienna  and  Venetian  red No  change. 

Vermilion  and  chrome  yellow More  yellow. 

Burnt  sienna  and  Naples  yellow  ....     V.  si.  faded. 
Indigo,  Indian  yellow,  raw  and  burnt 

sienna   No  change. 

Indigo  and  gamboge Gone  blue. 

Prussian  blue  and  gamboge Gone  green. 

Burnt  sienna  and  Antwerp  blue Gone  red. 

Raw  sienna  and  Antwerp  blue     Gone  brown. 

Prussian  blue,  raw  and  burnt  sienna, 

and  Indian  yellow Gone  brown. 

Piussian  blue  and  burnt  sieuna    ....     Gone  brown. 
Indigo  and  Vandyke  brown Faded. 


Name  of  Colour. 
Prussian  blue  and  burnt  sienna    .... 

Prussian  blue  and  raw  sienna   

Indigo  and  raw  sienna  

Indigo  and  burnt  sienna    

Indigo,  raw  and  burnt  sienna   

Prussian  blue  and  Vandyke  brown  . . 

Indigo  and  Venetian  red  

Prussian  blue  and  Indian  red 

Indigo  and  Indian  red   

Prussian  blue  and  crimson  lake  .... 
Antwerp  blue  and  crimson  lake  .... 
Indigo,  Venetian  red,  yellow  ochre . . 
Prussian  blue,  yellow  ochre,  Venetian 
red    

Note.— SI.  means  slightly; 
No.  i  is  the  faintest  tint. 


Vacuum. 
Gone  brown. 
Gone  red. 
No  change. 
No  change. 
No  change. 
Gone   brown. 
No  change. 
Gone  red. 
No  change. 
Gone  pink. 
Gone  pink. 
No  change. 

Gone  red. 
means  very  slightly ; 


We  here  arrived  at  the  very  interesting  fact 
that  out  of  thirty-nine  simple  colours  which  were 
exposed,  only  five  were  acted  upon  in  the  very 
least,  and  the  amount  of  change  was  so  slight 
that  you  might  almost  say  every  colour  re- 
mained perfectly  unchanged  in  vacuo.  The 
five  that  were  changed  were  vermilion  (which 
went  black  to  a  very  slight  extent),  raw  sienna, 
Prussian  blue,  purple  madder,  and  sepia.  We 
are  apt  to  look  on  sepia  as  one  of  the  most 
permanent  pigments ;  as  a  matter  of  fact  it  is 
fugitive  in  ordinary  air,  and  those  who  have 
examined  sepia  drawings  made  in  the  early 
part  of  the  century  will  see  there  has  been 
certainly  a  distinct  fading  of  those  drawings. 
By  the  process  of  exhaustion,  we  arrived  at 
the  fact  that  it  requires  both  moisture  and  air 
to  cause  the  fading  of  these  pigments. 

Now  the  question  arose— Would  heat  with- 
out light  cause  the  fading  of  pigments?  Where 
they  were  exposed  to  sunlight  it  might  be 
surmised,  perhaps  fairly,  that  in  the  sunlight, 
which  we  know  has  a  heating  effect,  the  fading 
might  be  due  to  this  cause  in  the  open  tubes. 

This  could  not  be  the  case  in  the  closed 
tubes,  as  in  them  the  colours  did  not  fade. 
To  test  the  action  of  heat  alone,  we  took 
tubes  in  which  the  papers  were  sealed  up 
with  moist  air,  and  exposed  them  for  three 
or  four  weeks,  at  the  temperature  of  boil- 
ing water,  in  the  dark.  There  was  a  certain 
amount  of  fading  in  these  colours,  but^I 
need  scarcely  say  that  the  fading  was  small, 
and  also  that  the  temperature  to  which  they 
were  exposed  was  something  far  beyond  that 
to  which  colours  in  our  open  tubes  were  sub- 
jected. If  you  put  a  thermometer  up  one  of 
the  open  tubes  when  it  is  in  full  sunshine,  the 
difference  between  the  temperature  of  the  air 
inside  it  and  the  air  outside  only  varied  between 


'9 


three  and  four  degrees.  That  was  simply  due 
to  the  fact  that  there  was  a  draft  created  up 
the  tube,  as  already  pointed  out. 

But  another  point,  and  a  very  fair  point  for 
the  critics  to  take  hold  of,  is  this.  It  is  all 
very  well  to  say  light  alone  causes  fading,  but 
how  about  light  and  heat  together,  would 
not  the  heat  aid  the  light  ?  This  possible 
criticism  was  combated,  I  hope,  in  a  suc- 
cessful way.  A  certain  series  of  pigments, 
washed  on  paper,  were  taken  and  exposed 
on  a  vessel  containing  boiling  water  ;  similar 
papers  were  exposed  to  the  sunlight  free, 
that  is  to  say,  without  the  presence  of 
the  boiling  water.  In  some  few  cases  the 
fading  was  rather  more  rapid,  in  others  less, 
and  you  will  very  readily  see  why,  in  some 
rases  it  was  rather  less  rapid.  You  require 
moisture  plus  air  in  order  to  cause  fading, 
and  if  you  heat  the  paper  of  course  you  take 
away  part  of  the  moisture — one  of  the  agencies 
which  are  conducive  to  fading.  But  the  differ- 
ence between  those  exposed  on  boiling  water, 
and  those  exposed  without,  was  so  small  that 
you  might  take  the  action  of  light  plus  heat 
as  equivalent  to  the  action  of  light  alone. 

There  was  another  experiment  we  had  to 
try,  and  that  was  as  to  the  rays  which 
caused  the  fading.  I  have  shown  you  in  my 
previous  lectures  that  beautiful  band  of  colour 
we  call  the  spectrum.  I  daresay  you  noticed 
that  the  beam  of  light  which  passes  through 
the  slit  to  form  the  spectrum  is  uncommonly 
narrow  ;  for  accurate  experiments  we  should 
not  use  it  more  than  i-ioooth  inch  wide,  and 
that  has  to  be  spread  out  into  that  band  of 
colours,  so  that  really  the  light  which  strikes 
upon  the  screen  is  very  feeble  indeed.  If  we 
had  attempted  to  expose  some  of  these  pig- 
ments in  the  spectrum,  we  should  have  had  to 
expose  them  for  some  thousands  of  years,  and 
as  life  is  shorter  than  this,  we  thought  it  was 
better  to  take  some  other  means  of  arriving  at 
the  conclusion  as  to  what  coloured  rays  were 
the  active  agents  ;  so  we  adopted  a  method 
which,  perhaps,  may  be  called  crude,  but  I  do 
not  think  it  is  crude  when  you  know  how  you 
are  going  to  work.  We  exposed  slips  of  paper 
beneath  coloured  glass  — red,  blue,  and  green, 
and  also  white.  Here  are  some  of  the  pig- 
ments which  were  actually  exposed.  We 
got  the  results  as  shown  in  Table  IV.  (p. 
20). 

We  exposed  39  or  40  simple  colours  besides 
compound  colours,  and  I  want  you  to  notice 
how  very  few  faded  in  the  green,  in  the  red 
less  than  the  green,  but  a  very  great  many  more 


under  the  blue  glass  than  under  either  of  the 
other  two,  You  will  see  that  the  blue  and  the 
white  were  almost  equally  effective.  Had  a 
certain  proportion  of  the  blue  rays  in  the  white 
light  been  cut  off  by  the  glass,  practically 
those  two  columns,  white  and  blue,  would 
have  been  identical.  Under  the  red  and 
green  glasses  the  fading  of  the  few  pigments 
which  succumbed  was  so  small  that  it  re- 
quired a  practised  eye  to  distinguish  it. 

Now  I  will  read  you  some  conclusions  we 
came  to  with  regard  to  the  fading  of  water 
colours  : — "  Mineral  colours  are  far  more  stable 
than  vegetable  colours,  and  amongst  those 
colours  which  have  remained  unaltered,  or 
have  very  slightly  changed  after  an  exposure 
to  light  of  extreme  severity,  a  good  gamut  is 
available  to  the  water  -  colour  artist.  The 
presence  of  moisture  and  oxygen  are  in  most 
cases  essential  for  a  change  to  be  effected, 
even  in  the  vegetable  colours.  The  exclusion 
of  moisture  and  oxygen,  particularly  when 
the  latter  is  in  its  active  condition,  as  experi- 
ments to  be  described  in  our  next  report  show, 
would  give  a  much  longer  life  even  to  these 
than  they  enjoy  when  freely  exposed  to  the 
atmosphere  of  a  room.  It  may  be  said  that 
every  pigment  is  permanent  when  exposed  to 
light  in  vacuo,  and  this  indicates  the  direc- 
tion in  which  experiments  should  be  made  for 
the  preservation  of  water  -  colour  drawings. 
The  effect  of  light  on  a  mixture  of  colours 
which  have  no  direct  chemical  action  on  one 
another  is  that  the  unstable  colour  disappears, 
and  leaves  the  stable  colour  unaltered  appreci- 
ably. Our  experiments  also  show  that  the 
rays  which  produce  by  far  the  greatest  change 
in  a  pigment  are  the  blue  and  violet  com- 
ponents of  white  light,  and  that  these,  for 
equal  illumination,  predominate  in  light  from 
the  sky,  whilst  they  are  less  in  sunlight  and 
in  diffused  cloud  light,  and  are  present  in 
comparatively  small  proportion  in  the  artificial 
lights  usually  employed  in  lighting  a  room  or 
gallery." 

Now,  it  has  been  said  that  moisture 
and  oxygen  are  essential  for  the  fading 
of  water-colour  pigments.  Is  it  possible 
that  they  can  fade  without  light  ?  I  have 
here  a  stream  of  oxygen  passing  through  this 
tube  in  which  are  some  papers  coated  with 
pigments  ;  half  of  each  paper  has  been 
damped  and  the  other  half  is  dry.  In  con- 
nection with  this  tube  is  an  ozone  generator, 
and  a  Ruhmkorff  coil  produces  ozone,  or 
the  active  state  of  oxygen,  which  is  said  to 
be  particularly  present  near  the  sea.     In  this 


20 


TABLE    IV. 


Purple  Madder. .  . . 

Antwerp  Blue    .... 

Leitches  Blue 

Violet  Carmine. .  . . 

Payne's  Grey    .... 

Indigo     

Prussian  Blue   .... 

Rose  Madder    

(2  experiments.) 

Brown  Pink   

Crimson  Lake   .... 

Vandyke  Brown    . . 

Vermilion   

Carmine 

Gamboge   

Indian  Yellow   

Sepia  

Burnt  Sienna 


Faded  to  2  ... 
No  experiment 

SI.  faded 

Faded  to  1  ... 
Faded  to  1  ... 
No  experiment 
No  experiment 
SI.  bleached    . 


Antwerp  Blue  . . 
Prussian  Blue  . . 
Purple  Madder.. 
Burnt  Sienna 

Gamboge   

Indian  Yellow   . . 
Vandyke  Brown 
Brown  Pink 
Crimson  Lake   . . 

Carmine      

Vermilion 


Rose  Madder    . 
Violet  Carmine . 

Payne's  Grey    . 
Sepia  


No  experiment 
No  experiment 
No  experiment 
Darkened  . . . 
No  experiment 
No  experiment 
No  experiment 
Become  lighter 
No  change  . . . 

Colours  Mixed 

No  experiment 
No  experiment 

Bleached 

No  change  . . . 
No  experiment 
No  experiment 
No  experiment 
No  experiment 
No  experiment 
No  experiment 
Blackened    . . . 


Blue. 


Faded  to  1 

Faded   

SI.  faded  . . 
Faded  to  1 

Bluer    

Faded  to  1 
SI.  faded  . . 
SI.  faded  . . 


Faded  to  3      

Faded   

Faded  to  1    

V.  si.  darkened  . . 

Faded  to  3    

Faded  to  1    

No  change  

Become  lighter  . . 
No  change 


Green. 


Darkened 


Blue 


SI.  faded 
SI.  faded 

SI.  faded 


Red. 


Darkened 


SI.  faded. 
V.  si.  faded. 


SI.  faded. 


SI.  bleached 


Bleached  to  No 
and  darkened 
2  and  3 

Bleached  to  1  . . . 

Lighter 


'I 


with  Chinese  White. 

Bleached  ...    . 

Bleached 

Bleached 

No  change  . . . 
SI.  bleached  . 
SI.  bleached    . 

Bleached 

Bleached  to  3  . 
Bleached  to  3  . 
Bleached  to  3  . 


Blackened   under  1 
and  2     

V.  si.  bleached 

Same  as  under  white 
glass 


Become  bluer  , 
Lighter 


Become  bluer 


SI.  faded. 


Note.— SI.  means  slightly  ;  V.  si.  means  very  slightly  ;  No.  i  is  the  faintest  tint. 


21 


frame  [shown]  you  have  a  series  of  colours 
which  have  been  exposed  to  moist  ozone. 
A  gTeat  many  are  bleached  entirely,  thus 
proving,  if  you  have  ozone  and  moisture 
together,  you  get  a  bleaching  without  the 
presence  of  light  at  all.  Here  are  some 
papers  which  were  exposed,  I  think  for  about 
ten  minutes,  to  moist  ozone  before  the 
lecture,  and  you  will  be  able  to  see  the 
amount  of  fading  that  has  taken  place.  In 
the  example  of  indigo  the  bottom  part  was 
damped  and  the  top  part  left  dry  ;  the  first 
half  has  faded,  the  other  has  not.  In  carmine, 
too,  you  will  see  that  where  it  has  been 
damped  the  colour  has  entirely  gone  ;  the  dry 
part  is  much  less  changed.  We  come  then  to 
the  conclusion  that  oxygen  and  moisture  are 
sufficient  for  the  fading  of  water-colour  pig- 
ments, and  that  it  is  not  absolutely  necessary 
that  there  should  be  light  present  in  order  tha 
this  fading  may  take  place.  Now,  as  before 
said,  you  are  supposed  to  have  more  ozone  at 
the  seaside  than  inland.  It  is  therefore  a 
matter  for  consideration  whether  it  may  not 
be  the  fact  that  water-colour  drawings  fade 
more  rapidly  near  the  sea,  where  there  is  more 
ozone  present,  than  they  would  do  inland. 
That  is  a  question  I  am  not  going  to  touch 
upon  now,  but  when  we  make  a  subsequent 
report  no  doubt  that  will  be  brought  forward 
prominently. 

We  have  seen  the  results  of  light,  and  I 
wish  to  show  you  how  it  is  that  light  acts  upon 
matter.  Matter  is  formed  by  molecules,  or 
very  minute  particles,  far  beyond  the  vision  of 
the  best  microscope  that  was  ever  made  ;  you 
can  only  reason  and  argue  about  them  from 
the  circumstantial  evidence  which  nature  from 
time  to  time  puts  before  us.  The  molecules 
themselves  are  composed  of  atoms.  Thus, 
in  the  molecule  of  water  it  is  supposed 
there  are  two  atoms  of  hydrogen  and  one 
of  oxygen.  Each  molecule  is  presumably 
of  identical  shape,  and  size,  and  composition. 
There  has  been  a  certain  amount  of  evidence 
brought  forward  that  perhaps  some  molecules 
of  the  same  kind  of  matter  are  rather  bigger 
than  others,  but  to  my  mind  such  evidence  is 
incomplete,  and  I  cannot  accept  it.  At  any 
rate,  as  a  rule,  we  may  take  it  that  the  size  of 
the  molecule  is  the  same  for  the  same  species 
of  matter ;  that,  for  instance,  all  water  mole- 
cules are  the  same  size  and  composition,  as 
are  those  which  go  to  form  the  molecules  of 
these  pigments  we  are  considering. 

I  want  to  give  you  a  homely  notion  of  what 
a  molecule  is   like,  and  how  we  may  suppose 


the  atoms  vibrate.  I  have  here  a  little  cell  of 
water,  through  which  a  vertical  beam  of  light 
can  be  thrown,  and  again  be  deflected  to  the 
screen.  A  lens  forms  an  image  of  the  sur- 
face of  the  water  on  the  screen.  Around 
this  cell  of  water  I  can  cause  a  current 
of  electricity  to  pass  through  a  coil  of 
wire.  When  you  have  a  current  passing 
there  is  a  certain  amount  of  magnetism 
produced  which  repels  magnetism  of  the 
like  kind.  I  have  here  some  little  needles 
which  are  magnetised,  and  inserted  in  small 
bits  of  cork  by  one  end,  the  same  poles  being 
in  the  corks.  The  corks  will  float  on  the 
surface  of  the  water,  thus  supporting  the 
needles.  Now,  if  we  float  some  of  these  little 
magnets  in  the  water,  they  will  repel  each 
other  and  tend  to  go  farther  apart,  the  reason 
being  that  magnetism  of  the  same  kind  repels. 
Now  if  I  turn  on  the  current  in  the  wire 
passing  round  the  cell  you  will  see  that  they 
are  found  to  approach  one  another,  and  as  I 
move  the  wire  up  and  down,  they  alternately 
approach  to  and  recede  from  one  another. 

You  must  recollect  that  at  the  same  time  that 
these  atoms  are  vibrating  one  towards  the 
other,  the  molecules  themselves  are  vibrating 
to  and  fro  from  one  another,  so  that  we  have 
vibrations  of  the  molecule  and  vibrations 
of  the  atom.  Now  I  have  told  you  that 
the  waves  of  light  vary  in  length  ;  the  red 
waves  are  the  longest,  and  the  blue  waves 
are  the  shortest,  and  as  they  all  travel  at 
the  same  speed,  the  time  of  oscillation  of 
the  red  wave  is  longer  than  the  time  of  oscil- 
lation of  the  blue  wave.  We  may  take  it  that 
the  oscillation  of  a  molecule  is  slower  than 
that  of  an  atom,  and  it  is  much  more  likely  to 
be  isochronous  with  a  wave  of  red  light  than 
it  would  be  with  one  of  blue  light.  Similarly, 
the  waves  of  blue  light  are  much  more  likely 
to  be  isochronous  with  the  time  of  oscillation 
of  the  atoms  than  the  molecules,  and,  as  a 
matter  of  fact,  such  we  find  to  be  the  case. 

Now  let  me  give  you  another  homely  example 
of  what  we  mean  by  oscillation  on  the  part  of 
an  atom  or  a  molecule.  You  can  quite  under- 
stand, I  think,  that  if  you  have  a  body  oscil- 
lating to  and  fro  from  another  body,  both  of 
which  attract  one  another,  if  you  increase  the 
oscillation,  a  time  comes  when  the  attraction 
between  the  two  is  so  small  that  there  is  a  great 
tendency  for  them  to  fall  apart.  If  there  is 
another  body  at  hand  which  is  willing  to  take 
up  one  of  those  atoms — which  has  a  great 
affection  for  such  atom— it  will  take  hold  of  it, 
and  bring  it  to  itself.     The  bob  of  this  pen- 


22 


dulum,  which  is  of  iron,  is  supposed  to  be  an 
atom  swinging  to  and  from  another  atom,  and 
some  three  inches  behind  it  is  fixed  a  magnet. 
By  puffing  with  my  breath  at  the  same  rate  as 
the  pendulum  vibrates  I  can  increase  the  am- 
plitude of  that  oscillation  to  such  an  extent 
that,  eventually,  the  attraction  of  the  mag- 
net for  the  bob  of  the  pendulum  is  greater 
than  the  force  of  gravity,  and  it  reaches  the 
magnet  and  is  held  by  it.  This  very  simple 
experiment  teaches  us  a  lesson.  Here  we  have 
an  atom  swinging  away,  we  will  suppose,  from 
another  atom  of  something.  My  breath  timing 
itself  with  the  swing  may  be  taken  as  the  oscil- 
lation of  the  waves  of  a  ray  of  light.  The  waves 
of  light  perpetually  beating  on  the  atom  will 
increase  the  amplitude  of  swing  of  that  atom 
so  greatly  that  if  there  is  another  body  near  it 
which  will  take  up  the  atom,  it  leaves  the 
original  atom  for  it.  When  such  a  re- arrange- 
ment of  atoms  takes  place,  we  say  that  a 
chemical  action  has  taken  place,  that  is, 
that  light  is  able  to  decompose  a  molecule  by 
robbing  it  of  some  of  its  atoms,  and  giving 
them  to  another  body.  We  get,  then,  by  the 
decomposition  new  molecules  formed,  and  con- 
sequently new  matter,  and  such  a  new  body 
may  be  in  the  shape  of  a  faded  pigment. 

Throwing  a  spectrum  on  the  screen,  I  put  a 
layer  of  pigment  in  front  of  the  slit,  the  light 
passes  through  it,  and  we  get,  as  you  saw  by 
previous  experiments,  some  colour  taken  away 
from  the  white  light,  and  other  colours  left 
behind.  In  the  case  before  us  the  red  and  the 
green  and  the  blue  are  left,  but  most  of  the 
green  is  cut  off.  I  will  put  another  substance 
(permanganate  of  potash)  in  front,  which  gives 
a  beautiful  absorption  spectrum,  and  there  are 
a  number  of  dark  bands  in  it.  If  I  take  the 
iron  salt  which  I  used  in  the  experiment  in 
measuring  the  quantity  of  light  which  came  to 
galleries  of  South  Kensington,  you  see  that  it 
cuts  off  the  blue  almost  entirely.  You  can  see, 
then,  that  these  various  solutions  cut  off  a 
certain  amount  of  colour  from  the  spectrum. 
Now  the  question  is  this,  what  becomes  of  the 
rays  that  are  cut  off  ?  The  whole  principle  of 
the  chemical  action,  and  the  heating  effect 
of  light  upon  pigments,  is  answered  by  the 
answer  to  that  question.  It  is  this.  Where 
you  have  an  absorption  of  light,  there  you  have 
work  done  upon  the  body  on  which  it  falls. 
In  that  permanganate  of  potash,  for  instance, 
which  you  saw  gave  a  fine  spectrum — the 
rays  missing,  which  gave  the  black  spaces, 
were  doing  work  on  it.  They  were  heating  up 
the   permanganate  of  potash,    or   chemically 


changing  it  into  something  else.  You  cannot 
have  work  done  on  any  body  unless  there  is 
absorption  by  that  body.  You  understand 
what  I  mean  by  absorption — the  cutting  off 
tne  light  by  the  body.  When  there  is  chemical 
action  taking  place,  the  work  done  is  the 
swinging  the  atoms  away  from  each  other, 
when  heating  effect  takes  place  the  molecules 
are  swung  further  apart  from  one  another. 
I  hope  I  have  made  clear  to  you  that  my  view 
is  that  when  you  have  chemical  action 
taking  place,  the  absorption  takes  place 
in  the  atoms  ;  when  it  is  a  heating  effect 
which  takes  place,  it  is  the  molecules  which 
are  acted  upon,  and  made  to  jostle  each 
other  more  vigorously.  As  far  as  chemical 
action  is  concerned  we  have  a  very  familiar 
example  in  photography.  I  am  going  to 
develop  a  spectrum  for  you.  This  has  been 
done  before  in  this  room  by  myself,  but  as 
there  are  many  here  who  have  not  seen  the 
experiment,  I  think  it  might  be  as  well  to 
repeat  it.  [The  photograph  of  the  spectrum 
was  developed.]  The  paper  was  covered  with 
bromide  of  silver,  and  if  I  place  a  slab  of 
bromide  of  silver  in  front  of  the  slit,  you  will 
see  that  the  absorption  exactly  agrees  with 
the  locality  where  chemical  action  has  taken 
place. 

Now  I  have  another  experiment  to  show  you, 
and  that  is  the  heating  effect  of  radiation.  I 
have  here  a  little  instrument  called  a  thermo- 
pile which  consists  of  strips  of  two  metals 
soldered  together  at  one  end.  If  the  junction 
be  heated,  a  current  of  electricity  will  pass 
through  wires  attached  to  the  other  ends  when 
joined  ;  and  if  a  galvanometer  is  in  the  circuit 
the  galvanometer  needle  will  be  deflected. 
By  means  of  a  mirror  attached  to  the  needle, 
which  will  reflect  the  light  from  a  lamp  on  to  a 
scale  behind,  I  can  show  you  the  deflection. 
I  now  form  a  very  small  spectrum,  and  cause 
different  parts  of  the  spectrum  to  fall  on  the 
junction  of  the  metals.  The  needle  deflects  very 
slightly  with  the  blue,  showing  that  the  heating 
effect  is  small ;  as  it  gets  towards  the  green  and 
travels  into  the  yellow  the  deflection  is  greater, 
and  when  we  get  into  the  red  portion  itis  again 
more.  At  the  very  limit  of  the  red  the  deflec- 
tion is  greater  still,  and  outside  this  colour  and 
in  apparent  darkness  we  see  that  the  light  on  the 
scale  travels  further  still,  showing  an  increased 
heating  effect.  Thus  an  invisible  part  of  the 
spectrum  which  lies  beyond  the  red  heats  this 
junction  of  the  two  metals  more  than  any  part 
of  the  visible  spectrum.  We  have  here  a  proof 
that  not  only  the  rays  which  cause  the  sensation 


why  we  made  experiments  with  light  ///wheat. 
I  told  you  we  exposed  the  pigments  on  paper 
against  a  vessel  of  boiling  water  to  see 
whether  the  decomposition  was  accelerated. 
It  was   possible   that  these  dark  rays   might 

Fig.  i  8. 


have  heated  up  the  paper  to  such  an  extent 
that  the  heating  action  aided  chemical  decom- 
position by  the  blue  rays  which  we  found  most 
effective. 

Now  I  want  to  call  your  attention  for  a  minute 
to  this  diagram  (Fig.  18),  which  represents  the 
heating  effect  of  different  sources  of  light. 
The  height  of  the  curve  is  a  measure  of  the 
heating  effect.  The  curves  on  the  right  hand 
of  the  dotted  line  show  the  energy  of  the  dark 
rays,  whilst  on  the  left  the  heating  effect 
of  the  visible  spectrum  is  shown.  The  heating 
effect  (which  is  a  measure  of  the  energy)  of 
the  dark  rays  is  very  much  greater  than  the 
heating  effect  of  the  rays  which  lie  in  the 
visible  part  of  the  spectrum.  I  want  to  call 
attention  to  the  solar  curve  ;  you  see  what  a 
peculiar  jagged  curve  it  has.     The  jagged  in- 


in  the  visible  spectrum,  and  a  very  large  effect 
in  the  dark  part  of  the  spectrum.  The  same 
applies  to  gas-light  and  candle-light. 

In  estimating  the  chemical  action  of  radia- 
tion on  a  body,  there  are  two  factors  to  be  con- 
sidered, the  intensity  of  the  radiation  acting, 
and  the  time  during  which  it  acts.  This  is 
very  important.  Thus  if  a  certain  coloured  sur- 
face be  exposed  to  a  radiation  whose  intensity 
we  may  call  ioo,  which  bleaches  it  in  one  hour, 
then  if  a  similar  coloured  surface  be  exposed 
to  intensity  I,  it  will  require  ioo  hours'  ex- 
posure to  effect  the  same  amount  of  bleaching. 
There  is  an  idea  abroad  that  if  the  light  be 
very  feeble,  no  matter  what  length  of  exposure 
be  given,  it  will  not  affect  a  bleaching ;  this, 
however,  is  not  the  case.  The  same  propor- 
tion of  the  total  energy  absorbed  by  the  body 
which,  with  intense  radiation,  effects  chemical 
decomposition,  on  exposure  to  feeble  radia- 
tion is  doing  the  same  kind  of  work.  We 
may  say,  briefly,  that  the  deductions  from 
scientific  experiments  lead  us  to  believe  that  if 
strong  light  causes  fading,  a  feeble  light  will 
do  the  same,  if  the  exposure  to  it  be  prolonged. 
The  pendulum  experiment,  I  think,  fully  illus- 
trates what  I  mean.  I  will  give  you  a  rather 
fuller  illustration,  however.  The  amount  of 
increased  swing  that  light  can  give  to  the 
atom  means  an  increase  in  the  amplitude  of  a 
wave,  and  the  amplitude  of  a  wave  in  the  sea 
is  the  height  from  the  crest  to  the  trough.  Sup- 
pose we  have  a  heavy  church  bell  hung  without 
friction  on  its  supports,  and  without  any  resist- 
ance to  its  motion,  and  suppose  it  to  make  a 
complete  swing  once  a  second.  Suppose  also 
that  at  the  end  of  the  bell-rope  there  was  a  small 
horizontal  plate,  and  at  intervals  of  a  second 
a  thousand  grains  of  water  fell  from  a  fixed 
height  on  the  plate.  The  bell  would  gradually 
oscillate  ;  the  bell  would  be  like  this  pendulum, 
and  finally  it  would  oscillate  so  greatly  that 
the  bell  would  ring.  Now,  if  instead  of  1,000 
grains  falling  from  the  same  height,  we  had 


*J**  i  *-  i  >  j 


24 


but  one  grain  falling  every  second,  it  would 
take  1,000  times  longer  before  the  bell  rung; 
or  if  the  weight  were  i-ioooth  of  a  grain,  it 
would  take  one  million  times  as  long  before  it 
rung.  The  work  done  by  the  dropping  water 
may  be  looked  upon  as  the  work  done  by  the 
amplitude  of  the  wave  of  light  on  the  atom, 
as  it,  too,  moves  without  friction  and  without 
resistance. 

As  to  the  light  which  pigments  in  water- 
colour  drawings  are  ordinarily  exposed,  a  few 
remarks  may  be  made.  There  is  no  doubt 
that  pictures  as  a  rule  are  carefully  protected 
from  direct  sunlight,  but  it  is  nevertheless  true 
that  the  greater  portion  of  the  light  they 
receive  is  reflected  sunlight.  On  a  bright  day 
the  clouds  reflect  sunlight,  and  on  a  dull  day 

Fig.  19. 


Sun  Ugkt 

urn 

80 
80 
70 

9 

\" 

50 
40 
30 

S 

J32 

J. 

10 

1 

L- 

H 

j_ 

19    1 

<  1 

7    16    15   14    13    12    11     10     9     8      7     8      5     4     3     2    .1 

the  diffused  light  is  also  sunlight,  which  is 
reflected  according  to  the  laws  of  geometrical 
optics,  and  a  large  per-centage  reaches  the 
earth  from  the  clouds.  There  is  also  a  fair 
proportion  of  light  from  the  sky ;  this  is 
bluer  than  that  reflected  or  diffused  from  the 
weakened  sunlight.  In  cases  where  the 
windows  of  a  gallery  are  in  vertical  walls, 
which  is  the  most  ordinary  case,  and  have  an 
interrupted  view  of  the  horizon,  the  blue  light 
reflected  is  comparatively  small,  the  light 
near  the  horizon  being  distinctly  more  like 
sunlight  than  that  nearer  to  the  zenith.  In 
galleries  lighted  like  those  at  South  Kensing- 
ton the  light  comes  from  above.  The  artificial 
lights  to  which  water-colours  are  exposed  are 
gas-light,  electric  arc  and  incandescent  lights. 
The  first  and  last  are  very  deficient  in  blue 
rays  (see  Fig.  19).  You  see,  for  instance,  how 
deficient  gas-light  is  in  blue  rays  compared 
with  sunlight  or  blue  sky.  Blue  sky,  you  will 
notice,  possesses  hardly  any  red  light  what- 
ever. 

Now   I   think    you    will   see   why   we   were 
justified  in  exposing  our  pigments  to  sunlight 


instead  of  skylight.  If  you  know  the  amount 
of  blue  rays  that  are  in  any  particular  light, 
and  the  amount  of  work  such  rays  are  capable 
of  performing,  it  is  quite  fair  to  translate  the 
action  which  one  source  of  light  has  upon  a 
pigment  into  the  amount  of  effect  from  a 
different  source  of  light.  That  is  to  say,  if  I 
know  what  action  sunlight  will  have  upon  a 
pigment,  then  from  diagrams  such  as  the 
above,  we  can  calculate  the  amount  of  action 
which  skylight  will  have,  and  also  the  gas- 
light, whether  the  intensities  of  the  total  light 
are  the  same  or  different. 

It  is  now  necessary  to  explain  to  you  how  it  was 
that  we  came  to  use  three  kinds  of  glasses  for  our 
experiments  to  see  which  part  of  the  spectrum 
was  most  effective.  As  a  preliminary,  I  should 
like  to  show  you  that  a  pigment  may  be  very 
rapidly  acted  upon,  although  apparently  per- 
fectly inappreciably  to  the  eye.  I  have  here 
two  transparent  films  which  were  treated  with 
two  dyes.  Those  two  films  were  exposed  behind 
a  transparent  cross  to  the  electric  light  for  ten 
seconds,  and  were  then  floated  over  with  a  silver 
salt  and  a  developer.  From  previous  experi- 
ments we  knew  that  where  these  particular  dyes 
had  been  acted  upon  by  light  there  silver  would 
be  deposited  on  them,  and  I  think  you  will 
see  that  these  two  show  that  such  is  the 
case.  The  first  film  was  dyed  blue  origin- 
ally, and  you  will  see  where  the  light  has 
acted  the  silver  has  deposited  upon  it.  Here 
is  another  film,  originally  red,  on  which  the 
same  thing  occurs.  I  want  you  to  lay  this 
thing  to  heart.  Do  not  think  that  because  an 
object  does  not  visibly  fade  in  a  year  that, 
therefore,  it  has  not  begun  to  fade  at  all.  A 
year  to  one  pigment  may  be  the  same  as  30 
seconds  to  another  pigment,  and  if  you  expose 
pigments  for  a  year,  which  will  only  fade  as 
much  as  that  particular  pigment  faded  in  30 
seconds,  then,  applying  this  silver  salt,  you 
will  probably  get  exactly  the  same  action  after 
a  year's  exposure  as  you  did  with  that  shorter 
exposure  on  the  more  fugitive  colour. 

One  more  experiment.  Here  I  have  a  piece 
of  paper  which  has  been  impregnated  with  a 
silver  salt,  and  has  also  been  dyed  with  a 
colour.  I  want  to  show  you  that  the  smallest 
action  of  light  on  this  particular  colour  will 
cause  the  reduction  of  silver  salt.  I  am  going 
to  expose  the  paper  to  the  spectrum  for  10 
seconds.  [The  paper  here  was  developed.] 
You  see  in  this  case  that  we  have  a  black  band 
corresponding  to  the  absorption  spectrum  of 
the  dye  with  which  it  was  dyed.  This  band  is 
absent  where  the  silver  alone  without  the  dye 


*s 


is  acted  upon.  The  dye  has  been  acted  upon, 
and  thus  caused  a  reduction  of  silver  to  take 
place  where  it  has  been  altered,  although  such 
alteration  is  perfectly  invisible  to  the  eye. 

Now  I  can  show  you  why  we  chose  red, 
blue,  and  green  glasses  for  our  experiments. 
I  want  you  to  notice  the  different  parts  of  the 
spectrum  that  these  particular  glasses  absorb. 
Passing  the  glasses  through  the  spectrum,  the 
red  glass  allows  the  red,  and  a  little  bit  of 
yellow  and  green,  to  pass  (see  Fig.  20).  With 
the  green  glass  a  great  deal  of  the  red  is  cut  off, 
and  all  of  the  violet.  With  the  blue  glass  you 
will  see  that  a  great  deal  of  the  red  is  cut  off. 
Thus,  in  the  case  of  the  blue  glass,  we  have 
the  blue  principally  left,  in  the  case  of  the 
green  the  green  principally  left,  and  in  the  case 
of  the  red  glass  we  have  the  red  principally  left. 
Now,  suppose  I  put  the  red  glass  and  the  blue 
glass  together,  what  would  happen  ?  We  only 
ought  to  have  a  bit  of  the  red  of  the  spectrum 
left,  and  if  I  put  the  green  glass  with  these 

Fig.  20. 


1 

OU 

1 

40 

1 

1 1 

!  llpkt 

-;q 

ru 

'J" 

rt 

'1. 

>'fv 

itnjin 

1J 

& 

30 

'& 

"v. 

Y 

20 

.C; 

•*/ 

's 

\ 

,-r 

'> 

^y_' 

s_ 

i*S 

f. 

<fe.       1 

as 

r4 

z 

1 

a  i 

7  1 

,   i 

i,  1 

*    1 

3  ; 

e  ' 

1  1 

j    1 

' 

!     < 

'     ' 

1 

1 

' 

I 

o  <B  E  =  S  V 

s  «      2     J 

we  ought  to  have  nothing  left,  which  is  the 
case.  In  other  words,  the  rays  transmitted  by 
those  three  glasses  make  up  the  whole  spec- 
trum, so  that  when  using  those  we  are  utilising 
the  rays  of  every  part  of  the  visible  spec- 
trum. It  was  for  this  reason  we  choose  those 
particular  glasses  through  which  to  expose 
our  pigments.  Fig.  21  shows  the  heating 
effect  of  the  light  after  passing  through  the 
different  glasses.  Notice  the  dark  rays. 
They  are  nearly  entirely  transmitted  through 
the  red  glass,  very  slightly  through  the  blue 
and  green  glasses.  Had  the  fading  of  the 
colours  we  have  examined  been  due  to  the 
dark  rays,  it  ought  to  have  been  shown  beneath 
the  red  glass  far  more  than  under  the  green  or 
the  blue  glass.  This  was  not  the  case,  as  a 
reference  to  Table  IV.  will  show.  We  may, 
therefore  say  that  the  blue,  violet,  and  ultra 
violet  rays  are  those  which  are  by  far  the  most 


active  in  producing  a  change  in  the  pigments 
with  which  we  have  experimented. 

I  may  say  a  word  or  two  about  the  exposures 
we  gave,  and  the  results  deduced.  We  ex- 
posed between  May,  1886,  and  the  middle  of 
August,  and  we  found  that  during  that  time 
these  pigments  had  705  hours  of  bright  sun- 
shine. That  bright  sunshine  we  reduced  to  so 
much  sky  light,  and  the  total  amount  of 
effective  sky  light  received  in  that  time  was 
1,700  hours.  Allowing  for  overcast  skies,  and 
for  blue  sky  light  and  sun  light,  we  find  that 
these  pigments  had  an  average  of  2,225  hours 
of  average  of  blue  sky — or,  roughly  speaking, 
2,500.  We  may  now  go  a  step  further,  and 
calculate  the  amount  of  illumination  which  a 


Fig. 

21. 

7t 

?! 

W 

./ 

.53 

-57    0 

*7  >? 

i0/ 

*7# 

/  a 

iM, 

y  . 

M 

a 

' 

/ 

-A 

>- 

-■  • 

to 

~ 1 

V 

G 

jf_ 

t 

':■ 

'"/ 

%'J 

V 

, 

picture  shown  in  a  gallery  such  as  those  at 
South  Kensington  would  have  during  the 
same  period.  There  is  no  direct  sunlight, 
and  making  calculations  from  photometric 
observations,  and  seeing  how  much  light 
came  into  the  gallery,  compared  with  that 
outside,  we  came  to  the  conclusion  that  to 
have  the  effect  on  these  pigments  in  the 
galleries  which  took  place  in  the  sunlight,  32 
years  would  have  to  elapse,  supposing  the 
light  was  always  equally  bright  to  that  between 
May  and  August.  But  we  know  it  is  not 
equally  bright,  and  we  came  to  the  conclusion 
that  it  would  take  100  years  to  get  the  very 
little  fading  such  as  we  got  outside  the  labora- 
tory in  four  months. 

Now  let  us  see  what  would  happen  to  a  pig- 
ment supposing  it  were  exposed  to  gas  light. 
Calculating  the  amount  of  blue  light  in  such 
light,  and  also  the  total  illumination  in  the 


2  6 


gallery  in  question,  we  found  it  would  require 
at  least  2,000  years  of  continuous  exposure  for 
the  same  amount  of  effect  to  take  place  as  oc- 
curred in  the  four  months  of  sunlight  exposure. 
After  an  exposure  of  one  year  and  nine  months, 
we  have  the  astonishing  result  that  to  obtain 
fading  of  the  same  amount  in  the  colours  ex- 
posed, it  would  have  taken  485  years  of  average 
daylight  in  the  galleries  to  have  got  that 
amount  of  bleaching.  If  we  had  exposed  it 
continuously  to  gas  light,  the  time  required  is 
almost  incredible  to  believe,  viz.,  9,600  years. 
With  these  facts  before  us  I  think  you  will  say 
it  is  not  at  all  surprising  that  we  chose  to 
use  sunlight  instead  of  any  other  source  of 
light  for  our  experiments.  I  am  afraid  that 
neither    Dr.    Russell   nor   myself   are    good 


for  480  years,  and  therefore  we  preferred  to 
use  the  shorter  time  of  one  year  and  nine 
months  in  order  to  arrive  at  the  conclusions 
we  did. 

The  methods  of  measurement  that  I  have 
brought  before  you  are  for  the  most  part 
new,  but  I  believe  they  can  escape  any  very 
serious  criticism.  The  details  of  many  of  the 
experiments,  from  which  our  calculations  have 
been  derived,  have  been  published  in  various 
papers  laid  before  the  Royal  Society  and 
the  Physical  Society.  I  may  say  we  have 
the  greatest  reliance  on  the  accuracy  of 
them. 

I  have  now  finished  my  course  of  lectures, 
and  I  have  only  to  thank  you  for  the  great 
attention  which  you  have  paid  to  me. 


PRINTED   BY    W.   TROUNCE,    10,   GOUGH-SQUARE,    FLEET-STREET,   LONDON,   E.C 


SOCIETY    FOR    THE    ENCOURAGEMENT    OF    ARTS,  MANUFACTURES, 

AND  COMMERCE, 


CANTOR       LECTURES 


PHOTOMETRY. 


CAPTAIN      W.      DE     W.     A  B  N  E  Y, 

C.  B.,      F.  R.  S. 


Delivered  before  the  Society,  Afiril  2nd,  qth,  and  \btk,  1894- 


LONDON : 
PRINTED  BY  WM.  TROUNCE,    10,    GOUGH-SQUARE,    FLEET-STREET,   LONDON,   E.C. 


PHOTOMETRY. 


Lecture  I. — Delivered  April  3,  1894. 


The  lectures  on  photometry  are  not  given 
with  the  idea  that  they  will  be  of  practical 
value  for  the  measurement  of  gas  light.  There 
is  excellent  literature  on  the  subject,  part  of 
which  I  shall  have  to  refer  to  during  my 
course.  What  I  have  undertaken  in  these 
lectures  is  to  endeavour  to  give  an  idea  of 
the  general  principles  of  photometry,  almost 
restricting  myself  to  the  scientific  aspect  of 
the  question.  Photometry,  in  its  broadest 
sense,  is  the  measurement  of  light,  at  least, 
so  we  must  think,  from  its  derivation.  Now, 
the  light  measured  may  be  light  coming  from 
an  object,  or  from  a  self-luminous  body,  such 
as  a  candle  or  the  sun,  or  it  may  be  the  light 
transmitted  through  objects.  In  the  second 
case,  if  an  appropriate  screen  be  used  to 
receive  the  light,  we  are  in  reality  measur- 
ing the  illuminating  power  of  the  source  of 
light,  rather  than  of  the  light  itself.  Hence, 
almost  as  much  depends  upon  the  screen  on 
which  the  light  is  received  as  on  the  light 
itself.  A  screen  is  usually  what  is  called 
white,  and  by  white  is  meant  a  screen  wrhich 
reflects  every  colour  equally  well ;  but,  I  would 
remark  that  in  London  the  white  may  become 
imperceptibly  brown,  and  such  colour  may 
interfere  materially  with  accurate  results. 
But  the  photometry  that  I  am  alluding  to 
not  only  includes  the  measurement  of  the 
illuminating  power  of  light,  but  the  measure- 
ment of  the  light  transmitted  through  bodies 
of  various  kinds,  when  they  are  transparent, 
like  plain  glass,  or  translucent,  like  ground 
glass  or  paper.  The  requirements  of  the 
candle-power  of  gas  I  shall  not  enter  into, 
as  it  is  a  subject  which  others  than  myself  are 
much  better  fitted  to  deal  with. 

We  may  take  it,  I  think,  that  the  first 
matter  we  have  to  consider  is  the  light  we 
have  to  use  as  a  standard.  Parliament,  in  its 
wisdom,  in  i860,  pronounced  its  standard  of 
light  to  be  the  light  of  a  candle  6  candles  to 
the  pound,  each  burning  120  grains  of  sperm 


per  hour,  and  this  is  at  present  the  only  legal 
standard  known  in  England,  though  why,  in 
the  name  of  common  sense,  such  a  definition 
has  been  continued  our  legislators  alone  can 
guess,  when  it  has  been  proved  to  be  so 
faulty.  The  standard  of  light  for  France  is 
the  Carcel  lamp,  which  is  equal  to  about 
0/5  candles.  Now,  a  light  from  a  candle 
is  a  very  pretty  thing  theoretically,  but 
practically  it  is  anything  but  practical,  as 
it  has  the  unhappy  knack  of  burning  inaccu- 
rately, particularly  when  one  is  anxious  to 
shield  it  from  draughts.  Heat  affects  the 
rapidity  of  combustion,  and  if  it  be  confined, 
and  no  proper  access  of  air  be  given  it, 
its  light  may  be  most  irregular.  We  have  to 
remember  that  part  of  the  energy  of  combustion 
is  taken  up  by  melting  the  sperm,  or  wax,  or 
whatever  it  may  be,  and  if  the  surrounding  air 
be  heated  the  wax  is  at  a  temperature  nearer 
its  melting  point  than  it  should  be  when  at  a 
normal  temperature.  When  the  melting  point 
is  attained  the  liquid  is  decomposed  and  the 
flame  results,  and  there  is  more  liquid  to  be 
vapourised  and  vapour  to  be  improperly  con- 
sumed than  in  the  normal  state. 

I  show  you  a  trace  made  by  photography  of 
the  light  from  a  candle  burning  under  normal 
conditions.  The  light  was  admitted  through 
a  slit  to  sensitive  paper,  and  a  fresh  portion 
of  paper  was  continually  being  exposed.  You 
will  now  see  the  irregularity  of  the  burning. 
Of  course,  by  taking  several  candles  the  varia- 
tion is  not  so  great,  but  even  then  you  have 
to  be  sure  that  the  proximity  of  the  candles 
to  one  another  does  not  alter  the  rate  of 
burning. 

An  Argand  burner,  however  small,  will  not, 
during  a  long  series  of  experiments,  differ 
1  per  cent,  in  light  value.  Here  we  have  a 
proof  of  this.  This  small  paraffin  lamp  was 
allowed  to  burn  for  three  hours,  and  you  will 
see  that  the  band  it  makes  is  perfectly  uniform 
in  appearance,  and  when  the  measurement  is 


made  of  the  blackness  produced  by  it  on  the 
photographic  paper,  it  proves  my  statement  is 
correct. 

The  apparatus  by  which  these  diagrams 
were  made  is  a  very  simple  one.  It  consists 
of  a  clockwork  arrangement  drawing  a  pulley, 
which  pulley  is  in  connection  with  a  drum, 
which  can  rotate  on  its  axis.  Round  this 
drum  is  placed  sensitive  paper,  and  a  box, 
with  a  long'  slit  in  it,  covers  the  drum.  The 
light  is  placed  opposite  the  slit,  which  is 
covered  by  a  moveable  lathe,  in  which  is  an 
aperture  of  a  convenient  width.  As  the  drum 
moves,  this  aperture  moves  across  the  slit, 
and  so  we  have  a  corkscrew  band  of  exposure 
produced.  With  some  clockwork  the  motion 
is  regular  in  its  irregularity,  and  every  tooth 
of  the  train  can  be  counted  on  it,  by  noting 
the  bands  of  varying  exposure,  and  for  this 
reason  the  clock  was  at  one  time  abandoned, 
and  the  smooth  motion  of  the  sinking  of  the 
height  in  subsiding  water  was  substituted. 
This  gave  very  good  results,  but  for  my  pur- 
pose the  clockwork  was  sufficient. 

The  sources  of  light  1  have  mentioned  are 
what  may  be  called  feeble  sources  of  light, 
and  cannot  be  used  when  a  body  is  fairly 
absorptive,  if  the  transmitted  light  is  to  be 
measured.  We  want  in  such  a  case  a 
stronger  source  of  light,  and  one  which  is 
practically  constant.  Such  a  source  of  light 
we  have  in  the  electric  arc  light.  If  we 
project  upon  the  screen  an  image  of  the  points 
where  the  positive  pole  is  slightly  behind  the 
negative  pole,  with  a  fairly  long  arc,  we 
become  aware  that  there  is  a  central  part, 
which  is  higher  than  any  other  [shown].  It 
comes  from  a  depression  in  the  positive  pole, 
and  for  the  last  eight  years  I  have  been  in  the 
habit  of  using  this  as  a  source  of  light  of  uni- 
form intensity,  and  many  hundreds  of  measures 
have  proved  it  to  be  so.  This,  as  several  years 
ago  I  pointed  out,  was  due  to  the  fact  that  the 
temperature  of  this  spot  was  that  of  the 
volatilisation  of  carbon.  It  is  an  intense 
light,  and  may  be  taken  as  50,000  A.L.  per 
inch  of  surface,  and  very  useful  for  a  great 
many  purposes,  as  we  shall  see  as  we  proceed. 
Now  we  call  all  these  lights  which  I  have  men- 
tioned white,  but  it  is  quite  evident  that  there 
is  white  and  white  if  all  these  be  white.  I 
believe  myself  that  Mr.  Lovibond's  definition 
of  white  is  a  good  one,  which  is  the  light  which 
is  seen  in  a  white  fog  about  midday,  and  if  we 
compare  this  light  with  any  other  we  shall,  I 
think,  comeback  to  it  as  being  a  very  practical 
white  light.     Now  the  electric  light  is  not  far 


from  this  quality  of  light,  and  as  such  is  very 
useful  in  comparing  the  transparency  of  objects 
by  what  is  approximately  daylight.  We  can 
measure  the  light  of  each  part  of  the  crater 
passing  through  a  small  hole. 

We  can  at  once  see  the  difference  between 
all  the  ordinary  lights  by  a  simple  experiment. 
This  box  is  divided  into  partitions  with  tissue 
in  front,  and  in  each  partition  we  have  a 
different  source  of  light  —  a  partial  gas  jet, 
an  Argand  gas  -  burner,  a  candle,  and  a 
paraffin  lamp.  It  will  be  noticed  that  the 
light  enclosed  in  a  chimney  is  much  whiter 
than  those  burned  in  free  air,  but  you  will 
also  see  that  all  these  lights  have  various 
depths  of  yellowness  when  compared  with 
the  electric  light.  It  is  quite  evident  that 
even  supposing  they  gave  the  same  illumina- 
tion, that  they  are  not  all  fit  for  standard 
lights.  I  take  it  that  a  standard  light  in 
photometry  must  always  have  the  same  quality 
of  light  as  well  as  the  same  quantity  of  light. 
Now  we  can,  by  appropriate  means,  make  the 
electric  glow-lamp  light  of  the  same  visual 
intervals  as  a  gas  jet.  The  one  before  us  is  so, 
but  it  is  evidently  not  of  the  same  quality.  One 
of  the  very  best  tests  that  we  can  make  of 
ascertaining  whether  any  difference  in  quality 
exists  is  to  see  if,  when  they  are  equally  strong' 
visually,  they  give  the  same  photographic 
results.  [An  experiment  was  made  with  an 
electric  light  and  an  amyl  acetate  lamp,  in 
which  both  were  made  of  the  same  visual 
intensity,  but  photographically  they  differed 
materially.]  You  see  that  the  amyl  acetate 
lamp  is  decidedly  the  worse  photographically. 

Perhaps  I  can  show  you  why  this  is.  I  take 
an  incandescent  lamp,  and  cause  it  to  glow  : 
it  goes  red,  to  begin  with  ;  then  I  increase  the 
current,  it  gets  yellow,  then  whiter,  and  so 
on,  till  it  is  nearly  white.  1  cannot  make  it  as 
white  as  the  arc  light,  for  the  reason  that,  as 
the  temperature  increases,  the  fusing  point  of 
carbon  is  reached,  and  that,  as  I  pointed  out, 
is  the  temperature  of  the  crater  of  the  arc 
light.  These  temperatures,  however,  are  sub- 
ject to  different  amounts  of  energy  expended 
upon  them  ;  and  here  I  have  a  diagram,  show- 
ing how,  with  an  increased  energy  expenditure 
on  the  same  filament — that  is,  with  an  in- 
creased temperature — the  different  rays  of  the 
spectrum  are  altered  in  proportion.  These 
diagrams  are  taken  from  measures  made 
with  a  linear  thermopile,  moved  through  the 
spectrum.  You  will  see  that  the  higher  the 
temperature,  much  more  rapidly  do  the  rays 
of  high  refrangibility  increase. 


60 


Iff     -    Vfk 

TKHnIt 

=Jm'l)>lv. 

125  .. 

..  5,900 

13  •• 

..  14.650 

5 

..  7.250 

17  .. 

..  20,750 

9 

..  9,900 

21 

..  27,500 

These  numbers  apply  to  both  diagrams,  and 
in  Fig.  2  the  numbers  attached  to  the  different 
curves,  are  those  which  are  attached  to  the 
abscissa?  in  Fig.  1 . 

Let  me  show  an  experiment.  I  will  balance 
an  electric  light  against  the  amyl  acetate 
lamp,  and  expose  a  piece  of  paper  to  its 
action.  I  will  increase  the  temperature  and 
balance  again,  and  expose  another  portion  of 
the  same  paper  to  its  influence  for  the  same 
time.  Notice,  please,  the  difference  in  the 
two.  You  will  find  that  the  highest  tempera- 
ture filament  is  much  more  "photographic." 
By  this  means  all  lights,  which  are  due  to  the 
incandescence  of  solid  particles  of  carbon,  can 
be  tested  as  to  quality.  Make  them  visually 
equal,  and  then  see  if  they  are  photographi- 
cally equal.  For  my  own  part,  I  believe  that 
a  knowledge  of  the  photographic  value  of  light 
is  essential  in  the  near  future  ;  for  I  cannot 
help  thinking  that  there  will  have  to  be  a 
registration  of  photometric  values  for  record, 
independent  of  the  eye,  and  this  must  be  by 
photography. 

For  this  purpose  the  photographic  value, 
and  the  visual  value  of  every  light  used,  will 
have  to  be  known  and  carefully  recorded.  We 
shall    see    soon   how   these   records    can    be 


s 

> 

j/A 

A*/ 

& 

y 

Wjl 

s\k 

W 

,( 

V>    .3 

\Q, 

I2J 

17, 

' 

, 

'V 

£*& 

6^- 

s£ 

?n 

a 

. 

-* 

if"    1    — 

O  I  2  3  4  5  6  7  8  9  10  1,1  I?  13  14  15  16  17  18  19  20  21  22  23  24 

turns  of  screw 

Fig.  i. 

The  value  of  the  abscissa;  in  Fig.  i  (in  wave 
lengths)  is  as  follows  : — 


10     20     30     40     50     SO     70     80     00    100    110    120    130  140  150 


THE  NUMBERS 


Fig.  2. 


utilised,  and  become  of  permanent  value  in 
themselves,  being  capable  of  being  measured 
at  any  date  after  being  made,  and  re- 
measured  if  required.  I  throw  on  the  screen 
the  photographic  values  of  a  candle,  an 
amyl  acetate  lamp,  a  gas  jet,  a  paraffin  lamp, 
and  an  arc  light — all  made  of  the  same  value 
as  a  candle  visually  [shown].  You  will  see 
that  they  vary  enormously,  and  the  scale  of 
opacity  below,  which  was  made  by  exposing 
different  parts  of  a  plate  to  a  steady  light  for 
different  times,  gives  us  a  means  of  comparing 
one  with  the  other. 

I  have  said  that  all  lights  which  are  due  to 
solid  particles  of  incandescent  carbon  can  be 
tested  by  means  of  photography,  and  I  have 
shown  you  the  deposits  which  certain  lights 
cause  on  a  photographic  plate.  There  can 
now  be  but  little  doubt  that  a  luminous  candle 
flame  is  as  much  due  to  solid  incandescent 
particles  as  the  glow-lamp  we  have  been  using. 
The  final  proof  has  been  long  in  abeyance, 
but  1  think  no  doubt  now  can  exist  regarding 
it.  First  of  all,  if  we  examine  the  spectrum  of 
the  luminous  part  of  the  flame,  we  find  that  it 
is  continuous,  though  occasionally  a  bright 
line  of  sodium  in  the  orange  puts  in  an  appear- 
ance, but  it  is  of  no  account.  Now  any  light 
which  emits  a  continuous  spectrum  must  be 
due  to  a  solid  or  liquid  body  in  a  state  of  in- 
candescence, or  to  a  gas  in  similar  state,  but 
nndir  great  pressure.  The  flame  is  certainly 
not  liquid,  nor  is  it  gaseous  under  pressure. 
It  seems,  therefore,  the  light  must  be  due 
to  solids,  and  those  solids  must  be  so  small 


that  even  a  microscope  of  low  power  will 
fail  to  distinguish  them.  This  fact  (if  it  be  a 
fact)  enables  us  to  put  the  matter  to  a  good 
test.  If  we  project  a  beam  of  light  against  a 
cloud  of  small  particles,  the  rays  which  are 
most  refracted  (the  violet  and  the  blue)  are 
violently  scattered  in  all  directions,  as  Lord 
Rayleigh  has  shown  should  be  the  case 
theoretically,  and  the  greater  the  number  the 
more  yellow  is  the  light  coming  through  them. 
There  is  one  peculiarity,  however,  about  these 
scattered  rays,  viz.,  that  those  which  are  scat- 
tered at  right  angles  to  the  beam  are  what  are 
termed  polarised  in  one  direction — that  is,  that 
if  they  pass  through  a  Nicol's  prism  turned  in 
one  direction,  they  become  quenched,  whilst 
they  will  pass  through  readily  if  the  Nicol  be 
turned  in  the  direction  at  right  angles.  You 
will  see  what  I  mean  by  the  scattering  by  an 
experiment  which  I  now  make. 


Fig.  3. 

If  to  this  clear  solution  of  hyposulphite  I 
add  a  few  drops  of  hydrochloric  acid,  it 
becomes  cloudy,  owing  to  precipitation  of 
fine  particles  of  sulphur.  I  allow  a  beam 
of  light  to  pass  through  the  solution  before 
I  make  the  addition  to  the  screen,  and  then 
add  the  HC1.  The  light  becomes  yellowish 
and  then  reddish,  as  the  number  of  fine 
particles  increase ;  that  is,  the  more  par- 
ticles the  redder  it  becomes,  and  the  more 
light  is  scattered,  as  a  look  at  the  cell 
testifies. 

By  precipitating  mastic  in  water  we  get  the 
same  results.  Here  is  some  which  has  stood 
two  years  or  more,  and  while  it  is  turbid  the 
beam  of  light  passes  freely  through  it,  but 
scatters  light  on  each  side.  Now,  if  I  pass 
that  broad  beam  of  light  first  through  a  Nicol's 
prism,  turned  in  one  direction,  and  then  through 


the  solution,  the  path  of  the  beam  is  clearly 
visible,  but  if  I  turned  it  in  a  direction  at 
right  angles  it  is  at  once  quenched.  Its  ex- 
istence, in  the  first  case,  and  its  absence,  in 
the  second,  shows  that  the  light,  coming  at 
right  angles  to  the  beam,  is  polarised.  This 
you  can  see  for  yourselves,  at  least  most  of 
you  who  sit  in  the  proper  direction  ;  but  for 
the  sake  of  those  who  do  not  I  take  two  photo- 
graphs, one  with  the  Nicol  turned,  so  that 
the  polarised  light  passed,  and  the  other  when 
it  was  turned,  so  as  to  present  the  beam.  You 
see  the  result. 

Now  let  us  apply  this  to  the  small  carbon 
particles.  If  a  beam  of  intense  light,  such  as 
that  coming  from  a  small  image  of  the  sun,  be 
thrown  on  the  flame  of  a  candle,  a  white  beam 
of  sunlight  should  be  seen  on  the  flame,  and  a 
beam  of  white  "light  passing  through  the 
flame.     Unfortunately,  I  have  not  the  sun  at 


Fjg.  4. 

my  command  here  to-night,  so  I  cannot  show 
it,  but  you  may  take  my  word  for  it  that  such 
is  so.  Sir  G.  Stokes  examined  this  white  beam 
in  a  position  at  right  angles  to  its  direction, 
and  found,  by  means  of  a  Nicol's  prism,  that 
it  was  completely  polarised ;  that  is,  that 
when  the  Nicol  was  turned  in  one  direction, 
the  streak  of  white  light  in  the  flame  dis- 
appeared altogether.  This  establishes  the 
fact  that  the  luminous  part  of  the  flame  is  due 
to  small  particles,  independently  of  any  other 
proof.  It  appears  to  me,  therefore,  that  one 
is  correct  in  stating  that  the  bright  flames  are 
due  to  measurement  carbon.  Into  the  theory 
of  flames  I  will  not  further  enter  at  the  present 
time  ;  this  is  enough  for  my  purpose. 

In  case  there  be  any  doubt  amongst  you,  I 
will  show  you  some  photographs  of  the  pheno- 
mena I  have  taken. 


Fig.  5  is  a  photograph  of  an  Argand  gas- 
fiame,  on  which  the  rays  of  the  sun,  collected 
by  a  lens  of  about  8-inch  focus,  were  concen- 
trated so  as  to  pass  along  part  of  the  circum- 
ference of  the  cylinder.  The  Xicol  prism  was 
turned  in  such  a  direction  that  the  scattered 
rays    would    be    unaffected   in   the   left-hand 


Fig.  5. 

photograph,  whilst  it  was  turned  at  right 
angles  to  the  first  direction  for  the  right- 
hand  photograph.  In  the  left-hand  figure  the 
track  of  the  beam  is  readily  seen,  whereas  any 
trace  of  it  is  absent  in  the  right-hand  figure. 
Fig.  6  is  the  same,  but  the  electric  arc  light 
was  used  in  place  of  the  sun.  The  results  are 
the  same. 


Fig.  6. 

Fig.  7  shows  the  results  when  the  beam  from 
the  electric  light  is  passed  through  a  candle 
flame.  In  the  one  figure  a  broadish  white 
band  is  seen,  whilst  in  the  other  it  is  absent. 

We  are  now  in  a  position  to  see  why  it  is 
some  flames  are  whiter  than  others.  When  a 
chimney  is  used  with  gas,  for  instance,  we 
find  that  the  illumination  is  whiter — bluer,  if 


you  like  the  word  better.  The  function  of  a 
chimney  is  to  supply  air  to  the  flame,  ample 
room  being  found  through  interstices  to  allow 
as  much  air  as  is  needed  to  be  drawn  up  into 
the  chimney.  In  the  case  of  hollow  flames, 
such  as  an  Argand  burner,  not  only  is  the 
air  admitted  to  the  outside  shell  of  the  flame, 
but  also  to  the  inside.  The  consequence  is 
that  the  small  particles  of  carbon  are  heated 
to  a  higher  temperature,  as  they  are  in  the 
blacksmith's  forge  by  the  bellows,  and  they 
then  emit  a  whiter  heat  before  they  are  con- 
verted into  carbonic  acid.  When  one  has  a 
smoky  lamp,  there  is  one  of  two  things  hap- 
pening— either  the  supply  of  air  is  insufficient 
to  the  chimney,  or  else  the  flame  is  too  high 
and  the  sudden  access  of  cold  air  chills  down 
the  incandescent  carbon  particles  till  they 
become  black,  and  smoke  results.     One  of  the 


Fig.  7. 

most  instructive  experiments  as  to  the  need  of 
air  and  warmed  air  to  a  flame  is  shown  by 
lighting  a  paraffin  lamp.  It  is  an  orange 
smoky  flame,  but  directly  you  place  the 
chimney  on  it  the  light  whitens  and  the  smoke 
ceases. 

I  should  here  like  to  correct  a  very  common 
notion  which  exists  regarding  the  blackening 
of  ci  ilings  by  gas  flames.  As  a  matter  of 
fact,  the  carbon  in  a  gas  flame  ordinarily  is 
totally  converted  into  carbonic  acid.  It  is  the 
ascending  current  of  heated  air  that  catches  up 
the  floating  motes  in  the  room  and  dashes 
them  against  the  ceiling,  to  which  some  cling 
tenaciously,  and  gradually  the  blackening  is 
encountered.  A  friend  of  mine  lately  put  up 
the  electric  light  in  his  house,  and  placed  the 
glow-lamps  close  to  his  ceiling.  He  was 
astonished  to  find  that  the  ceiling  above  them 
blackened  to  an  extent  which  reminded  him  of 
gas.     It  was  the  current  of  warm  air  which 


caused  the  blackening.  Similarly,  hot-water 
pipes  will  do  exactly  the  same  thing.  Heated 
air  will  ascend,  and  when  it  ascends  it  carries 
the  motes  and  particles  with  them.     In  South 


Kensington  Museum,  ceilings  which  adjoin  hot- 
water  pipes  blacken  quicker  than  where  there 
is  gas,  the  reason  being  that  the  volume  of 
heated  air  is  so  large. 


Lecture  II. — Delivered  April  9,  zSgj. 


I  omitted,  from  want  of  space,  to  say  in  my 
last  lecture  that  the  fact  that  a  flame  viewed 
end  on  is  from  10  to  35  per  cent,  less  luminous 
than  when  viewed  sideways.  Fig.  8  gives  a 
measurement  if  taken  with  a  flame  at  different 
angles  to  the  screen  according  to  Mr.  Dibdin. 
The  variations  in  the  light  of  a  burning  candle 


Edge  to  Bar. 


■jog  0}  oOpj 
Fig.  8. 

has  been  shown  you,  and  I  think  that  for 
scientific  working  it  must  be  dismissed  as  un- 
worthy of  serious  consideration.  There  are 
only  three  what  I  may  call  feeble  light 
standards  which  I  shall  refer  to,  viz.,  the 
amylacetate  lamp,  due  to  Hefner  Alteneck  ; 
the  pentane  illuminant,   and  the   ether  illu- 


minant.  I  put  the  amylacetate  lamp  first 
not  because  of  its  superiority,  but  because  it 
requires  such  little  manipulation.  This  is  a 
lamp  which  is  a  great  favourite  of  mine 
because  it  is  so  accordant  in  its  results.  It 
consists  of  a  tube  of  German  silver,  8  mm.  in 
diameter,  and  25  mm.  high.  The  flame  is  40 
millimetres  hisfh,  and  when  it  has  been  burnt 


Fig.  9. 

for  five  minutes  the  flame  remains  of  a  con- 
stant height.  It  burns  amylacetate,  but  it  is 
not  necessary  to  use  this  compound,  as  any 
similar  one  will  consume  as  well.  Hefner 
Alteneck  gives  a  Table  of  the  results  of  the 
different  compounds  and  their  comparative 
luminosities  : — 


Constitution. 


Per  cent, 
of 

Boiling 

carbon. 

point. 

69-7 

c. 

1 

646 

62-1 

[22= 

1  :i 

Il6 

980 

Intensity 
of  light. 


Time  for  the 
combustion  of  1 

gramme  of 
the  substance 


Carbon 

consumed 
in  100 

.    1  ■ 


Valerate  of  Amy] C,0  H20  0a 

Acetate  of  Am)  1   '  C,     H,,  (>. 

Foimiate  of  Amyl C„     H1£  O., 

Acetate  of  Isobutyl C0     H,  „  02 

Formiate  of  Isobutyl    C .,     H10  0„ 


I -03 

TOO 

roi 
099 
097 


430 

372 
373 
355 


0-I()2 

o-i  66 
0-163 
0-163 
0-166 


The  drawback  to  this  lamp,  as  originally 
constructed,  is  that  the  metal  takes  a  green 
deposit,  which  is  tiresome  ;  if  it  be  plated 
with  silver,  this  disappears. 

Dibdin's  pentane  Argand,  which  burns  pen- 
tane,  is  the  next  one  to  refer  to,  and  is 
the  lamp  which  appears  to  me  most  per- 
fectly to  utilise  the  pentane,  employed  as  an 
illuminant,  in  a  simple  method.  Pentane  is 
a  hydrocarbon  of  the  paraffin  series,  but  is  not 
perfectly  pure  at  all  times.  The  illuminant  is 
air  passed  over  a  carburetter  containing  the 
pentane.  The  height  of  the  flame  is  3  inches, 
-fVths  of  which  are  cut  off  by  a  screen  at  the 
top.  By  these  means  a  standard  flame  is 
obtained,  which  is  equal  to  10  candles.  The 
great  point  in  this  is  that  the  height  of  the 
flame  does  not  affect  the  result,  at  least  it 
does  not  to  the  eye.  Temperature  has  no  effect 
on  the  result,  as  Mr.  Dibdin  has  thoroughly 
tried. 

The  next  standard  is  a  very  simple  one, 
introduced  by  Mr.  Dibdin  more  especially 
for  photographic  purposes  ;  ether,  instead  of 
pentane,  is  burnt  in  a  pentane  lamp,  and  gives 
a  very  fine  light.  Photographs  taken  with 
hese  two  lights  at  different  heights  of  flame, 
but  of  the  same  visual  intensity,  do  not  give 
quite  the  same  photographic  effect,  so  that 
there  is  a  deviation  from  the  definition  of  per- 
fect standard. 

We  have  seen  what  kind  of  a  light  we  must 
use  for  photometry  as  to  quality  and  quantity. 
Now  we  come  to  photometers.  The  photo- 
metry we  will  first  consider  is  the  comparison 
of  two  lights  together.  How  are  we  to  com- 
pare two  lights  ?  There  is  one  evident  way, 
and  that  is  to  place  side  by  side  two  white 
surfaces  which  are  illuminated  by  the  two 
lights.  This  is  the  principle  of  Rumford's 
photometer  and  nothing  else.  We  are  usually 
told  that  it  is  the  method  of  shadows — the 
comparison  of  shadows  one  with  the  other. 
Now  it  is  nothing  of  the  kind,  it  is  really  the 
illumination  of  a  surface  by  two  distinct  lights, 


the  one  illumination  being  not  interfered  with 
by  the  other,  and  this  is  secured  by  making 
one  light  cast  a  shadow  of  a  rod  on  the  screen, 
which  is  illuminated  by  the  other,  and  this 
last  light  to  cast  a  shadow  of  the  same  rod  at 
a  different  place,  which  is  illuminated  by  the 
first  light.  These  two  illuminated  surfaces 
can  be  made  to  touch  by  moving  the  rod 
or  the  angle  of  the  light,  and  by  various 
plans  these  can  be  equalised  in  brightness. 
No  less  a  distinguished  authority  on  photo- 
metry than  Mr.  Dibdin,  in  an  excellent  book 
he  has  written,  says,  although  this  method  has 
certain  advantages,  "  the  method  is  one 
which  few  practical  photometrists  of  the 
present  day  would  venture  to  adopt."  Well, 
I  am  a  tolerably  practical  photometrist  myself, 
and  T  must  confess  I  prefer  it  to  any  other  kind 
of  photometry,  as  it  is  simple,  and  very  few 
errors  can  creep  in  if  one  is  ordinarily  careful, 
which  is  more  than  can  be  said  of  some  others, 
as  we  shall  see.  One  error  that  may  be 
met  with  is  that  if  the  lights  make  a  great 
angle  with  each  other,  and  if  the  screen  is  not 
placed  at  right  angles  to  the  line  bisecting 
the  angle,  an  error  may  creep  in. 

Let  me  show  you  this  experimentally,  and 
this  experiment  really  demonstrates  another 
mode  of  photometry. 

This  white  cube  is  placed  between  two  lights, 
one  of  the  right  angles  of  the  cube  being 
towards  you.  I  place  a  square  aperture  in 
front,  so  that  it  is  bisected  by  the  edge. 
The  cube  is  rotated  round  that  edge  as  a 
centre,  till  the  two  sides  appear  equally  illumi- 
nated. The  reason  of  the  equality  of  illumi- 
nation is  quite  plain.  It  is  because  the  side 
nearest  the  light  is  skewed  at  a  greater  angle 
than  the  other  to  it.  If  we  have  a  diagram,  we 
shall  see  why  this  is.  In  Fig.  10  (p.  8)  A  n  and 
B  A  are  the  two  sides  of  the  cube  illuminated  by 
rays  K  and  R.  It  is  evident  that  the  side  a  B 
will  not  receive  so  many  rays  as  BC,  in  fact, 
the  amounts  are  measured  by  /  q  and  mn. 
If  the  lights  are  unequal,  of  course  when  the 


intensity  of  the  one  multiplied  by  ^  t/  is  equal 
to  the  intensity  of  the  other  multiplied  by  m?i 
the  two  will  equal.  The  intensities,  where 
a  balance  is  struck,  is  found  by  taking  the 
cosines  of  the  angles  through  which  the  cube 
is  turned. 

IE 


Fig.  io. 

We  now  see  that  light  illuminating  a  sur- 
face varies  as  the  cosine  of  the  angle  through 
which  it  is  turned.  If  it  be  turned  50  more 
towards  one  light  than  the  other  it  is  evident 
that  we  shall  get  a  variation.  The  amount 
would  be  as  1  to  '996,  or  an  error  of  -nfW> 
or  t4t7-  If  it  were  10°  it  would  be  1  to  "984, 
or  -jiJ-go-  or  -gL  part,  which  would  be  appreciable. 

There  is  still  one  more  error  which  might  be 
felt,  and  that  is  that  the  eye  receives  more 
light  when  the  angle  which  the  screen  makes 
with  the  eye  and  the  source  of  light  is  greater 
than  a  right  angle  (see  r  and  r1  in  Fig.  10). 
This  must  always  be  the  case,  but  what  may 
be  called  the  difference  in  the  specular  reflec- 
tion is  so  small  for  ordinary  angles,  that  it  is 
of  the  same  order  as  that  given  for  the  wrong 
placing  of  the  screen,  and  becomes  practically 
negligible. 

For  great  accuracy  the  illuminated  shadows 
should  touch,  and  if  the  lights  be  not  too 
broad,  there  is  no  difficulty  in  causing  this  to 
be  done ;  sometimes,  however,  a  white  line  or 
a  black  line  will  separate  the  two  owing  to  the 
penumbra  of  the  shadows,  and  then  making 
the  illuminations  of  the  two  strips  equal  be- 
comes more  difficult.  As  the  black  line  has 
greater  contrast  to  the  two  illumined  surfaces 
than  the  white  line  has;  the  former  is  the 
worst  kind  of  line  to  put  up  with. 

The  next  method  that  is  adopted  is  what  is 
known  as  the  Bunsen  method.  It  consists  of 
equalising  the  brightness  of  a  greased  spot  in 
the  centre  of  a  paper  disc,  or  its  total  dis- 
appearance. The  principle  on  which  this  is 
based  is  the  translucence  of  the  spot.  If  as 
much  light  goes  through  the  spot  (if  perfectly 


made)  from  one  light  as  goes  through  from  the 
other,  the  spot  is  equally  illuminated  through- 
out its  thickness,  and  appears  the  same  white- 
ness as  the  paper.  If  it  be  greater  on  one 
side  it  will  appear  dark  on  one  side,  and  lighter 
on  the  other.  It  is  evident  that  with  such  a 
method  every  suspicion  of  stray  light  must 
be  rigidly  excluded,  unless  it  be  exactly  the 
same  on  both  sides  of  the  disc,  and  only  that 
coming  directly  from  the  sources  of  light 
utilised.  Light  reflected  from  the  sides  or  bars 
will  give  fatal  results  as  far  as  accuracy  is 
concerned.  I  have  met  with  some  instruments 
in  which  reflections  seem  to  have  been  encou- 
raged rather  than  allayed.  To  my  mind  the 
method  should  not  be  accepted  except  in  the 
hands  of  those  who  are  thoroughly  practical 
and  scientific.  I  show  the  design  of  a  Letheby 
photometer,  kindly  lent  me  by  Mr.  Sugg. 
[The  instrument  itself  was  in  the  lecture- 
room,  through  Mr.  Sugg's  goodwill.]  The 
grease  spot  is  viewed  on  both  sides  by  inclined 
mirrors,  and  when  the  grease  spot  disappears 
on  both  sides,  or  at  all  events  appears  to 
equally  dim  on  each  side,  the  light  illumi- 
nating the  spot  may  be  said  to  be  equal. 

There  is  one  thing  to  be  noted,  and  that  is 
that  very  much  depends  upon  the  kind  and 
amount  of  grease,  and  the  kind  of  paper, 
employed.  I  have  made  a  good  many  grease 
spots  in  my  day,  and  I  have  found  the  sensi- 
tiveness of  the  method  vary  considerably 
according  to  the  attention  paid  to  these 
details,  but  I  have  abandoned  the  method 
in  my  laboratory,  except  under  special  circum- 
stances, in  favour  of  the  old  Rumford  method. 

Mr.  Dibdin,  in  his  work,  says  :  — 

"When  first  setting  up  a  disc  for  use,  special 
experimental  readings  should  be  taken ;  and  if  any 
material  difference  is  found  between  the  indications 
when  one  side  or  the  other  is  turned  towards  the 
standard  flame,  it  should  unhesitatingly  be  rejected,  as 
no  amount  of  after  allowance  can  compensate  for  the 
trouble  and  doubt  arising  from  contradictory  results. 
The  disc  should  be  clean  and  perfectly  free  from 
scratches  or  other  markings  of  any  kind  ;  it  is  but  sorry 
economy  to  work  with  a  defective  instrument.  The  Gas 
Referees  went  so  far,  a  short  time  back,  as  to  run  a 
new  disc,  to  be  used  every  week.  As,  however,  a 
good  disc,  when  taken  care  of,  will  last  much  longer 
than  that  period,  the  point  has  not  been  insisted 
upon  ;  but  that  is  no  excuse  for  the  continued  use  of 
a  defective  one,  which  should  be  instantly  destroyed 
as  soon  as  detected." 

We  see  from  this  that  a  disc  photometer  is 
open  to  a  very  grave  objection,  and  it  is  for 
this,  if  for  no  other  reason,  that  I  prefer  the 


Rumford  system,  where  there  is  no  liability 
to  err  on  this  matter.  A  modification  of  the 
Rumford  method  of  shadows  is  that  employed 
by  Prof.  V.  Harcourt.  He  casts  his  shadows 
on  ordinary  printing-  paper,  rendered  partially 
translucent  by  a  wash  of  spermacetti  dissolved 
in  petroleum.  Instead  of  a  rod,  and  about  three- 
quarters  of  an  inch  from  the  paper,  he  places  a 
brass  screen,  having  two  rectangular  apertures 
cut  in  it  exactly  their  own  breadth  apart.  The 
two  lights  are  placed  at  equal  angles  on  each 
side  of  the  line  perpendicular  to  the  screen, 
and  the  illuminated  shadows  are  caused  to 
just  touch   one   another.     It   will   be   noticed 


slightly  altering  the  values  that  should  be 
obtained. 

Before  quitting  the  subject  of  the  Bunsen 
method,  I  ought  to  mention  that  in  photometry, 
for  the  grease  spot  is  sometimes  substituted  a 
star  of  thin  paper,  sandwiched  between  thicker 
paper;  that  is  known  as  a  Leeson  disc,  and 
has  been  much  improved  by  Mr.  bibdin. 

Methven  proposed  to  use  a  slit  placed  in 
front  of  an  Argand  gas-jet  as  a  regulator,  if  I 
may  call  it  so,  of  the  quantity  of  light  issuing 


Fig.  i  i. 

that  really  there  are  four  shadows  illuminated, 
one  from  one  light  being  touched  by  the  other 
two,  and  the  fourth  falling  on  an  opaque  or 
black  space.  A  great  advantage  of  this  plan 
is  that  they  are  looked  at  from  the  back  of  the 
screen,  no  rod  being  between  the  eye  and  the 
screen.  If  two  lights  of  approximately  the 
same  colour  are  looked  at,  the  fact  that  the 
light  has  to  traverse  the  paper  is  of  no  moment, 
though,  when  coloured  lights  have  to  be  com- 
pressed,   there    is    a    danger    of    absorption 


Fig.  12. 

on  to  the  grease  spot.  This  appears  at  first 
sight  an  admirable  arrangement,  and  it  would 
answer  well  if  the  grease  spot  were  always  kept 
at  the  same  distance  from  the  source  of  light, 
but  when  it  is  moved,  an  error,  though  it  may 
be  very  small,  must  be  introduced.  An  Argand 
flame  is  practically  a  hollow  cylinder  of  liglit, 
of  acertain thickness  (Fig.  1 1).  Asyouapproach 
the  light  the  section   of  the  cylinder  varies, 


twMf .  otM^fel     dflllf 


and  consequently  the  quantity  of  light  falling 
on  the  spot  must  vary  beyond  what  it  should 
do.    It  may  be  remarked  that  putting  aside 


Fig.  13. 

this  error  the  measurements  are  made  from  the 


slit  and  not  from  the  source  of  light,  which  is 
a  decided   advantage.      Messrs.   Hurter  and 


10 


Driffield  have  to  a  large  extent  got  rid  of 
this  light  and  employ  a  flat  flame,  of  large  size, 
as  the  source  of  light,  and  use  a  small  square 
aperture  in  front  of  the  flat  side.  As  the 
section  of  such  a  flame  appears  to  be  uniform, 
the  inaccuracy  of  measurement  introduced  is 
done  away  with.  In  reference  to  this,  it  may 
be  interesting  to  show  that  in  an  ordinary 
flame  the  light  varies  in  intensity  at  different 
points.  This  can  be  done  well  by  means  of 
photography,  reducing  the  exposure  each 
time.  Fig.  12  (p.  9)  is  an  Argand  burner  flame, 
Fig.  13  (p.  9)  a  batswing,  and  Fig.  14  an  ordi- 
nary candle. 

It  will  be  seen  that  in  the  candle  flame  we 
have  an  almost  expected  result.  The  Argand 
gas  is  more  surprising.  The  batswing  gas  is 
perhaps  the  best,  as  it  shows  that  in  the  wing 
used  the  intensity  remains  almost  constant. 
I  think  these  photographs  will  demonstrate  to 


Fig.  14. 

you  that  if  the  quantity  of  light  to  be  admitted 
to  a  screen  is  to  be  determined  by  an  aperture, 
the  burner  should  be  of  the  batswing  type. 

Before  quitting  the  subject  of  photometers, 
I  must  introduce  to  your  notice  the  radial 
photometer  of  Dibdin  (Fig.  15).  The  diagram 
almost  explains  itself.  The  object  of  the 
photometer  is  to  measure  the  illumination  of 
a  flame  in  all  directions.  It  will  be  seen  that 
the  arm  which  carries  the  light  to  be  tried 
remains  always  at  the  same  distance  from  the 
screen.  The  screen  itself  is  so  arranged  that 
its  surface  bisects  the  angles  between  the  lines 
joining  the  two  lights  and  itself — a  most 
necessary  thing,  when  Fig.  10  is  taken  into 
consideration. 

We  have  now  to  turn  to  the  method  of 
judging  the  equality  of  light ;  that  is,  how  the 
eye  can  best  appreciate  the  light. 

We  are  told  very  frequently  that  the  eye  can 


appreciate  about  the  ,'0th  part  in  the  intensity 
of  light,  or,  say,  2  per  cent.  There  is  a  story 
told  of  a  celebrated  witness  who,  when  asked 
whether  such  and  such  a  thing  was  the  case, 
said  : — "  Yes  and  No."  Now  if  I  were  asked 
the  question  as  to  whether  the  above  limit  was 
true,  I  could  safely  answer  in  the  same  terms. 
First  of  all  let  me  show  you  an  experiment, 
which  will  prove  that  this  limit  is  both  under- 
stated and  also  overstated.  I  have  on  this 
screen  a  variety  of  greys  between  black  and 
white.  We  can  now  see  them  all,  and  the 
difference  between  them.  If  I  turn  down  the 
light,  a  great  many  of  these  appear  the  same 
tint.  If  I  turn  on  to  them  a  very  strong  electric 
light,  those  not  neaily  white,  when  looked  from 
where  I  am,  appear  white,  and  it  is  only  when 
there  is  considerable  black  in  the  shade  of 
tint  that  they  appear  grey. 


Fig.  15. 

As  a  matter  of  fact,  there  is  an  intensity  of 
light,  in  which  much  smaller  differences  than 
the  jVth  can  be  perceived.  I  believe,  for  my 
own  part,  that,  when  the  light  is  suitable,  a 
difference  of  nearly  ^J-j  is  recognisable.  But 
it  is  not  necessary  that  the  eye  should  be  so 
sensitive  as  the  above,  so  long  as  proper  pre- 
cautions are  taken  in  balancing  the  light.  If 
we  balance  from  "too  light"  and  then  from 
"  too  dark,"  the  mean  will  be  fairly  exact,  and 
probably  not  be  far  off  the  truth  by  a  good  deal 
less  than  1  per  cent.  But  there  is  another 
plan,  which  is  better  still,  and  that  is  by  rapid 
oscillations  in  intensity  on  each  side  of  the 
true  point.  This  is  difficult  with  many  photo- 
meters, but  not  with  all.  When  this  plan  is 
adopted,  supposing  we  are  using  the  shadovv 
method,  the  two  shadows  appear  to  wink,  and, 
when  exactly  balanced,  this  winking  stops. 
It  is  curious  how,  without  this  artifice,  readings, 


which  can  be  proved  to  be  palpably  wrong, 
are  made.  For  instance,  when  one  shadow 
is  intensely  darker  than  another,  the  eye  of  the 
observer  will  fail  to  see  it,  when  the  alteration 
is  made  slowly.  If  the  eye,  however,  has  a 
rest,  by  looking  away  at  some  black  object, 
the  inequality  of  the  shadows  will  at  once  be 
seen.  This  cannot  happen  when  the  method 
of  rapid  oscillation  is  adopted. 

What  the  cause  of  this  may  be  is  not  abso- 
lutely proved.  When  the  eyes  look  at  two 
objects  (spots  or  shadows)  the  images  of  the 
two  are  projected  on  different  parts  of  the 
eye,  these  portions  get  fatigued,  and  the 
longer  they  are  looked  at  the  greater  the 
fatigue.  The  brightness  of  the  two  gets  lowered 
and  they  gradually  approach  one  another. 
When  the  system  of  oscillation  is  adopted, 
though  both  images  are  lowered  in  tone,  yet 
there  is  a  constant  brightening  and  dimning  in 
both,  not  sufficient  rapid  to  make  each  of  them 
practically  uniform  in  a  tone  midway  between 
the  two,  but  scintillation  is  produced.  We 
can  see  how  the  eyes  can  be  fatigued  by  a  very 
simple  experiment.  I  will  throw  a  bright  patch 
from  the  electric  light  upon  the  screen,  which 
is  also  partially  illuminated  by  gas-light.  If 
the  audience  look  at  it  for  a  few  seconds,  and 
keep  their  eyes  fixed  on  the  screen  when  I  cut 
off  the  electric  light,  they  will  see  a  dark 
spot  where  the  bright  patch  was,  and  it  will 
appear  to  travel  about  as  the  eye  wanders 
over  the  screen.  This  shows  that  the  part  of 
the  retina  on  which  the  white  patch  was  re- 
ceived is  fatigued,  and  is  less  sensitive  to  the 
feeble  gas-light  illumination  with  which  the 
screen  is  illuminated. 


Some  very  instructive  measures  of  the  sensi- 
tiveness of  the  eye  to  different  shades  of  light 
can  be  made  by  a  sector  arrangement.  Black 
dots  of  any  size  required  (in  the  case  in  point 
they  have  one-eighth  of  an  inch  in  diameter) 
can  be  placed  on  a  white  disc,  as  shown. 
This  disc  is  cut  radially  from  the  centre,  and 
a  black  disc  is  marked  out  in  the  figure.  The 
proportion  of  black  and  white  can  be  altered 
at  pleasure,  and  a  further  slight  alteration  in 
the  grey  produced  is  made  by  the  dots  ;  the 


Fig.  16. 

smallest  alteration,  of  course,  being  when  the 
dot  subtends  the  smallest  angle.  By  this  plan 
the  sensitiveness  of  the  eye  to  any  small 
change  in  light  can  at  once  be  found.  The 
sector  may  be  varied  between  all  white  to 
nearly  all  black.  Similarly  white  dots  may  be 
placed  on  a  black  disc,  a  white  disc  over- 
lapping, and  unique  measures  made.  It  must 
be  remembered  that  in  all  cases  the  black 
itself  reflects  a  certain  amount  (in  this  case 
about  4  per  cent.)  of  white  light. 


Lecture  HI.— Delivered  April  16,  1894. 


The  sensitiveness  of  the  eye  to  changes  in 
intensity,  I  have  shown  you,  varies  according 
to  the  intensity  of  light  from  which  the  varia- 
tion takes  place.  As  my  time  is  short,  I  must 
omit  some  other  theoretical  considerations 
which  it  was  my  intention  to  show  you.  I  will 
first    of    all    commence    by    showing    how   it 


can  be  ascertained  whether  a  light  is  up  to  the 
standard  temperature,  such  standard  tempera- 
ture being  required  for  visual  and  photo- 
graphic comparisons. 

It  is  well  known  that  by  mixing  two  properly 
chosen  spectrum  colours  white  light  can  be 
formed,  and  when  I  say  white  light,  I  mean  the 


12 


colour  of  the  light  under  trial.  Now,  for 
lecture  purposes,  it  is  useless  for  me  to 
try  and  use  the  light  of  a  candle  to  form  a 
spectrum.  It  would  be  invisible  to  you  all  ; 
but  I  can  use  the  electric  light  just  as  well  for 
the  object  I  have  in  view,  viz.,  the  demon- 
stration of  the  principles  involved.  Now  the 
whiter  the  light,  the  more  blue  and  violet  there 
is  in  its  spectrum.  There  is,  therefore,  a  large 
quantity  of  blue  and  violet  in  the  electric  light. 
I  will  form  a  spectrum,  and  place  a  slit  in  the 
orange  and  another  slit  in  the  blue,  so  that  I 
can  have  a  slice  of  each  coloured  light.  By 
means  of  a  lens  I  can  cause  these  two  slices  of 
spectrum  colours  toexpandandoverlapand  form 
an  image  of  the  face  of  one  of  the  prisms  used, 
and  I  can  then  cause  a  beam  of  the  original 
light  to  illuminate  a  white  surface  alongside  of 
it.  The  two  slits  can  now  be  opened  till  they 
form  by  their  mixture  exactly  the  same  colour 
as  the  original  beam.  Let  us  see  if  we  use 
another  source  of  light  whether  we  shall  get 
exactly  the  same  result,  keeping  the  slits  as 
they  are.  I  tone  down  the  electric  light  by  a 
very  pale  yellow  glass  :  the  light  imitates  very 
closely  gas-light.  If  we  place  it  in  front  of  the 
slit  of  the  spectroscope,  so  that  the  spectrum 
is  the  spectrum  of  the  yellower  light,  and  the 
incident  beam  is  the  yellow  light,  you  will  see 
at  once  that  the  mixture  of  the  two  colours  no 
longer  gives  the  same  colour  as  the  yellow 
light.  Making  the  light  the  same  as  the 
amylacetate  lamp  light,  you  will  see  again  that 
the  balance  is  upset,  the  two  patches  of  light  on 
the  two  white  surfaces  are  no  longer  the  same. 

Here,  then,  we  have  an  indication  of  the 
method  to  pursue  in  ascertaining  if  lights  are  of 
the  same  quality.  By  having  two  adjustable  slits 
in  the  spectrum,  which  will  with  a  standard  light 
exactly  match  the  colour  of  such  a  standard, 
we  can  at  once  see  if  any  other  light  is  of  the 
same  value  ;  if  it  is  not,  the  two  illuminated 
surfaces  will  be  of  a  different  hue.  Another 
plan  is  to  use  proper  coloured  glasses  in  front 
of  a  lens,  and  allow  light  to  pass  through 
them  in  such  proportions  that  they  cast  an 
image  of  a  beam  of  exactly  the  same  colour  as 
that  of  the  standard  light  itself.  When 
another  light  is  used,  equality  of  colour  no 
longer  exists. 

There  is  one  method  of  altering  the  in- 
tensity of  a  light,  if  it  be  a  glow-lamp 
which  may  interest  some.  In  the  first  lec- 
ture I  showed  how  the  visible  rays  increase 
in  intensity  in  a  parabolic  curve.  This  was 
further  investigated  by  General  Festing  and 
myself.    If  each  ray  goes  up  parabolically,  it  is 


probable  that  the  sum  of  them  does  the  same. 
In  a  paper  read  at  the  Royal  Society  on 
December  8,  1887,  we  showed  that  our  surmise 
was  correct,  and  that  if  a  constant  was  de- 
ducted from  the  current  multiplied  by  the  volts 
the  result  was  the  square  root  of  the  light 
multiplied  by  a  constant — (w  -  m  =  n  /y~\ 
which  is  a  parabolic.  By  altering  the  resist- 
ance in  the  lamp,  and  reading  an  amperemeter, 
and  a  voltmeter,  the  result  is  obtained,  though  it 
is  sufficient  if  the  amperes  alone  be  read,  for 
then  c2  -  s  =  t  /y~  very  nearly  when 
c  is  current  and  y  the  light,  s  and  /  being 
constants. 

As  to  the  use  of  the  sectors,  it  has  been 
brought  to  my  notice  that  Mr.  Ferry 
has  called  in  question  the  accuracy  of  the 
sectors  when  comparing  lights  of  different 
colours  with  one  another,  such  as  lime- light 
and  a  glow-lamp.  He  states  that  for  light  of 
the  same  colour,  and  for  monochromatic  light; 
no  error  can  be  found  in  its  use.  I  may  lefer, 
however,  in  opposition  to  this,  to  some  experi- 
ments which  were  carried  out  by  General 
Festing  and  myself,  in  which  the  luminosity  of 
the  spectrum  was  measured  without  the  inter- 
vention of  the  sectors,  comparison  having  been 
made  with  a  glow-lamp.  It  was  found,  as 
published,  that  the  two  methods  gave  identical 
results.  There  are  many  other  experiments 
which  show  that  no  error  in  the  results  obtained 
with  the  sector  have  been  found  by  us.  That 
this  is  the  case,  we  may  take  to  be  the  fact  by 
direct  and  by  indirect  measures. 

There  is,  in  my  opinion,  no  method  so  good 
in  photometry  as  that  of  using  properly  moving 
rotating  sectors,  whose  open  apertures  can  be 
altered  at  will.  It  allows  both  lights  to  re- 
main stationary,  as,  also,  the  screen.  This 
method  of  diminishing  the  intensity  of  the 
light  was,  I  believe,  first  introduced  by  Fox 
Talbot  more  than  fifty  years  ago,  though  he 
had  not  the  advantage  of  using  moveable 
apertures.  This  principle  of  altering  the 
aperture  during  rotation  I  first  saw  exhibited 
by  Mr.  Kempe,  Q.C.,  at  a  soiree  of  the  Royal 
Society.  It  was  applied  to  a  colour  top. 
Without  entering  into  the  history  of  the 
matter,  however,  let  me  show  you  the  ex- 
actitude with  which  such  sectors  can  be 
employed. 

In  doing  this,  I  wish  to  introduce  to  your 
notice  a  photometric  method  which  I  brought 
out,  and  is,  I  believe,  very  fairly  successful. 
I  am  not  saying  it  is  the  very  best  for 
comparing  ordinary  lights,  but  it  fills  a 
gap  for  measuring  light  transmitted  through 


>3 


bodies,  which  is  very  convenient.  The  principle 
of  the  screen,  you  will  at  once  see,  is  different 
from  almost  any  other.  It  consists  of  a  square 
aperture  cut  in  a  thin  disc,  and  over  this  is 
stretched  a  white  piece  of  paper  of  such  a 
nature  that  the  light  from  an  illuminant  is 
only  scattered,  and  no  direct  image  can  be 
seen  under  any  circumstances.  On  the  other 
side  is  cut  a  mark  in  black  paper  or  black 
retint,  which  is  exactly  double  the  size  of  the 
cut-out  square,  and  this  is  filled  up  by  the 
white  paper  stretched  over  the   aperture,   so 

Fig.  17. 


Bach   View. 

that  we  have  a  rectangle  of  paper  half  of 
which  is  translucent  and  the  other  half  opaque. 
If  now  we  place  a  light  behind  the  aperture, 
the  half  is  illuminated  by  transmitted  light, 
and  if  a  light  is  placed  on  the  other  side, 
the  whole  rectangle  is  illuminated.  By  placing 
a  rod  in  the  path  of  this  last  beam,  we  may 
cast  a  shadow  which  prevents  the  last  illu- 
minating the  half  through  which  the  trans- 
mitted beam  comes,  and  then  we  have  half 
the  paper  rectangle  illuminated  by  transmitted 
light,  and  the  other  half  by  incident  light. 
If  the  paper  be  of  good  quality,  the  light  will 

Front    View. 


Fig.  18. 

appear  of  the  same  colour.  By  placing  the 
rotating  sectors  in  the  path  of  the  front  beam, 
and  altering  the  apertures,  we  may  cause  the 
two  to  appear  of  equal  brightness. 

Now  suppose  I  want  to  examine  the  amount 
of  light  transmitted  through  this  piece  of 
ground  glass,  I  can  readily  do  it.  If  I  place  it 
near  the  candle,  and  use  an  ordinary  Bunsen 
or  Rumford  photometer,  I  shall  find  that  it 
varies  according  as  I  place  it  close  to  the 
source  of  light,  or  half  way,  or  close  to  the 
screen.     It  is  quite  evident  that  the  closer  I 


place  it  to  the  screen,  the  truer  will  be  the 
measure  of  the  total  amount  of  light  trans- 
mitted. With  this  photometer  I  can  get  the 
ground  glass  close  to  the  screen,  and  we  then 
get  a  measure  of  the  transmission  of  light 
through  it.  An  objection  has  been  made  that 
light  has  been  reflected  back  from  the  surface 
of  the  white  paper  to  the  glass,  and  back  from 
that  surface  again.  This  may  be  true  to  a 
very  limited  extent.  If  I  take  a  piece  of  ordi- 
nary glass,  and  hold  it  close  to  the  lamp,  lean 
balance  the  two  lights,  bringing  it  closer  and 
closer,  till  it  in  fact  almost  touches  the  aper- 
ture, you  will  see  that  the  balance  is  undis- 
turbed. A  variety  of  experiments  has  shown 
that  any  error  caused  by  this  is  negligible. 
We  can  take  a  piece  of  a  photographic  nega- 
tive, and  test  it  in  the  same  way,  and  balance 
it,  and  move  it  at  different  distances  towards 
the  screen  ;  we  find  that  if  we  strike  a  balance 
when  it  is  near  the  light  it  becomes  apparently 
darker  as  it  approaches  the  light,  then  gets 
lighter  and  lighter,  till  it  appears  lightest  of 
all  as  it  approaches  the  screen.  Another 
point  is  this,  that  it  need  not  be  used  in  a 
totally  dark  room,  where  provision  is  made 
that  any  light  there  is  must  pass  through  the 
body  under  measurement ;  a  small  amount  of 
diffused  light  is  of  no  very  great  moment  any- 
where, since  it  illuminates  the  front  of  the 
rectangle,  and  has  no  effect  on  the  measures 
of  the  light  transmitted.  We  can  also  use  it  for 
coloured  objects,  such  as  coloured  glass.  For 
ordinary  purposes  it  suffices  if  the  glass  be 
placed  against  the  aperture,  or  in  the  path  of 
the  beam  somewhere,  so  long  as  the  aperture 
is  only  illuminated  by  the  light  transmitted 
through  the  glass.  This  makes  one  half 
coloured  ;  but  it  is  easy  to  balance  the  illu- 
minations by  the  oscillations  of  the  sector 
[This  was  experimentally  demonstrated.]  The 
light  passed  through  is  then  very  easily  found. 
Again  I  may  use  coloured  paper  and  do  the 
same.  To  myself  it  is  more  easy  to  balance  a 
coloured  light  against  a  white  one  than  a 
white  one  against  the  white.  I  need  scarcely 
say  that,  first  of  all,  the  illuminations  of  the 
white  surfaces  are  balanced,  and  the  sector 
opening  read  before  the  light  coming  through 
any  coloured  or  other  body  is  measured.  If 
the  white  surface  require  a  sector  opening  of 
8o°,  and  only  40J  when  a  body  is  against  the 
aperture  in  the  screen,  half  the  light  is 
transmitted. 

We  may  often  want  to  know  the  amount  of 
light  reflected  from  a  body,  and  the  next 
photometer  I  shall  show  you  is  used  by  me 


H 


for  that  purpose.  It  is  very  similar  in  principle 
to  the  last.  The  aperture  is  cut  as  before,  but 
instead  of  being  covered  up,  it  is  left  open 
to  allow  the  coloured  object  to  be  placed  in  it, 
alongside  a  white  square.  Instead  of  two 
lights  one  light  may  be  used  for  this  photo- 
meter, a  reflection  being  used  instead  of  the 
second  light.  This  avoids  any  alteration  in 
the  relative  intensities  of  the  two  lights  used, 
for  they  both  are  from  the  same  source.  A 
rod  casts  shadows,  one  on  the  aperture  and 
the  other  on  the  white  square.  The  aperture 
is  fitted  with  (say)  a  grey  square,  and  the 
sectors  in  the  direct  beam  altered  till  the 
two  appear  of  the  same  colour ;  or  I  may 
introduce  a  coloured  object  and  repeat  the 
process.  In  this  case,  of  course,  first  of  all 
the  aperture  should  be  fitted  with  a  white 
surface  and  a  measure  taken,  and  the  aperture 
of  the  two  measures  of  the  sectors  gives  the 
relative  brightness  of  the  two  objects. 

There  are  often  cases  where  we  may  wish  to 
measure  bodies  which  only  allow  but  very  little 


light  to  pass,  though  they  are  transparent. 
In  such  a  case  we  have  to  use  a  very  powerful 
light,  and  it  may  be  that  the  body  varies 
greatly  in  absorption  at  different  parts.  For 
this  reason  I  use  the  electric  arc  light  as  the 
source,  and  concentrate  it  so  as  to  give  a 
brilliant  beam.  There  are,  however,  variations 
in  the  electric  (arc)  light  from  time  to  time, 
and  unless  the  comparison  light,  with  which 
the  relative  intensities  passing  through 
different  parts  of  the  wedge  are  measured, 
varies  at  exactly  the  same  time  and  in  the 
same  proportion,  the  measurements  will  often 
be  very  much  out.  If  we  merely  wish  to 
measure  the  white  light  transmitted,  the 
apparatus  to  employ  is  not  very  extensive, 
and  Fig.  19  will  show  what  it  is.  E  Lis  the 
electric  light,  placed  in  a  lantern  or  box  of 
some  kind,  to  prevent  the  room,  which  should 
be  slightly  darkened,  from  being  flooded  with 
light.  L,  is  a  condenser  which  throws  an 
image  of  the  crater  of  the  positive  pole  upon 
the  slit,  S,  of  the  collimator,  C.  The  rays  issue 


M, 


/•::-• 


Sectors 


e i_-=:::::. 


L, 


R  C        I— n      LMI 

--:--- --:--::-p.-:::a 


Fig.  19. 


W 


Screen 


parallel,  and  are  caught  by  a  lens  Lin,  which 
forms  an  image  of  the  slit  upon  the  surface  of 
the  wedge,  w,  placed  in  a  proper  position  and 
in  its  mountings.  The  light,  after  passing 
through  the  wedge,  forms  a  circle  of  light  on 
the  screen.  It  will  be  noticed  that  the  image 
of  the  slit  may  be  as  narrow  as  one  wishes  by 
opening  or  closing  S,  and  that  we  have  a  line 
of  light  passing  through  the  wedge,  such  as  is 
required  to  effect  the  graduation.  Calculation 
will  show  that,  with  a  fairly  narrow  slit,  the 
measured  intensity  passing  through  it  may 
be  taken  as  that  passing  through  the  mean 
thickness  of  that  part  on  which  the  image 
falls. 

Placed  in  the  path  of  the  beam,  and  between 
the  wedge  and  Lnl,  is  a  plain  mirror,  M 
(for  which  I  often  substitute  a  prism  of  i£c, 
and  so  obtain  a  single  reflection),  which  re- 
flects the  light  at  right  angles,  or  any  con- 
venient angle  to  its  path.  It  is  again 
reflected  from  M„  a  silver  on  glass  mirror. 
An  image  of  the  slit  is  formed  in  the  path, 


and  a  second  disc  is  formed  on  the  screen. 
The  centre  of  this  disc  is  made  to  coincide 
with  the  centre  of  the  disc  formed  by  the 
light  passing  through  the  wedge.  A  rod, 
R,  is  placed  in  the  path  of  the  two  beams, 
which  casts  two  shadows,  one  illuminated 
by  one  beam  and  one  by  the  other.  The 
usual  black  mask  is  used  on  the  screen, 
to  confine  the  attention  to  a  small  part  of 
the  shadows. 

It  will  be  seen  that,  when  any  variation 
takes  place  in  the  light,  it  equally  affects  both 
the  illuminated  shadows  ;  hence  the  measures 
may  be  made  without  fear  of  error  creeping  in. 
Sectors  with  apertures,  moving  at  will  whilst 
they  are  rotating,  are  introduced,  as  shown  in 
the  figure,  and  sometimes  a  second  set  of 
fixed  sectors  are  introduced  between  M  and  W 
should  the  light  passing  through  w  be  too 
bright.  The  screen  is  placed  perpendicular  to 
the  line  bisecting  the  angle  made  by  the  two 
beams.  It  should  be  noted  that  this  plan 
almost    necessitates     movable    sectors,    but 


•s 


sectors  which  are  fixed  at  known  apertures 
can  be  used  at  a  pinch,  and  the  balance  made 
by  moving  the  wedge  in  its  settings. 

It  should  be  remarked  that  though  the 
wedge  may  not  be  pure  black  the  readings 
can  be  very  readily  made  by  the  method  of 
oscillating  between  "too  light"  and  "too 
dark"  for  the  shadow  whose  brightness  is 
controlled  by  the  sector.  In  making  a  valua- 
tion of  the  wedge,  the  first  thing  to  do  is  to 
compare  the  lights  without  the  intervention  of 
the  wedge,  and  then  to  take  readings. 

For  certain  purposes  it  is  necessary  to  know 
how  much  of  each  colour  of  the  spectrum  is 
transmitted  through  a  wedge,  and  Fig.  20 
shows  how  this  is  accomplished. 

The  electric  light  and  the  collimator  are 
placed   as   before,  but   the  parallel  emergent 


rays  fall  upon  a  pair  of  prisms,  and  the 
spectrum  is  brought  to  a  focus  by  L,,  on  to 
a  screen  in  which  there  is  a  slit  against  which 
the  wedge  in  its  setting  is  placed.  The  slit 
can  be  placed  in  any  spectrum  ray,  and  the 
wedge  surface  is  always  kept  perpendicular  to 
that  ray.  A  lens,  Lln  brings  the  rays  to  a 
focus,  so  that  a  monochromatic  image  of  the 
surface  of  the  last  prism  is  formed  on  the 
screen.  From  the  surface  of  the  first  prism 
parallel  rays  are  reflected  :  these  are  caught 
by  a  mirror  and  fall  on  a  pair  of  precisely 
similar  prisms,  and  the  remainder  of  the 
apparatus  is  exactly  the  same  as  that  de- 
scribed above,  a  second  patch  of  coloured 
light  being  formed  over  the  first  patch.  The 
slit,  S, , ,,  is  so  adjusted  in  the  spectrum  that 
the  two  patches  are  of  the  same  colour.      The 


L, 

el-:::x; 


S, C      c=?? 


Fig.  20. 


sectors  are  placed  as  shown  in  the  figure,  the 
rod,  R,  forming  two  shadows,  as  before.  The 
method  of  procedure  is  to  place  the  slit,  S,,  in 
some  colour  in  the  spectrum,  and  S,,,  in  the 
same.  The  wedge  is  then  graduated  for  this 
beam  throughout  its  length,  another  position 
is  taken  up,  and  the  same  process  gone 
through.  By  this  means  we  get  the  logarithmic 
factor  of  transparency  for  each  part  of  the 
wedge  for  the  whole  of  the  spectrum  colours. 

The  last  point  that  I  shall  have  to  refer  to  is 
an  apparent  failure  of  the  law  of  inverse  squares 
as  regards  photometry. 

I  have  upon  the  screen  two  patches  of 
spectrum  light — a  red  and  a  green — of  equal 
intensity,  if  anything  the  red  is  rather  the 
brighter.  I  place  the  rotating  sectors  in  front 
of  them   and   gradually  close   them.     Notice 


that  the  red  begins  to  fade  away  much  more 
rapidly  than  the  green.  When  very  nearly 
closed  the  red  has  disappeared  and  the  green 
remains  not  of  its  light  green  colour  but  as  a 
green  grey. 

Let  us  argue  from  this  what  should  result. 
If  when  we  illuminate  a  screen  with  red  light 
we  can  remove  it  to  such  a  distance  that  the 
screen  becomes  invisible,  though  if  we  have 
green  light,  which  appeared  of  equal  bright- 
ness when  close  to  it,  we  should  be  able  to 
remove  it  much  further  before  the  same  screen 
became  invisible.  The  point  at  which  the 
screen  disappeared  from  view  would  evidently 
be  the  zero  point  from  which  the  illumination 
wi  mid  have  to  be  reckoned  for  the  colour  which 
was  used.  So  with  white  light,  there  is  a  point 
at  which  the  screen  would  become  invisible. 


It 


Evidently  then  the  law  of  inverse  squares  for 
illumination  appears  to  fail  for  low  intenseness 
of  light,  and  this  is  owing  to  the  insensitive- 
ness  of  the  eye.  Theoretically,  of  course,  the 
screen  may  be  moved  to  an  infinite  distance 
and  still  be  visible.  The  law  is  obeyed  prac- 
tically of  course.  It  may  be  thought  that  this 
limit  of  vision  is  of  no  practical  account.  But 
I  must  say  that  it  is.  For  instance,  in  the 
photographic  room  we  use  red  light,  and  we 


find  that  the  corners  of  a  fairly-sized  room  are 
invisible.  If  we  use  canary  medium  the  corners 
will  be  well  illuminated.  This  is  owing  to 
what  I  may  call  the  superior  space  penetrat- 
ing power  of  illumination  of  the  yellow-greenish 
light  over  the  red. 

I  have  not  been  able  to  show  all  I  wished 
owing  to  want  of  time,  but  I  trust  that  what  I 
have  shown  may  not  be  lacking  in  instructive- 
ness. 


LONDON : 
PRINTED  BY  WILLIAM  TROUNCE,    10,   GOUGH   SQUARE,  FLEET  STREET,   E.C. 


SYLLABUS 


LECTURE  I. 
White  light — Sources  of  light — Standard  light — Quality  of  lights  from  different  sources. 

LECTURE  II. 

Principles  of  measurement — Different  methods  of  Photometry — Oscillation  and  scintillation  in 
light  measurement — Colour  no  bar  to  measurement. 

LECTURE  III. 

Applications  of  Photometry  to  various  scientific  purposes. 


SOCIETY  FOR  THE   ENCOURAGEMENT 


ARTS,    MANUFACTURES,    AND    COMMERCE. 


C  A  N  TO  11      LECTURES 


ON   SOME  CONSIDERATIONS   CONCERNING 


COLOUR     AND      COLOURING. 


DELIVERED    BEFORE   THE   SOCIETY   OF   ART.-!,    MARCH,    1S90, 


PROF.  A.  II.  CHUliCH,  M.A ,  F.R.S. 


Reprinted  from  the  "Journal  of  the  Society  of  Arls,"  July  A,  11,  £  18,  1890. 


LONDON: 
PRINTED    BY    W.   TROUNCE,    10,    QOUQH    SQUARE,    FLEET    STREET.   E.C. 

1800. 


SOMK  CON8IDERTIONS  CONCERNING  COLOUR 

AND  COLOURING. 

By    PROFESSOR    A.   H.    CHURCH,    M.A.,  F.R.S. 


LECTURE  h— Delivered  March  17,  1890. 


SYLLABUS. — Definition  of  terras — Constants  of  Colour — Primary  Colour  Sensations — Classification  and  Nomenclature  of 
Colours — Luminosity  of  Pigments — Translation  of  Colours  into  White,  Greys,  and  Black — Effects  of  Varying  Illumination  — 
Dichroism—  The  Chromatic  Circle— Chromatic  Equivalents. 


It  was  after  considerable  hesitation  that  I 
accepted  the  honour  of  addressing  the  Society 
of  Arts  on  the  subject  which  is  to  engage  our 
attention  to-night,  and  on  the  two  remaining 
Monday  evenings  of  the  present  month.  I 
was  doubtful  as  to  the  freshness  of  my 
material  and  as  to  my  ability  in  presenting  my 
opinions  to  your  notice.  Then,  too,  I  remem- 
bered that  Captain  Abney  had  handled  some 
parts  of  this  subject  so  ably  and  so  recently, 
in  the  course  of  lectures  which  he  delivered  in 
this  room  in  1888.  I  felt,  however,  that  if  I 
could  but  succeed  in  developing  your  interest 
in  the  connection  between  the  science  of  colour 
and  the  art  of  colouring,  I  might  perhaps  be 
justified  in  acceding  to  the  request  of  your 
Council. 

The  syllabus  of  the  course  indicates  the 
limited  range  of  these  lectures,  and  shows  that 
they  make  no  pretension  to  an  exhaustive  treat- 
ment of  the  subject  of  colour.  To  my  "  Manual 
of  Colour,"  published  in  1887  by  Messrs. 
Cassell  and  Co.,  I  must  refer  my  auditors  for 
a  systematic  exposition  ;  in  this  place  I  pur- 
pose developing  some  only  of  the  topics  dis- 
cussed in  my  book,  especially  in  relation  to 
our  everyday  surroundings.  But  I  cannot 
refrain  from  expressing  the  great  debt  I  owe 
to  the  "Modern  Chromatics"  of  Professor 
Ogden  Rood,  published  just  eleven  years  ago. 
You  will  notice  how  often  I  have  to  cite  his 
authority  and  to  quote  his  results. 

Definition  of  Terms. — The  sense  given  to 
certain  terms,  which  will  be  freely  used  in  these 
lectures,  ought  to  be  explained  at  the  outset. 

The  essential  difference  between  tones  lies 
in  their  brightness  or  luminosity,  that  is  the 
amount  of  optical  sensation  caused  by  a  given 
area.  Tints  contain  differing  amounts  of 
white,  shades  contain  differing  amounts  of 
black,  broken  tints  contain  differing  amounts 
of  grey— all  these  are  tones  ;  the  particular 
descriptions  I   have  given  being  so  framed  as 


to  apply  to  coloured  and  uncoloured  sub- 
stances rather  than  to  lights.  When  a  series 
of  tones  is  said  to  constitute  a  scale,  it  is 
formed  by  the  addition  of  equal  increments  of 
the  modifying  element.  Each  hue  admits  of 
three  scales — the  reduced  scale,  made  up  of 
tints  ;  the  darkened  scale,  made  up  of  shades  ; 
the  dulled  scale,  made  up  of  broken  tints. 
Theoretically,  each  possible  scale  starts  from 
the  pure  normal  colour ;  practically,  when  we 
deal  with  pigments  and  other  coloured  bodies 
and  not  with  lights,  such  a  perfect  starting- 
point  is  unattainable.  It  should  be  added 
that  the  tints  of  black  and  the  shades  of  white 
are  the  greys,  and  that  passage-tones  are 
distinguished  from  the  tones  which  constitute 
the  above-named  scales  in  one  respect  only  ; 
they  pass  by  imperceptible  gradations  from  the 
beginning  to  the  end,  and  not  by  definite  steps 
of  ascertainable  value. 

Constants  of  Colour.  —  Of  these  there  are 
three,  namely,  hue,  purity,  brightness.  The 
hue  of  a  colour  appeals  at  once  to  the  eye  ; 
we  endeavour  to  identify  it,  perhaps  to  name 
it,  calling  it  red,  orange,  yellow,  green,  &c, 
and  so  on.  The  purity  of  a  colour  refers,  in 
the  accepted  language  of  chromatics,  to  its 
freedom  from  white ;  in  this  sense  no  pig- 
mentary colour  is  pure.  In  the  spectrum,  under 
certain  conditions,  we  have  pure  colours.  The 
brightness  or  luminosity  of  a  colour  is  measured 
by  the  total  amount  of  light  sent  to  and  per- 
ceived by  the  eye,  and  is  independent  of  hue 
and  of  purity.  Colours  which  do  not  sensibly 
differ  from  white,  are  therefore  far  removed 
from  purity,  are  bright  because  the  white 
light  freely  reflected  from  them  produces  more 
optical  sensation  than  any  positive  colour.  On 
the  other  hand,  a  pure  colour  is  not  necessarily 
a  bright  colour,  for  not  only  is  the  absence  of 
white  light  the  exclusion  of  the  cause  of  the 
highest  luminosity,  but  a  pure  colour  may  be 
so  low  in  tone  as  to  be  barely  recognisable. 


When  a  colour  is  at  once  as  bright  and  as 
pure  as  possible,  it  is  called  saturated  ;  such  a 
colour  may  be  called  "full"  in  speaking  of 
pigments  and  other  coloured  materials.  Its 
less  pure  tones  are,  as  I  have  mentioned  before, 
called  tints,  and  are  more  or  less  "pale."  Its 
less  luminous  tones  or  shades  are  more  or  less 
"  dark."  Such  of  its  tones  as  are  at  once  less 
pure  than  its  shades  and  less  luminous  than  its 
tints,  are  more  or  less  "  dull." 

Of  all  the  above  terms  there  are  two  only 
which  are  applied  in  a  manner  somewhat 
different  from  that  belonging  to  ordinary 
parlance.  These  two  terms  are  shades  of 
colour  and  purity  of  colour. 

Primary  Colour- Sensations. — Colour  is, 
we  know,  an  internal  sensation,  and  has  no 
external  and  objective  existence.  It  originates, 
in  all  the  cases  which  we  purpose  discussing 
in  the  present  course  of  lectures,  in  the  impact 
on  the  optic  nerve  of  that  energy  or  mode  of 
motion  which  we  call  light.  Certain  waves  or 
vibrations  which  affect  the  nerve-fibrils  of  the 
eye  are  translated  by  the  brain  into  colour.  I 
do  not  intend  to  place  before  you  the  various 
theories  which  have  been  propounded  as  to 
the  method  and  mechanism  of  this  transla- 
tion ;  they  involve  numerous  intricate  and 
obscure  physical,  chemical,  physiological, 
and  psychological  problems.  But  I  ask 
you  to  accept,  as  the  best  of  all  working 
hypotheses,  the  view  of  the  subject  taken  by 
Dr.  Thomas  Young  in  1802,  and  since  de- 
veloped by  Helmholtz,  Maxwell,  and  Rood. 
The  idea  that  there  are  three  primary  colours 
must  be  abandoned,  but  that  of  three  primary 
colour-sensations  may  be  very  conveniently 
accepted,  at  least  provisionally.  What  selec- 
tion shall  be  made  has  been  debated  on 
various  grounds.  Several  triads  have  been 
chosen,  but  a  certain  red,  a  certain  green,  and 
a  certain  blue  have  been  accepted  by  some  of 
the  most  distinguished  investigators  of  the 
subject.  I  venture  to  add  my  own  testimony 
as  to  the  superiority  of  the  triad  of  red,  green, 
blue,  over  that  of  red,  green,  violet.  With 
lights  which  provoke  these  three  colour-sensa- 
tions we  can  obtain  all  the  colours  of  the 
spectrum  as  well  as  the  purples  which  do  not 
exist  therein.  Equivalents— I  say,  equivalents, 
not  equal  quantities — of  the  standard  or  normal 
red  and  green  produce  the  normal  yellow  ;  of 
the  standard  or  normal  green  and  blue  pro- 
duce the  normal  sea-green  ;  of  the  standard  or 
normal  blue  and  red,  the  normal  purple.  Inter- 
mediate colours  are  produced  when  the  quanti- 
ties of  the  two  lights,    which  are   together 


received  by  the  eye,  are  not  equivalent.  Thus 
with  red  and  green  an  excess  of  red  produces 
orange  ;  with  green,  and  blue,  an  excess  of 
green  produces  a  greenish  sea-green  ;  with 
blue  and  red,  an  excess  of  blue  produces  a 
bluish  purple  or  violet.  No  tertiary  colour  is 
possible,  the  colours  called  tertiary  by  artists 
being  broken  tints  of  the  three  primaries  and 
of  the  three  normal  secondaries.  In  fact,  if 
you  mix  the  three  normal  coloured  lights  in 
their  proper  equivalents  together,  you  get 
nothing  but  white,  or  grey  if  the  brightness  of 
the  lights  be  small ;  and  if  you  mix  these 
three  normal  lights  together  in  any  other  than 
equivalent  proportions,  you  get  tints  of  the 
primary  or  secondary  colours — that  is,  these 
colours  mixed  with  white.  By  using  the  initial 
letters  of  the  various  normal  colours  to  repre- 
sent their  equivalents,  we  may  place  the  above 
results  in  the  form  of  equations,  which  we  will 
give  after  the  manner  adopted  by  chemists  : — 

R  -\-  G  =  Y,  or  yellow. 
2  R  -f-  G  z=  O,  or  orange. 

G  -|-  B  =  S,  or  sea  green. 
2  G  -f-  B  =  greenish  sea  green. 

B  +  R  =  P,  or  purple. 
2  B  +  R  =  V,  or  violet. 

R  +  G  +  B  =  W,  or  white. 
2R4-G-f-B  =  W  +  R,  or  pale  red. 
2R  +  2G  +  B  =  W  +  Y,  or  pale  yeUow. 

R  +  2G-J-2B  =  W-f-S,  or  pale  sea  green. 
2  R  +  G  +  2  B  =  W  +  P,  or  pale  purple. 

An  essential  difference  between  the  colours 
produced  by  mixing  lights  and  those  produced 
by  mixing  pigments  consists  in  this,  that  the 
addition  or  commixture  of  lights  produces  in- 
crease of  brightness,  while  the  commixture  of 
pigments  diminishes  brightness.  This  differ- 
ence of  result  is  caused  by  the  fact  that  the 
mixture  of  two  lights  possesses  the  added 
brightness  of  each  of  its  elements,  while  the 
colour  resulting  from  the  mixture  of  two  pig- 
ments possesses  merely  the  residual  bright- 
ness left  after  a  twofold  or  manifold  absorption 
of  light.  For  when  blue  and  red  lights  are 
mingled  on  the  retina,  the  eye  receives  the 
combined  brightness  of  both  ;  but  when  the 
blue  and  red  pigments  are  mingled,  the  eye 
receives  only  that  portion  of  the  light  which 
has  escaped  the  absorptive  action  of  both  the 
blue  and  the  red  pigments.  In  this  and 
similar  cases  the  dulness  arising  from  absorp- 
tion is  very  marked,  and  an  artist  who  wishes 
to  secure  the  greatest  possible  brilliancy  in 
his  work  avoids,  wherever  he  can,  the  com- 
mixture of  pigments,  rather  placing  touches  of 


colour  side  by  side,  so  that  the  colours  they 
severally  reflect  shall  mingle  on  the  retina ; 
the  works  of  Samuel  Palmer,  William  Hunt, 
and  J.  F.  Lewis  may  be  named  as  illustrating 
this  method. 

But  there  is  a  second  difference  between  the 
colours  produced  by  mingling  lights  and  those 
produced  by  mingling  pigments.     This  differ- 
ence is  not  one  of  brightness  or  of  purity  ;  it 
is  a  difference  of  hue.     You  know  the  effect  of 
mingling  yellow  and  blue  pigments  together 
on  the  palette  is  the  production  of  a  green, 
more  or  less  decided  and  bright,  according  to 
the  chromatic  constitution  of  the  two  pigments 
employed.     But  the  commixture  of  yellow  and 
blue  lights  in  equivalent  proportions  results  in 
the  production  of  white  more  or  less  bright— 
that   is,    either  white   or   a   shade   of  grey — 
according  to  the  brightness  of  its  constituents. 
If  there  be  an  excess  of  yellow  light  the  colour 
produced  is  pale  yellow  ;    if  an  excess  of  blue, 
pale  blue.     You  may  prove  this  point  by  the 
use  of  Maxwell's  rotating  sectors.      Take  the 
same  two  pigments,  chrome  yellow  and  ultra- 
marine  blue,    which   mingled  on   the   palette 
produce    green— rather    a    dull    green  —  and 
mingle  the  lights    they  reflect,   by  the  method 
of  rotation,  on  the  retina,  and  you  get  a  white 
of  low  luminosity,  that  is,  a  grey.      But,  as  in 
this  case,  there  is  not  the  double  absorption 
produced  by  the  commixture  of  pigments,  the 
grey  is  brighter  than  the  green  made  by  such 
commixture,  and  you  will  have  to  add  much 
black  to  it  (by  means  of  a  third  sector  of  black) 
to  obtain  the  same  low  degree  of  luminosity  by 
rotation.  I  have  purposely  selected  for  citation 
this  case  of  the  mingling  of  blue  and  yellow, 
because  it  is  the  crucial  instance  by  means 
of  which  is  most  strikingly  shown  the  differ- 
ence in  hue  above-named,  and  it  also  serves 
to  demonstrate  the  fallacy  of  the  still  prevalent 
notion    that  blue   and   yellow  lights   produce 
green.  When  green  is  formed  by  the  mingling 
of  two  pigments,   one  yellow,  the  other  blue, 
this  result  is  attained  by  the  suppression  of  the 
yellow  and  blue  and  the  survival  of  the  green 
which  was  present  in  both.     So  when  white 
light,  transmitted  through  a  yellow  and  a  blue 
glass,  appears  green,  it  is  the  residual  green 
which  has  escaped  absorption  by  both  glasses 
which  colours  the  emergent  light.     We  know 
that  the  simple  yellow  of  the  spectrum,   and 
the  compound  yellow  produced  by  the  mixture 
of  red  and  green  lights,   affect  the  red   and 
green  nerve-fibrils  of  the  retina  in  exactly  the 
same  way,  and  it  is  for  this  reason  that  we 
affirm    that    yellow    is   a    compound    colour- 


sensation,  and  not  one  of  the  three  primaries 
I  do  not  now  dwell  further  on  this  point,  as  I 
I  have  dealt  with  it  at  length  in  chapter  vii.  of 
my  "  Elementary  Manual  of  Colour,"  to  which 
I  beg  to  refer  you  for  a  fuller  treatment  of  the 
differences  between  mixtures  of  lights  and 
mixtures  of  pigments.  I  ought,  perhaps,  to 
mention  here  that  the  advocates  of  the  red- 
green-blue  theory  of  three  primary  colour- 
sensations,  while  denying  the  truth  of  the 
explanations  afforded  by  the  red-yellow-blue 
theory  of  Brewster,  do  not  contest  the  occur- 
rence of  the  chromatic  phenomena  presented 
by  the  admixture  of  pigments,  or  by  the  trans- 
mission of  light  through  coloured  media,  which 
Brewster's  theory  incorrectly  interprets. 

Classification  and  Nomenclature  of 
Colours.  —  The  simplest  arrangement  of 
colours  must  include  white,  a  balanced  or 
neutralised  compound  of  two  or  more  hues  ; 
black,  the  negative  correlative  of  light  and 
colour ;  and  the  positive  hues,  with  their  tints, 
shades,  and  broken  tints.  In  bare  outline  it 
may  be  given  thus  :  — 

Darkness Black. 

I  r,      ,  ( White. 

Colourless..  .     , 

(  Greys,  or  shades  of  white. 

Light.,  i  (Hues. 

|  Coloured  . .  ■  Tints,  shades,  and  broken 

\     tints  of  hues. 

But  directly  we  endeavour  to  enter  into  further 
details,  to  give  quantitative  values  and  appro- 
priate names  to  our  many  materials,  we  are 
confronted  by  serious  difficulties.    Whites  and 
greys  must  have  their  brightness  determined ; 
all  other  tones  require  the  determination   of 
the  three  constants  of  colour,   namely,  hue, 
purity,  and  brightness.     The  fixed  lines  of  the 
pure  normal  solar  spectrum  enable  us,   it  is 
true,  to   locate  all  pure  and   saturated  hues 
save  the  purples.     Prismatic  analysis  reveals 
the  chromatic    elements  of  any  colour  ;    the 
methods  of  shadow  photometry  enable   us  to 
ascertain   relative   luminosities,    but    the    in- 
telligible expression  of  our  results  in  reference 
to  definite  standards  has  not  yet  been  attained. 
The  problem  is,  moreover,  greatly  complicated 
by  reason  of  certain  modifications  of  tone  or 
of  hue  caused  by  contrast,  dilution  with  white, 
&c,  &c,  as  well  as  by  the  immense  number 
of  colours,  with  their  shades  and  tints,  which 
the  human  eye  is  competent  to  distinguish. 

Of  the  modes  of  classifying  colours,  the  cone 
of  W.  von  Bczold  and  the  cube  of  W.  Benson 
have  many  merits,  but  are  not  free  from  limita- 
tions and  even  defects.     The  colour-cube  may 


be  described  in  a  couple  of  sentences,  so  far 
at  least  as  its  principle  of  construction  is  con- 
cerned. At  one  solid  angle  of  the  cube  black, 
or  the  absence  of  light  is  placed,  at  the 
opposite  solid  angle  white.  At  the  three  solid 
angles  nearest  to  black,  the  full  red,  green, 
and  blue  are  respectively  placed,  while  at  the 
three  corresponding  and  opposite  solid  angles 
nearest  to  white  the  three  complementary 
secondaries  occur,  namely,  sea-green,  purple, 
and  yellow.  The  beautiful  diagrams  in  Mr. 
\V.  Benson's  "  Principles  of  the  Science  of 
Colour"  will  fully  explain  the  position  of  tints 
and  shades  in  the  cube. 

The  chromatic  arrangement  of  Chevreul  is 
vitiated  by  the  adoption  therein  of  the  erroneous 
theory  of  the  red-yellow-triad,  nor  are  the  hues 
represented  referred  to  a  definite  standard. 
Radde's  colour-chart,  though  nominally  based 
on  certain  spectrum  colours,  lacks  precision  in 
plan  and  execution.  The  scales  of  Lovibond's 
tintometer  are  represented  by  numbered  and 
named  glasses,  referred  to  a  certain  arbitrarily- 
fixed  pale  tint  of  which  the  value  of  one  unit  is 
given,  and  then  the  true  chromatic  elements 
of  these  glasses  have  not  been  determined. 

The  nomenclature  of  colours  is  intimately 
connected  with  their  classification.  It  has 
difficulties  all  its  own  owing  to  (i)  the  shifting 
meaning  of  well-known  colour  names  ;  (2)  the 
difficulty  of  coining  new  names.  Purple  some- 
times means  dark  blue,  sometimes  a  colour 
half-way  between  violet  and  crimson.  The  old 
German  verb  bleucii,  to  strike  or  beat,  has 
originated  the  modern  German  blauen,  and 
there  is  no  longer  a  distinction  between  the 
procedure  of  the  schoolmaster  and  the  laun- 
dress, though  blauen  is  given  in  some  diction- 
aries for  to  dye  blue,  blauen  to  beat  blue,  but 
bliiue  is  the  colour  blue.  The  system,  if  such 
it  can  be  called,  of  the  mineralogist  Werner 
(1774)  included  92  terms  arranged  in  nine 
groups.  It  lacks  accuracy  and  orderly 
sequence,  but  is  of  interest  in  showing  the 
use  of  terms  for  designating  colours  derived 
from  certain  typical,  animal,  vegetable  and 
mineral  substances,  the  hues  of  which  vary  but 
little.     (See  "Colour,"  page  63.) 

The  long  list  of  colour-names  given  to  silks 
by  the  Lyons  manufacturers  will  furnish  some 
expressive  terms,  but  many  of  the  names  are 
quite  arbitrary  and  fanciful.  R.  Ridgway's 
"Nomenclature  of  Colours  for  Naturalists" 
(Boston,  U.S.A.,  1887),  is  useful  in  giving  at 
once  many  colour-names,  and  actual  water- 
colour  washes  of  pigments  representing  them. 
Unfortunately,  many  of  these  names  are  very 


vague  (dahlia,  aster,  phlox),  and  they  are 
placed  in  an  order  based  on  no  recognisable 
chromatic  system.  The  51  degrees  of  the 
cyanometcr,  for  measuring  the  blue  of  the 
sky,  serve  to  define  its  tone  only,  not  its  hue 
nor  its  purity. 

We  want  an  international  colour  conference, 
in  which  artists,  manufacturers,  and  scientists 
shall  be  represented.  We  want  an  agreement 
upon  the  names  to  be  assigned  to  a  number  of 
different  hues.  We  want  representations  of 
these  standard  hues  reproduced  in  enamel, 
preserved  like  our  standards  of  weight  and 
measure,  and  distributed  to  every  educational 
institution  in  the  United  Kingdom. 

For  my  own  part,  I  should  be  content  to 
employ  a  combination  of  the  systems  of  name 
and  of  number  in  the  nomenclature  and 
classifying  of  colours.  The  importance  of 
having  a  definite  nomenclature,  of  quite 
intelligible  character,  at  our  disposal,  when 
we  are  talking  or  writing  about  the  decorative 
employment  of  colour,  is  so  important  that  I 
venture  to  make  a  few  suggestions  which  may 
tend  towards  the  attainment  of  this  object. 

Let,  then,  equivalents  for  the  full  red,  the 
full  green,  and  the  full  blue  (as  already 
described),  be  represented  by  the  symbols  R, 
G,  B,  the  seagreen,  the  purple,  and  the 
yellow,  which  are  the  several  complementaries 
of  the  above  hues,  being  similarly  expressed 
by  the  symbols  GB,  RB,  and  RG.  The 
capital  letter  represents  the  hue  ;  where  no 
number  is  subscript,  1  equivalent  is  meant; 
for  lower  or  higher  luminosities  decimals  are 
used.  If  the  sea-green,  to  select  one  in- 
stance, inclines  towards  green,  that  is,  has 
more  than  one  equivalent  of  green  in  it, 
we  may  easily  express  this  modification 
of  blue  by  a  fractional  addition  to  the  symbol 
for  green,  and  a  simultaneous  fractional  sub- 
traction from  the  symbol  for  blue.  Such  a 
series  would  result  as  this  :  — 


GB 

GVI  B 

G,-2  B 

Gri'3  B 

G,-4  B 

Gi-S  B 

Gr6  B 

Gr,  B 

Gr8  B 

Gi-9  B 
G 


=  Seagreen. 


5   :=  Greenish  Seagreen. 

4 
3 


=  Green, 


The  corresponding  modifications  in  the  five 
other  principal  series  of  colours  would  be  ex- 


pressed  in  a  similar  manner,  the  symbols,  ecc, 
being  used  exactly  in  the  same  way  as  in 
chemical  notation.  In  order  to  obtain  a  scale 
in  a  concrete  form,  I  would  recommend  the  use 
of  Maxwell's  rotation  method,  by  which  each 
step  in  the  gradation  could  be  matched.  I 
would  use  for  the  series  between  sea  green 
and  green  two  discs  painted  with  as  near  an 
approach  as  possible  to  the  full  normal  green 
and  the  full  normal  blue,  and  the  former 
should  be  increased  and  the  latter  diminished 
(in  the  form  of  sectors)  in  accordance  with  the 
system  I  have  suggested.  The  rotation  colour 
produced  at  each   step  should  be  copied,   or 


rather  matched,  and  would  then  take  its  place 
in  the  series  with  a  definite  symbol  attached 
to  it.  By  the  introduction  of  a  white  sector 
similarly  treated,  the  tints  of  any  colour  could 
be  made  to  match  ;  with  a  black  sector  the 
shades,  with  a  black  and  white  sector  the 
broken  tints.  The  symbol  for  black  may  be 
conveniently  called  Z,  that  for  white  should  be 
R  G  B  or  \V,  as  the  case  may  require.  But  it 
is  also  possible  to  express  the  shades  of  a 
colour  by  reducing  its  luminosity,  and  the 
broken  tints  by  at  once  reducing  its  luminosity 
and  adding  white.  Here  are  the  symbolic  ex- 
pressions or  formula;  for  such  changed  hues  ;  — 


S  =  GB  =  Seagreen. 

S-q  =  Gq  B  9         =  A  shade  of,  or  darkened,  Seagreen. 

S\V  ,      =1  GBW-i  =  A  tint  of,  or  a  pale,  Seagreen. 

S-9  W-t  =  G-9  B-9  W-,  =  A  broken  tint  of,  or  a  dull,  Seagreen. 


In  the  case  of  pigments  or  other  coloured 
materials  the  proposed  symbols,  though  quite 
exact  enough  for  any  purpose  for  which  they 
are  employed,  will  not  admit  of  accurate 
analysis.  This  is  due  to  the  fact  that  no  pig- 
ment reflects  a  pure  coloured  light,  there  is 
always  some  white  mingled  with  it,  rarely  less 
than  20  per  cent,  of  the  whole.  And  even  with 
coloured  lights  there  are  also  variable  sources 
of  error,  for  the  addition  of  white  light  to 
coloured  light,  and  also  the  reduction  of  its 
luminosity,  alters  the  original  hue.  To  this 
change,  which  occurs  also  with  pigments,  and 
often  in  a  very  conspicuous  manner,  I  shall 
invite  your  attention  shortly. 

Luminosity  of  Pigments. — One  often  hears 
the  remark  with  reference  to  a  work  in  black 
and  white,  an  etching  or  line-engraving,  for 
example,  representing  a  coloured  picture,  that 
it  has  got  good  colour  in  it.  Such  an  expres- 
sion may  be  interpreted  to  mean  that  the 
relative  tones  of  the  original  are  preserved  in 
the  copy,  and  suggest  the  force  of  the  original 
colours.  Now  it  requires  much  experience 
and  singular  skill  thus  to  value  and  interpret 
the  relative  luminosity  of  differently  coloured 
portions  of  a  painting.  An  aid  in  the  work  of 
translation  is  afforded  by  making  determina- 
tions of  luminosity  or  brightness  by  means  of 
shadow-photometry,  or  by  comparing  the 
b'ightness  of  various  white  and  coloured 
materials  with  the  brightness  of  greys  of 
known  composition.  The  latter  method, 
though  not  very  easy  or  very  exact,  involving 
the  use  of  black  and  white  sectors  in  the 
rotation  apparatus,  gives  results  which  are,  at 
all  events,  approximately  true.     These  results 


represent  the  comparative  luminosities  of  the 
particular  specimens  of  pigments,  &c,  em- 
ployed, and  vary  somewhat  with  the  method 
of  applying  the  pigment,  its  thickness,  and 
the  medium  (if  any)  used.  The  following 
figures  were  obtained  in  this  way,  some  by 
Professor  Rood  and  others  by  myself:  — 

Chinese  white,   dry,   in  thick  layer 

on  pastel  paper - 100 

Plain  white  paper 90-9 

Whatman's  paper  (not  hot-pressed)  88-2 
Chrome  yellow,    pale   water-colour 

wash    73'° 

Emerald  green,  pale,  in  thick  paste  44-2 

Cobalt  blue,  water-colour  wash 32-2 

Vermilion,  in  thick  paste 23-4 

Natural  Ultramarine   8-3 

Artificial  Ultramarine 6-9 

Black  paper    \", 

Lamp  black,  dry,  in  thick  layer  on 

pastel  paper   "8 

I  cannot  help  thinking  that  a  more  extended 
series  of  comparative  luminosities  would  prove 
useful  to  the  translators  into  black  and  white 
of  works  executed  in  colour. 

Effects  of  Varying  Illumination. — The 
very  considerable  alteration  of  appearance  ex- 
perienced by  coloured  materials  when  the  hue 
of  the  light  by  which  they  are  rendered  visible 
is  changed,  is  rendered  familiar  to  us  by  the 
case  of  pictures  and  dresses,  seen  first  by 
candlelight  and  then  by  ordinary  daylight. 
We  discover  that  what  we  thought  was  purple 
is  really  violet,  crimson  is  purple,  green  is 
blue,  and  so  forth.  The  deficiency  of  the 
more  refrangible  rays  of  the  blue  end  of  the 


spectrum,  and  the  superabundance  of  the  less 
refrangible  rays  of  the  red  region  in  the  light 
of  burning  oil  and  gas,  and  even  in  that 
emitted  by  incandescence  electric  lamps, 
furnish  the  explanation  of  these  changes.  It 
is  of  course  more  conspicuously  evident  when 
we  view  richly  and  variously  coloured  objects 
in  a  light  which  is  virtually  monochromatic. 
The  pure  orange  yellow  of  sodium  cannot 
furnish  the  vibrations  to  which  the  majority  of 
hues  are  alone  capable  of  responding  ;  only 
what  is  yellow  can  be  seen,  and  even  in  this 
case  not  the  yellow  compounded  of  red  and 
green  vibrations.  But  I  must  not  enlarge  upon 
this  point,  as  it  has  been  often  treated,  and  at 
length,  elsewhere  ;  and  I  want  to  direct  your 
attention  to  those  changes  of  hue  in  coloured 
objects  which  are  caused  by  alterations,  not 
in  the  hue  of  the  incident  light,  but  in  its 
brightness.  The  observant  student  of  Nature 
will  have  learnt  that  the  hues  of  many- 
coloured  objects  are  most  characteristically 
brought  out  by  a  comparatively  moderate 
illumination.  The  chief  cause  of  this  pheno- 
menon is  often  traceable  to  the  large  excess  of 
unaltered  white  light,  which  such  objects 
reflect  or  scatter  when  the  illumination  is 
intense,  while  when  the  illumination  is  mode- 
rate it  just  suffices  to  develop  properly  the 
particular  hue  of  the  material.  I  recollect  a 
case  in  point.  Wishing  one  day  to  show  to  a 
connoisseur  in  precious  stones  a  fine  aurora- 
coloured  zircon,  which  had  lately  been  cut  for 
me,  I  took  the  specimen  into  the  sunshine. 
The  colour  was  so  altered  and  so  impoverished 
that  my  pride  in  the  recent  acquisition  was 
humbled  ;  the  stone  was  distinctly  inferior  to 
a    similar  specimen  in  the  British    Museum. 


This  pallor  was  not  the  result  of  the  glittering 
reflections  from  the  polished  facets  of  the 
gem,  but  the  coloured  light  reflected  to  the 
eye  from  the  lower  facets  was  greatly  reduced 
in  purity  by  much  admixture  of  white  light. 
Out  of  the  strong  light  the  specimen  resumed 
its  rich  and  beautiful  appearance,  and  showed, 
moreover,  not  only  a  much  deeper  but  a  much 
redder  and  less  yellow  hue  than  when  sunlight 
fell  upon  it.  Painters  have  long  been  familiar 
with  such  changes  of  hue.  If  you  examine 
the  works  of  the  great  colourists  of  the  Italian 
schools  you  will  see  many  striking  examples 
of  their  appreciation  of  this  natural  phe- 
nomenon ;  indeed,  I  may  say  that  these 
changes  of  hue  with  changes  in  the  brightness 
of  the  illumination  have  been  not  infrequently 
much  accentuated,  even  greatly  exaggerated. 
At  all  events,  artists  have  long  known  that  the 
high  lights  of  a  self-coloured  drapery  cannot 
be  properly  represented  by  merely  adding 
white— that  is,  by  forming  tints  of  the  same 
hne— although  it  does  indeed  sometimes 
happen  that  the  addition  of  white  paint  to 
one  having  positive  and  strong  colour  brings 
about  changes  of  hue  analogous  to  those  we 
have  been  considering.  Be  it  remembered 
that  I  am  not  now  speaking  of  those  purely 
accidental  modifications  of  hue  which  are 
caused  by  reflections  from  coloured  objects, 
and  which  often  cause  a  white  drapery  to 
assume  the  beautiful  orient  tints  of  the  pearl. 

If  increase  of  light  above  what  we  may  call 
a  normal  standard  (one  capable  of  showing  in 
perfection  a  colour)  effects  a  change  in  hue,  so 
also  does  decrease  of  light,  although  in  an 
opposite  direction.  These  changes  of  hue  are 
well  brought  out  in  the  following  Table  :  — 


Decreased  Light.  Standard  Light.  Increased  Light. 

Purplish Red Scarlet. 

Red Scarlet     Reddish  Orange. 

Brown Orange    Yellow. 

Olive  Green     Yellow    Paler  Yellow. 

Greener   Yellow-Green    Yellower. 

Greener   Blue-Green    Bluer. 

Violet-Blue     Blue     Turquoise. 

Violet Violet-Blue    Blue. 

Violet-Purple Violet Bluer. 

Purplish-  Violet Purple Red- Purple. 


Similar  changes  of  hue  occur  when  coloured 
lights  instead  of  coloured  objects  are  reduced 
or  increased  in  brightness.  Thus  by  lowering 
the  luminosity  of  a  pure  solar  spectrum,  there 
will  not  only  be  a  selective  reduction  or  even 
extinction  of  some  of  the  constituent  hues,  but 
also  a  shifting  of  the  position  of  the  hues.    The 


red  will  invade  the  orange  region,  so  that  the 
line  I),  for  example,  will  be  bordered  by  a  kind 
of  red-lead  colour ;  the  green  will  extend  to- 
wards the  sea-green,  and  even  include  the  line 
F,  and  the  pure  blue  will  contract.  We  should 
then  describe  the  darkened  spectrum  as  prac- 
tically consisting  of  red,  green,  and  violet.  By 


a  further  reduction  of  brightness  the  red  will 
become  brownish,  and  the  green  and  violet 
dull.  In  the  next  stage  the  violet  disappears, 
the  green  is  more  dim,  while  the  brownish-red 
acquires  a  sort  of  chocolate  hue.  The  last 
colour  to  be  recognised  is  a  very  faint  green 
hue.  I  ought  to  mention  in  this  place  that 
when  white  light  is  added  to  coloured  light 
the  changes  of  hue  which  occur  are  generally 
to  be  explained  by  the  statement  that  they  are 
such  as  would  be  produced  by  a  slight  ad- 
mixture of  blue  light  with  the  white  light. 

The  bearing  of  these  observations  upon 
pictorial  and  decorative  work  in  colour  are 
obviously  of  considerable  moment.  If  we  want 
to  be  sure  of  the  chromatic  effect  of  a  decora- 
tive scheme  we  must  arrange  and  modify  its 
elements  in  such  a  way  as  to  adapt  it  to  the 
usual  illumination  of  the  apartments  in  which 
it  is  to  be  carried  out ;  and  here  one  curious 
result  may  be  noted.  In  a  very  dimly  lighted 
room,  saturated  and  comparatively  pure 
colours  may  yield  delicate  and  refined  har- 
monies, while  the  same  colours  in  a  blaze  of 
strong  daylight,  or  direct  sunshine,  may  also 
lose  their  garishness  because  of  the  large 
amount  of  white  light  which  then  becomes 
mingled  with  the  proper  hues  they  reflect. 
But  with  a  medium  illumination  these  satu- 
rated colours,  if  freely  used,  become  intoler- 
able, just  because  they  are  perceived  in  their 
original  strength.  We  thus  learn  how  it  is 
that  a  scheme  of  colouring,  which  seems 
exquisitely  choice  when  occurring  in  the  dimly 
lighted  apartments  of  a  Cairo  or  Damascus 
house,  may  become  to  the  last  degree  crude 
when  transferred  to  the  full  illumination  of  an 
English  home,  where  the  walls  are  pierced 
with  large  windows  of  plate-glass  admitting 
floods  of  light.  The  employment,  under  such 
altered  conditions,  of  colours  saddened  with 
black  and  dulled  with  grey,  has  been  long 
recognised  and  practised  as  one  of  the  easiest 
ways  of  modifying  the  crude  effect  of  such 
chromatic  arrangements.  If  saturated  colours 
are  still  used  we  reduce  their  area,  or  employ 
them  in  such  small  and  involved  touches  that 
the  mingling  of  their  hues  produces  what  Owen 
Jones  called  a  neutralised  bloom. 

Before  I  leave  this  important  subject  (of  the 
effects  of  varying  degrees  of  illumination  upon 
the  hues  of  objects),  I  wish  to  direct  your 
attention  to  a  very  simple  and  decisive  class 
of  experiments,  by  means  of  which  some 
of  these  changes  of  hue  of  which  I  have 
spoken  may  be  recognised.  You  need 
only    take    some    pieces    of    richly    coloured 


material,  paper,  cloth,  or  silk,  of  uniform  hue, 
and  partially  crush  and  fold  them,  so  as  to 
get  various  portions  illuminated  in  different 
degrees.  An  orange  coloured  silk  will  look 
yellow  in  its  high  lights,  and  brown  in  its 
hollows.  A  blue  paper  will  appear  violet  in 
its  shaded  parts,  and  of  a  purer  blue,  or 
perhaps  of  a  somewhat  greenish  blue,  in  its 
projecting  portions.  A  crimson  cloth  will 
seem  scarlet  where  it  catches  most  light,  and 
crimson  where  it  reflects  the  least.  These 
changes  of  hue  are  in  part  due  to  errors  of 
judgment,  but  they  are  none  the  less  real. 

Our  next  subject  for  study  is  intimately 
allied  with  that  we  have  just  been  considering. 
I  regret  that  the  narrow  limits  of  my  available 
time  will  permit  me  to  give  little  more  than  the 
barest  reference  to  it.  I  refer  to  the  alteration 
of  hue  caused  by  the  addition  of  white,  of 
grey,  and  of  black  to  a  pigment.  White  added 
to  a  red  pigment  does  not  usually  produce  just 
a  paler  tint  of  red,  but  the  new  tint  varies  in 
hue,  tending  in  some  cases  towards  crimson, 
in  others  towards  scarlet.  The  dilution  of  a 
transparent  red  pigment  with  a  colourless 
medium— that  is,  attenuation  of  its  thickness — 
produces  analogous  alterations  of  hue.  Similar 
changes  are  caused  in  pigments  ot  other 
colours  by  dilution  and  by  commixture  with 
white  substances.  Some  of  the  changes  pro- 
duced by  adding  black  are  perhaps  more 
striking.  Rood  found  that,  on  mixing  carmine 
with  lamp-black,  the  mixture  on  the  palette 
was  more  purplish  in  hue  than  the  colours 
obtained  by  mingling  the  pigments  optically 
by  the  method  of  rotation.  This  approach 
to  purple  was  of  course  due  to  addition,  with 
the  black,  of  more  blue  to  the  carmine.  An 
analogous  observation,  also  due  to  Rood, 
relates  to  the  admixture  of  black  with  white. 
Black  pigments  as  free  as  possible  from 
any  tinge  of  positive  colour  are  generally  ob- 
served to  yield  a  bluish-grey  when  mixed  with 
white  pigments.  This  result  has  usually  been 
attributed  to  the  fineness  of  the  particles  pro- 
ducing a  blue  by  the  same  action  on  the  light 
as  an  opalescent  medium  exerts.  But  Rood 
found  that  when  white  and  black  are  mingled 
optically  on  a  rotating  disc,  the  grey  they  yield 
is  matched  in  hue  (not  in  brightness)  by  a 
white  disc  into  which  much  blue  (in  one  case 
17  per  cent.)  has  been  introduced  by  means  of 
a  sector  covered  with  a  strong  wash  of  indigo. 
Dickroism  is  the  next  topic  for  our  study. 
This  term  has  been  applied  to  similar  phe- 
nonema  produced  in  similar  ways.  A  liquid  or 
solid  is  said   to   be   dichroic   when  the  light 


8 


which  is  transmitted  through  it  differs  in  hue 
as  well  as  in  tone  when  the  thickness  traversed 
differs.  Many  liquids,  such  as  solutions  of 
double  potassium  and  chromium  oxalate,  and 
potassium  permanganate,  well  illustrate  the 
phenomenon,  so  do  many  solids,  such  as  copper 
sulphate,  and  several  kinds  of  coloured  glass 
and  gelatine  films.  But  there  is  another  kind 
of  dichroism  occurring  in  solids  which  are  not 
optically  homogeneous.  Many  crystals  are 
dichroic,  or  even  pleiochroic,  for  when  white 
light  is  sent  through  them  in  different  direc- 
tions it  suffers  thereby  different  selective 
absorptions,  and  so  the  emergent  beams  are 
differently  coloured.  The  ruby,  the  emerald, 
and  the  tourmaline  amongst  precious  stones 
are  characteristic  examples  of  this  group  of 
dichroic  phenomena.  Even  a  third  class  or 
group  may  be  named,  where  the  light  trans- 
mitted differs  in  colour  from  that  reflected  and 
scattered,  solutions  of  chlorophyll  and  of 
uranin,  and  the  solids  uranium  glass  and  fluor 
spar  belong  here. 

The  first  class  of  dichroic  phenomena 
(depending  upon  the  thickness  of  the  coloured 
medium)  is  largely  concerned  with  the  pro- 
duction of  beautiful  quality  in  colour,  as  we 
shall  see  in  the  next  lecture.  It  depends  upon 
the  increasing  absorption  of  certain  of  the  con- 
stituents of  white  light  with  increasing  thick- 
ness of  the  medium.     Thus,  a  solution  of  blue 


vitriol  or,  better  still,  a  crystal,  allows  blue, 
green,  and  yellow  light  to  pass  through  it  if  it 
be  thin,  but  when  thick  only  blue.  Analogous 
phenomena  are  shown  by  purple  films  of 
gelatine,  and  by  a  solution  of  chromium 
potassium  oxalate.  These  are  cases  of  in- 
creasing selective  absorption  where  waves  of 
certain  coloured  lights  can  pass  in  some 
measure  through  weak  solutions  or  thin  layers, 
but  are  at  last  completely  stopped  or  absorbed 
by  layers  of  increased  thickness. 

The  Chromatic  Circle.— \  can  dwell  no 
longer  on  this  very  convenient  mode  of  arrang- 
ing an  orderly  sequence  of  colours  than  will 
just  suffice  to  explain  the  uses  which  I  shall 
have  to  make  of  it  in  subsequent  lectures.  The 
disc  of  which  our  chromatic  circle  is  the 
boundary  may  be  regarded  as  the  base  of  a 
colour  cone,  differing  from  that  of  von  Bezold 
in  the  approximately  correct  angular  positions 
accorded  to  the  several  colours  which  find 
place  in  the  circle. 

I  have  followed  in  the  main  the  construction 
given  by  Rood  to  the  chromatic  circle,  but  I 
have  not  adopted  his  nomenclature,  except 
in  a  few  cases,  while  I  have  used  capital 
letters  to  indicate  the  hues  corresponding  to  the 
three  primary  colour-sensations,  and  have  em- 
phasized these  and  their  complementary  secon- 
daries by  joining  them  by  diameter  lines  of 
extra  thickness.     (See  diagram.)* 


Crimson 
Heel-Purple, 
Put-pie 


RED 


Purple-Violet 


Violet, 
Violet -blue. 


BLUE 


Jurqut. 


Orange -Yellow 


GreenishYellow 
'Green-Yellow 

'Yellowish  Green 


Greenish-blue 


'EEN 
Emerald  Green 
Bluish  Green 


Green-Blue 


Professor  Rood  determined  the  position  of 
his  normal  red  ("spectral  red"),  in  a  pure 
solar  normal  spectrum,  and  found  it  to  be  at 
285,  when  the  space  between  the  fixed  lines  A 
and  H  was  divided  into  1,000  equal  parts. 
Similarly  his  normal  green  is  situated  at  600, 
and  his  natural  ultramarine  at  785.  His  normal 
blue  was  taken  at  a  point  nearer  the  blue-green 


side  of  lapis-lazuli  than  that  which  I  am  able 
to  accept.  The  three  primaries  I  adopt  are 
approached  very  closely  in  hue  by  the  follow- 
ing pigments  :  — 

Crimson  Vermilion,  for  the  red. 


*  This    diagram    is    reproduced    from    "Colour,"  p.  91 
(Cassells,) 


Emerald  Green  with  a  trace  of  chrome,  for 
the  green. 

Pure  Natural  Ultramarine,  for  the  blue. 

Putting  aside  the  questions  of  purity  and  of 
brightness,  each  one  of  these  three  primaries 
is  neutralised,  so  far  as  hue  is  concerned,  by 
one  of  the  three  secondaries,  thus  — Red,  by 
green  -f-  b'ue  or  seagreen ;  green,  by  blue 
-f-  red  or  purple  ;  blue,  by  red  +  green  or 
yellow.  Thus  the  pairs,  red  and  seagreen, 
green  and  purple,  and  blue  and  yellow,  are 
what  we  call  complementary  colours,  and 
united  produce  in  each  instance  white.  But 
of  course  there  are  an  infinite  number  of  com- 
plementaries,  the  pair  of  colours  at  each 
extremity  of  every  diameter  of  the  circle 
having  the  right  to  be  so  designated.  This, 
however,  is  a  subject  to  which  we  must  return 
in  the  next  lecture,  and  so  I  wish  now  to  con- 
fine our  attention  to  two  other  matters — the 
angular  intervals  which  separate  the  selected 
colours  to  which  I  have  assigned  names,  and 
the  doctrine  of  chromatic  equivalents. 

In  the  earlier  attempts  at  arranging  colours 
in  a  circle,  an  inaccurate  and  quite  arbitrary 
plan  was  adopted  of  placing  the  three  primaries 
at  three  points  equidistant  from  one  another. 
Supposing,  however,  that  we  obtain  a  normal 
diffraction  spectrum,  and  merely  glance  at  the 
position  which  our  three  selected  fundamental 
hues  occupy,  it  will  be  immediately  obvious 
that  the  green  is  separated  from  the  blue 
by  a  smaller  interval  than  that  which  divides 
it  from  the  red.  And  if  we  take  the  nume- 
rical differences  obtained  by  comparing  the 
wave-lengths  of  the  three  fundamental  hues, 
we  shall  arrive  at  the  same  conclusion. 
It  is  by  fixing  the  spectral  position  of 
the  pigments  which  most  nearly  approach 
these  fundamental  hues,  and  consequently 
learning  their  corresponding  wave-lengths, 
that  we  are  enabled  to  assign  approximately 
correct  angular  positions  on  our  chromatic 
circle  to  the  pigments  in  question.  For  the 
practical  purposes  we  now  have  in  view,  the 
allocation  of  proper  positions  to  our  most 
characteristic  pigments  is  the  problem  which 
our  chromatic  circle  is  intended  to  aid  in 
solving. 

Chromatic  Equivalents. — Still  dealing  with 
pigments,  we  may  ask— What  areas  of  com- 
plementary pigments  neutralise  one  another's 
hues  ?  and — What  are  the  equivalents  of  the 
three  fundamentals  as  represented  by  the 
corresponding  pigments  ?  We  can  answer 
these  questions  with  a  sufficient  degree  of 
accuracy    by   means   of  rotation-experiments 


with  sectors  suitably  painted,  using  such  areas 
of  the  different  pigments  as  shall  produce  a 
neutral  grey.  Here  is  one  set  of  results  thus 
obtained  with  a  circle  divided  into  ioo  equal 
degrees  :  — 

Red  (crimson  vermilion)    3^"i 

Green  (emerald  green  and  chrome)  . .   .^o 

Blue  (natural  ultramarine) 26°7 

On  rotation  these  sectors  produced  a  grey 
equal  to  that  derived  from  25  °  white  (paper), 
with  750  black  (paper).  This  large  quantity 
of  black  shows  how  great  a  stride  towards 
darkness  is  made  when  pigments  (owing  their 
colours  to  selective  absorption)  are  used. 
From  the  above  chromatic  equivalents,  re- 
duced to  their  simplest  expressions,  we  get 
the  following  equations  :  — 

Red  =  12.        Green  =  n.        Blue  =  9 
Red      -J-    Green    =    Yellow      =     23 
Green  -(-    Blue      =    Seagreen    =     20 
Blue      +     Red       =     Purple        =     21 

It  will  be  remembered  that  Field,  by  the 
erroneous  method  of  combined  absorption 
through  coloured  glasses,  found  the  following 

equivalents  :  — 

Yellow  =  3 

Red  =  5 

Blue  =  8 

And  on  these  equivalents,  widely  as  they 
differ  from  the  truth,  have  been  based 
those  calculations  generally  current  amongst 
colourists  as  to  the  proportionate  areas  of 
coloured  surfaces,  by  which  a  chromatic 
balance  and  the  so-called  "neutralised 
bloom  "  are  to  be  secured. 

I  may  add  here  that  Rood,  employing  a 
red  paper  of  moderate  brightness  along  with 
emerald  green  and  artificial  ultramarine,  ob- 
tained for  these  pigments  the  following  values 
in  degrees  : — 

Red  =  50.  Green  =  31.  Blue  =  19. 
The  neutral  grey  these  sectors  produced  on 
rotation  was  matched  by  the  rotation  mixture 
of  13  of  white  (paper)  and  87  of  black  (paper). 
These  values  differ,  as  one  expected  they 
would,  from  those  I  previously  gave,  but  they 
lend  no  support  to  the  figures  of  Field.  On 
the  contrary,  they  correspond  to  the  ratio — 

Yellow,  81  :  Red,  50  :  Blue,  19; 
while  Field's  figures,  multiplied  by  10  for  the 
sake  of  easier  comparison,  arc — 

Yellow,  30  :  Red,  50  :  Blue,  80. 

Next  Monday  1  purpose  discussing  further 
the  subject  of  complementaries  and  of  con- 
trasts, inviting  your  attention  also  to  various 
arrangements  of  colours  in  association. 


LECTURE  II.— Delivered   March   24,    1890 


Svj.LAUUS. 


■  Complementary  Colours— Contrast  of  Tone  and  Colour — Harmonies  of  Colour — Combinations  of  Colour, 
Dyads,  Triads,  Tetrads,  &c. — Separation  of  Related  Hues — Throbbing  or  Pulsing  Colour. 


Complementary  Colours. — The  chromatic 
circle,  to  which  I  drew  your  attention  in  last 
Monday's  lecture,  is  also,  you  will  have  seen, 
a  contrast  circle.  On  its  circumference  may 
be  arranged  a  host  of  colours,  limited  in  number 
only  by  the  discriminative  power  of  the  human 
eye  ;  these  colours  will  be  united  in  pairs  by 
the  diameters  connecting  th^m.  Each  colour 
has  its  complementary  in  that  colour  which  is 
1800  off,  that  is,  most  remote  in  position  from 
its  own  place  on  the  circle  ;  the  pair  united  in 
equivalents  from  white  ;  in  other  than  equiva- 
lents one  hue  preponderates,  but  a  tint  is  thus 
formed,  for  it  is  merely  the  uncombined  excess 
which  is  perceived  mingled  with  the  white 
produced  by  the  equivalents.  Conventionally, 
we  speak  of  white  as  present  in  the  centre  of 
the  circle  ;  in  truth,  it  is  present  at  different 
points  on  each  of  all  possible  diameters,  in 
accordance  with  the  value  of  each  chromatic 
equivalent.  And  when  we  concern  ourselves 
with  pigments,  we  shall  soon  discover  that 
their  positions  are  variously  disturbed  by  their 
divergence  from  normal  standards  of  hue, 
purity,  and  brightness. 

Besides  the  numerous  complementary  pairs 
which  we  can  place  and  recognise  on  the 
circle,  there  are  many  corresponding  pairs 
■within  its  area  situated  on  its  diameters ; 
these  are  complementary  tints.  And  outside 
the  circle,  on  the  prolonged  diameters,  will  be 
found  complementary  shades — that  is,  colours 
of  reduced  brightness. 

There  are  several  ways  of  learning  the  com- 
plementary of  any  hue.  In  practice  we  gene- 
rally desire  to  ascertain  the  complementary 
hues  of  coloured  materials  ;  to  this  question 
we  confine  ourselves  now.  As  such  materials 
produce  their  hue  by  selective  absorption,  we 
cannot  expect  to  obtain  white  from  the  union 
of  the  rays  they  send  to  the  eye,  but  must  be 


content  with  a  neutral  grey,  often  with  a  very 
dull  or  dark  grey.  One  method  of  ascertain- 
ing the  complementary  of,  say,  a  pigment, 
consists  in  erecting  a  sheet  of  glass  in  such  a 
way  that  we  can  see  directly  through  it  the 
pigment  of  which  we  want  to  ascertain  the 
complementary  hue.  We  then  cause  an  image 
of  each  of  a  series  of  trial  complementaries  to 
be  seen  by  reflection  on  the  glass,  so  that  the 
direct  and  the  reflected  images  coincide. 
When  the  patch  of  light  thus  produced  has  no 
positive  hue  in  it,  we  know  that  our  trial  com- 
plementary colour  is  the  true  one.  But  this 
method  is  troublesome,  and  so  we  generally 
use  another,  mixing  the  lights  reflected  from 
the  pair  of  colours  by  rotating  coloured  sectors. 
The  case  of  brown  paper  is  generally  taken  in 
order  to  illustrate  this  method.  We  prepare  a 
disc  of  such  paper,  and  associate  it  with  such 
angular  amounts  of  other  discs  as  shall  pro- 
duce on  rotation  a  neutral  grey.  In  this  parti- 
cular instance  Rood  found  that  it  required  45 
parts  of  artificial  ultramarine  and  14  parts  of 
emerald  green  to  produce  a  greenish  blue 
which  should  neutralise  41  parts  of  brown 
paste-board  colour.  The  grey  these  comple- 
mentaries yielded  was  matched  by  rotating  24 
parts  of  white  and  76  of  black  paper.  Just 
look  a  little  more  closely  into  the  chromatic 
constituents  of  this  pair  of  complementaries. 
The  three  pigments — vermilion,  emerald  green, 
and  artificial  ultramarine — required  in  order 
to  yield  a  grey  need  to  be  rotated  in  the  pro- 
portions 36  :  34  :  30.  But  the  complementary 
of  our  paste-board  contained  the  emerald 
green  and  ultramarine  in  the  ratio  14  :  45  or 
9'3  :  30  ;  consequently  the  paste-board  must 
have  furnished  the  equivalent  of  247  parts  of 
emerald  green  as  well  as  that  of  36  parts  of 
vermilion.  But  these  proportions  of  emerald 
green  and  vermilion,  when  mixed  by  rotation, 


II 


produce  an  orange  -  yellow  of  rather  low 
luminosity— a  broken  tint  of  orange-yellow— 
and  it  is  by  this  term  that  we  should  define  the 
colour  of  the  particular  brown  paste-board. 
[It  should  be  noted  here  that  by  the  successive 
impressions  of  colours  on  the  eye,  produced  in 
the  rotation  experiments,  we  do  not  get  the 
added  luminosities  of  the  pigments,  but  only 
their  mean  luminosity  ;  and  that  our  bright 
yellow  and  orange  pigments  possess  a  degree 
of  brightness  quite  out  of  proportion  to  that 
of  most  of  our  pigments  of  other  hues.] 

If  we  put  aside  the  questions  of  brightness 
and  purity,  taking  into  consideration  hue  only, 
we  may  describe  all  complementary  pairs  as 
made  up  of— 

[a.)  One  Primary  and  one  Secondary ,  or  of 

{6.)  Two  Secondaries. 
Examples  of  a  are  furnished  by  the  pairs — 

Red     :   Seagreen. 
Green  :  Purple. 
Blue     :  Yellow. 

Among  the  countless  instances  of  b,  I  name — 

Orange  :  Greenish-blue. 

Orange-yellow     :  Turquoise. 

Greenish-yellow  :  Violet-blue. 

Yellowish- green  :  Purple-violet. 

Bluish-green        :  Crimson. 

There  is  one  characteristic  of  all  true  com- 
plementary pairs  of  colours— they  do  not  affect 
each  other's  hues.  They  are  already  as  unlike 
in  hue  as  possible,  and  cannot  therefore 
mutually  modify  this  colour-constant.  They 
may,  and  often  do,  modify  their  apparent 
luminosity  and  purity.  So  in  the  pair  "  blue  : 
yellow,"  which  affords,  next  to  "black: 
white,"  the  strongest  possible  difference  of 
tone,  the  blue  makes  the  yellow  at  once 
brighter  and  paler,  while  the  yellow  makes 
the  blue  at  once  purer  and  less  luminous.  The 
characteristic  of  the  non-alteration  of  hue 
when  the  complementaries  are  placed  in  con- 
tact affords  a  criterion  of  the  truly  comple- 
mentary nature  of  any  pair  of  colours.  For 
instance,  in  this  diagram  of  true  and  false 
complementaries,  in  the  pair  "  red  :  green," 
the  red  makes  the  green  look  bluer  than  it  is, 
while  the  green  makes  the  red  appear  to 
incline  towards  purple.  So  in  the  pair 
"yellow  :  purple,"  the  yellow  looks  some- 
what greenish,  the  purple  somewhat  violet ;  and 
in  the  pair  "  blue  :  orange,"  the  blue  inclines 
towards  green,  and  the  orange  towards  yellow. 
These  are  examples  of  the  peculiar  optical 
effect  known  as  simultaneous  contrast,  in 
which  two  contiguous  surfaces,  which  differ  in 


one  or  more  of  the  constants  of  colour,  have 
such  differences  mutually  enhanced  or  modi- 
fied. Of  such  contrasts  of  hue,  brightness  and 
purity,  I  shall  have  something  further  to  say 
directly,  but  I  want  to  ask  you  first  which  of 
my  columns  of  supposed  complementary  pairs 
commends  itself  to  your  judgment  and  taste  as 
preferable  ?  I  do  not  say  that  the  strongest 
possible  contrasts  of  hue,  as  afforded  by  our 
approximations  to  the  complementaries,  are 
necessarily  agreeable,  but  I  do  feel  that  the 
similar  series  constructed  on  the  false  basis  of 
the  red-yellow-blue  theory  is  decidedly  un- 
pleasant :  the  angular  intervals  between  the 
pairs  should  have  been  greater  or  less.  Red  with 
seagreen  seems  to  be  more  agreeable  to  the  eye 
than  red  with  green  ;  green  with  purple  looks 
better  than  with  yellow;  blue  with  yellow 
better  than  blue  with  orange.  That  these 
effects  are  not  wholly  due  to  differences  in 
brightness  may  be  argued  from  this  case  of 
blue  with  orange,  where  I  have  tried  to  lower 
the  luminosity  of  the  orange  so  as  to  make  it  no 
brighter  than  the  blue  with  which  it  is  asso- 
ciated. But  the  inherent  falsity  of  the  red- 
yellow-blue  theory  precludes  one  from  giving 
to  these  pairs  of  complementaries  their  proper 
share  of  brightness — assuming  for  the  moment 
that  we  could  really  accomplish  such  a  result 
with  pigments. 

Contrasts  of  Tone  and  Hue.  —  Contrasts 
are  of  three  kinds,  namely,  contrasts  of  hue, 
contrasts  of  brightness,  contrasts  of  purity.  I 
have  already  directed  your  attention  to  con- 
trasts of  hue  ;  the  other  two  kinds  of  contrast 
now  demand  notice.  The  best  illustration  I 
can  give  you  of  contrast  of  tone  will  be  one  in 
which  we  shall  produce  simultaneously  a  series 
of  greys.  By  means  of  this  black  figure 
mounted  on  a  white  disc  we  shall  produce  a 
series  of  optical  mixtures  of  black  and  white, 
regularly  increasing  the  white  by  five  steps. 
The  outermost  ring  of  grey  will  be  the  palest 
tint  of  black,  the  innermost  the  deepest  shade 
of  white.  But  you  will  observe  another  and 
unexpected  appearance  produced  in  this  ex- 
periment. Each  ring  seems  to  be  itself  tinted 
and  shaded,  although  it  must  really  be  of  one 
uniform  grey.  Simultaneous  tone-contrast  is 
produced,  not  by  optical  fatigue  but  by  an 
error  of  judgment.  The  effect  is  enhanced  by 
the  difference  of  tone  on  each  side  of  these 
contiguous  rings,  for  the  middle  ring  is 
bounded  by  a  darker  shade  of  grey  on  one- 
side,  and  is  there  made  lighter  by  contrast, 
while  on  the  other  side  it  is  in  contact  with  a 
paler  tint  uf  grey,  and  is  there  made  darker  by 


contrast.  The  immense  importance  of  this 
phenomenon  in  pictorial  and  decorative  art  is 
well  known  ;  it,  of  course,  takes  place  with 
positive  colours  as  well  as  with  negative.  If 
in  an  engraving  or  Indian  ink  drawing  a 
certain  dark  space  seems  monotonous  and 
heavy  a  single  touch  of  a  darker  shade  will  at 
once  lighten  and  vary  it,  while  just  in  the  same 
way  a  lighter  stroke  on  a  tint  which  is  too  pale 
will  enrich  and  deepen  it.  In  both  cases  the 
result  of  simultaneous  contrast  will  relieve  the 
flatness  of  the  work. 

When  positive  colours  come  into  the 
arrangement  of  differing  tones  the  results 
may  be  indicated  by  means  of  a  few  diagram- 
matic figures.  Suppose  we  begin  by  intro- 
ducing a  kind  of  brown  in  the  form  of  a  disc. 
This  colour  of  medium  depth  is  deepened  by  a 
smaller  half-disc  of  white  near  its  centre,  and 
lightened  by  the  contiguity  of  a  corresponding 
half-disc  of  black.  Again,  suppose  we  place 
a  small  disc  of  full  blue  upon  a  larger  disc 
half  white  and  half  black,  the  black  will  make 
the  blue  it  touches  less  pure,  that  is,  will 
lighten  it,  while  the  white  will  affect  the  blue 
in  an  exactly  opposite  way. 

We  now  proceed  a  step  further,  and  take 
two  colours  instead  of  one.  Using  the  same 
reddish-brown  colour  as  before,  we  place  it  on 
a  disc  of  deep  blue,  and  find  that  it  becomes 
lighter  in  tone  and  less  pure,  while  at  the 
same  time  it  acquires  a  distinctly  yellow  cast, 
having  thus  received  a  portion  of  the  comple- 
ment of  blue.  Similarly  on  an  orange-red 
(red  lead  colour)  disc,  lighter  in  tone  than  its 
own,  it  appears  deeper  in  tone,  and  assumes  a 
somewhat  greenish-blue  cast,  though  this 
effect  is  but  slight,  owing  to  the  addition 
of  this  complementary  mainly  serving  to 
neutralise  some  of  the  red  in  the  brown  disc. 

A  third  case  may  now  be  considered.  We 
select  for  apposition  two  colours  which  are 
separated  from  one  another  by  a  compara- 
tively small  angular  interval  in  the  chromatic 
circle,  and  which  are  both  somewhat  bright. 
We  find,  as  we  might  expect,  that  their 
mutual  action  as  to  alteration  of  tone  is  but 
slight,  while  their  change  of  hue  is  more 
decided,  each  tending  to  recede  farther  from 
its  companion  by  acquiring  more  of  the  com- 
plementary hue.  Here  visual  fatigue  and  the 
warping  of  the  judgment  both  conduce  to  the 
same  result. 

Harmonies  of  Colour. — I  must  now  ask 
you  to  consider  what  are  called  chromatic 
harmonies.  Chevreul's  classification  of  har- 
monies  under  two   headings  —  harmonies   of 


analogy  and  harmonies  of  contrast — is  some- 
what arbitrary.  All  harmonies  are  in  varying 
degrees  harmonies  of  contrast.  In  every 
chromatic  harmony  there  is  contrast,  contrast 
of  hue,  or  of  brightness,  or  of  purity.  Contrast 
generally,  therefore,  does  not  afford  a  criterion 
of  classification.  No  fundamental  difference 
really  exists  between  those  harmonies  where 
change  of  tone  or  of  hue  is  gradual  and  those 
where  it  is  abrupt ;  it  is  a  matter  of  degree, 
and  is  quantitative  rather  than  qualitative.  I 
do  not  see  my  way  to  improving  the  arrange- 
ment which  I  proposed  in  my  "  Manual  of 
Colour"  (pp.  134  to  139).  I  suggested  arrang- 
ing the  various  possible  harmonies  upon  the 
arc  of  a  circle,  placing  the  harmonies  of  close 
analogy  at  one  end,  the  harmonies  of  strong 
contrast  at  the  other:  — 

1.  The  passage,  by  insensible  differences, 
of  the  tints,  shades,  or  broken  tints  of  one 
hue,  from  light  to  dark. 

2.  The  gradation  by  small  but  regular, 
definite,  and  perceptible  steps,  of  the  tints, 
shades,  or  broken  tints  of  a  single  hue,  from 
light  to  dark. 

3.  As  in  2,  but  each  step  separated  by  a 
neutral  element,  as  white,  grey,  or  black. 

4.  The  passage,  by  insensible  differences, 
of  one  hue,  or  of  its  tones,  into  another 
related  hue  or  its  tones. 

5.  The  gradation  by  definite  steps  of  one 
hue,  or  of  its  tones,  into  another  related  hue 
or  its  tones. 

6.  As  in  5,  but  each  step  separated  by  a 
neutral  element. 

7.  The  passage,  by  insensible  differences, 
of  one  hue,  or  its  tones,  into  another  chromatic- 
ally remote  hue. 

8  The  gradation,  by  definite  steps,  of  one 
hue  into  another  chromatically  remote  hue. 

9.  As  in  8,  but  each  step  separated  by  a 
neutral  element. 

10.  The  collocation  of  different  tones. 

11.  The  collocation  of  chromatically  distant 
hues. 

12.  The  collocation  of  chromatically  distant 
hues  separated  by  a  neutral  element. 

The  idea  of  seriation  or  gradation  becomes 
more  and  more  involved  with  that  of  decided 
change  as  we  follow  the  sequence  of  these 
numbers  ;  analogy  gives  place  to  contrast. 

This  classification  may  be  illustrated  by  a 
few  examples,  but  I  have  no  time  to  develop 
the  subject  completely.  And  it  must  be  noted 
that  such  definitions  as  I  have  offered  are  of 
use  in  the  way  of  suggestion,  but  must  not  be 
allowed  to  fetter  the  imagination  of  the  artist ; 


'3 


they  cannot  take  the  place  of  experiment, 
observation,  knowledge,  and  sensitive  per- 
ception of  chromatic  beauty. 

I  take  three  examples  only  ;  they  will  serve 
to  illustrate  Nos.  5,  6,  and  7. 

The  diagram  shows  the  gradation  in  three 
steps  only,  of  yellow  to  orange  (Xo.  5  above  ; 
and  also  the  same  gradation  when  the  neutral 
elements,  white,  grey,  or  black,  are  inserted 
(No.  6).  These  cases  furnish  examples  of  the 
use  of  what  has  been  variously  termed  "  the 
dominant  hue"  and  "the  small  interval." 
We  may  illustrate  it  by  the  budding  foliage  of 
spring,  the  changing  hues  of  autumn,  and  the 
association  of  nearly-related  hues  in  many 
flowers,  as  in  several  kinds  of  daffodil. 

My  next  diagram  shows  the  passage  of  red 
to  blue  1X0.  7  above).  Really  it  is  only  a 
more  extreme  case  of  our  No.  4,  but  there  is 
not  here  a  chromatic  element  common  to  the 
whole  series  of  passage  hues,  for  the  red  at 
one  end  contains  no  blue,  and  the  blue  at  the 
other  end  no  red. 

Associated  Colours. — Of  pairs,  or  dyads,  I 
must  say  a  few  words.  These  are  of  three 
orders,  namely,  complementary  pairs,  large- 
interval  pairs,  small-interval  pairs.  Com- 
plementary pairs,  when  their  tones  differ 
considerably,  as  in  the  case  of  deep  red  with 
bright  sea-green  ;  or  when  they  contain  much 
white,  or  are  pale  ;  or  when  they  contain 
much  black,  or  are  of  low  luminosity  ;  or  when 
they  are  at  once  of  low  luminosity  and  contain 
white  (that  is,  are  broken  with  grey),  are  all, 
or  may  be,  so  adjusted  as  to  be  agreeable. 
Large-interval  pairs  are  usually  more  difficult 
of  management,  and  when  both  possess  a  full 
degree  of  saturation,  are  often  unpleasant. 
Cases  are  afforded  by  red  with  yellow,  orange- 
red    with    blue-green,    orange    with     purple, 


orange-yellow  with  green,  orange  with  green, 
and  greenish-yellow  with  turquoise.  The  dilu- 
tion of  one  of  the  pairs  with  a  neutral  element 
generally  improves  these  combinations,  but 
some  of  them,  though  so  strong  as  to  require 
moderation  in  use,  are  naturally  excellent. 
Amongst  these  may  be  named  red  with  blue, 
orange-red  with  blue,  orange-yellow  witli 
violet,  and  blue-green  with  violet.  In  these 
cases,  however,  there  is  normally  a  consider- 
able difference  in  the  luminosity  of  the  two 
colours  associated  in  pairs.  By  beauty  of 
material  and  of  pattern  some  of  the  simplest 
dyads  may  yield  exquisite  effects,  as  in  Italian 
velvets  and  brocades  of  the  1 6th  century.  Such 
dyads  areyellow-greenwith  medium  violet,  pale 
olive  green  with  deep  indigo,  leaf-green  with 
deep  blue,  and  pale  leaf-green  with  deep  amber. 
The  simplest  triads  contain  two  colours  and 
a  neutral.  Suppose  we  desire  to  associate 
violet  and  blue  we  may  interpose  with  agree- 
able effect  between  them  white  or  a  pale  grey, 
but  not  black.  The  blacks  available  have  a 
low  degree  of  luminosity  and  so  do  not  differ 
enough  from  the  full  blue  and  full  violet  we  are 
using;  moreover  they  become  tinctured  with 
an  unpleasant  rusty  hue,  the  complementary  of 
the  blue  or  violet.  Generally  the  poor  and  bad 
dyads  may  be  improved  by  the  introduction  of 
a  third  element,  while  good  dyads  are  often 
spoilt  thereby.  Good  triads  may  frequently  be 
secured  by  taking  three  hues  rather  widely 
separated  from  each  other  on  the  chromatic 
circle,  and,  as  a  general  rule,  two  of  these 
hues  should  be  pale  or  bright  and  one  deep  or 
dark,  or  vice  versa.  Except  in  special  cir- 
cumstances it  will  be  easier  to  manage  these 
triads  when  two  of  the  members  belong  to  the 
"warm"  side  of  the  circle  and  one  to  the 
"  cold."     I  give  a  few  good  triads  : — 


r  Amber, 

<  Cream, 

\  Blue  (medium). 
Amber, 
Blue  (pale), 
Crimson. 

S  Flesh-red, 
Blue  (normal), 
Olive-green. 
Brick-red, 
Indigo, 
Sea-green. 


Leaf,  green, 
Puce  (deep), 
Rose-grey. 
Terra-cotta, 


■  Leaf- green, 
'iolet, 


■'  Maroon, 

Sage-green. 
I  Maroon, 

Bronze-yellow, 
'  Olive-green  (dark). 
,  Bluish-green, 

Violet, 

Red-ochre. 


/  Lea 
Vio 

\  Salmon. 


Ypricot, 


Crimson, 
Gold-brown. 


( 

/  Red  (normal), 

Gold, 
\  Blue  (normal). 
/  Lavender, 
i  Turquoise, 
I  Blue  (deep). 


Other  examples  of  triads,  and  of  more  com- 
plex colour-combinations,   taken   chiefly  from 


historic  and  national  chromatic  arrangements, 
are — 


•4 


i.  Blue  (deep),  or  Lavender  (pale) 

2.  Gold-amber 

3.  Vermilion-red  in  fine  lines  on  2 

1.  Lavender  (pale) 

2.  White 

3.  Black 

4.  Red-brown  (medium)   ) 

1.  Chamois-leather 

2.  Raw  Sienna  J  on  ground  of  4,  black 

3.  Venetian  Red 


on  ground  of 


5,  orange  yellow 

6,  ochre-yellow 


(Ancient  Egyptian) 


(Assyrian) 


1.  Blue  (medium)  "j 

2.  White 

3.  Red 

4.  Greenish  grey    ) 


with  outlines  of  5,  black 


1.  Silver 

2.  Gold 


with  outlines  of  3,  puce,  all  on  ground  of  4,  pale  emerald  green 


1.  Silver 

2.  Lavender 

3.  Emerald  Green  (medium) 


with  4,  white  in  bands 
and  5,  black  in  lines 


Silver 

Gold 

Red  edgings 

Black  ground 


(area  = 
(area  = 
(area  = 
(area  = 


A) 

T'o) 
T'o) 


Lavender 
Lemon-yellow 
Crimson  (medium) 
White  (in  strap  work) 
Green  (medium) 

Bluish-green  (full) 
Yellowish  olive  (medium) 
Orange  (pale)  6. 

Crimson  (medium)  4. 

Salmon  5. 

Yellow  (pale)  6 


r- with  as  lines  and  ground,  6,  black 


4.  Blue  (full) 

5.  Purple  (medium) 

6.  Crimson 

Yellow  green  (medium) 
Yellowish  olive  (medium) 
Maroon 


(Greek) 


(Moresque) 


(Indian) 


(Irish  MS.) 


(Irish  MS.) 


(Irish  MS.) 


And  now  I  desire  to  draw  your  particular 
attention  to  one  of  those  characters  of  good 
colour  which  is  of  supreme  importance.  You 
will  understand  the  nature  of  this  "  quality  " 
in  colour  when  I  have  described  and  analysed 
illustrative  examples.  I  begin  by  choosing 
a  few  cases  in  which  it  is  either  absent  or 
irreco.gfnisable.  A  surface  of  matt  paint  of  one 
uniform  tone  and  hue,  and  illuminated  by  a 
direct  and  colourless  light,  is  confessedly  pro- 
saic and  uninteresting ;  so  also  is  a  piece  of 
self-coloured  "surface"  paper  or  a  plain 
printed  cotton  cloth.  All  the  materials  are 
flat,  and  they  exhibit  no  variations  of  tone  or 
hue,  or  at  least  no  perceptible  variations.  Of 
all  the  hues  that  can  be  chosen  as  examples  of 
this  point,  perhaps  the  full  red,  the  full  green, 
and  the  full  blue  are  the  most  telling ;  but  the 


full  orange  and  the  full  violet  come  very  near 
to  them.  If  the  generally  accepted  theory  of 
the  three  primary  colour-sensations  being  red, 
green,  and  blue  be  accepted,  we  shall  perhaps 
be  able  to  suggest  a  partial  explanation  of  the 
unpleasant  appearance  of  a  considerable  sur- 
face of  any  one  of  the  three  above-named  hues 
when  alone  in  the  visual  fatigue  of  one  set  of 
optical  nerve-fibrils  which  they  severally  cause. 
Orange  and  violet  are,  however,  assumed  to 
affect  the  red  and  green  fibrils  and  the  red  and 
blue  fibrils  respectively.  Yet  in  the  case  of 
these  two  colours  (orange  and  violet),  the 
stimulation  of  the  two  sets  of  fibrils  which 
they  each  cause  is  not  equal,  for  the  orange 
has  an  excess  of  red  in  it,  and  the  violet  has 
an  excess  of  blue.  If  we  select  other  hues  in 
which    the    two    components    are   present   in 


'5 


equivalent,  if  not  in    equal,   proportions,  the 
force  of  our  argument  is,  I  think,  increased. 
Such  hues  are  yellow  (red  +  green),  seagreen 
(green  +  blue),  and  purple  (blue  -f-  red).  Now 
it  will  be  generally  conceded  that  the  contem- 
plation of  an  unmitigated  yellow  is  less  dis- 
pleasing to  the  eye  than  that  of  orange  or  red, 
seagreen  than  green  or  blue,  and  purple  than 
violet.     Such  comparisons  are,  I  confess,  very 
difficult  to  make,  and,   without  special  con- 
trivances for  excluding  all  disturbing  elements, 
they  are  quite  inconclusive.      With  the  pig- 
ments commonly  employed  for  such  compari- 
sons, the  varying  amount  of  white  light  they 
reflect,  and  the  presence  of  chromatic  elements 
other  than  those   we   desire   to   compare,  do 
more  than  imperil  the  accuracy  of  the  result. 
And  then  the  presence  of   backgrounds  and 
surroundings  modifies  the  effects   produced ; 
these  depend  also  very  much  upon  the  manner 
in   which   the   coloured   substances  used   are 
illuminated.     Even  with  the  spectrum-colours 
themselves  a  just  comparison  is  by  no  means 
easy.     I   am   reluctant  to  illustrate  my  argu- 
ment  by   citing  the  case  of  certain   sounds, 
because  the  analogy  between  colour  and  sound 
has  been  frequently  pushed  to  unwarrantable 
lengths  ;  yet  I  think  I  may  say  that  an  abso- 
lutely pure  loud  note  of  uniform  pitch,  without 
the  simultaneous  presence  of  those  harmonious 
constituents  which  combine  to  form  its  timbre, 
would  be  no  more  pleasing  to  the  ear  than  a 
pure  full  colour  of  elementary  character  is  to 
the  eye. 

Hitherto,  I  have  been  speaking  of  full 
colours,  colours,  that  is,  which  are  intense 
and  saturated,  and  also  pure  or  unmixed  with 
white.  The  current  theory  of  colour  sensation 
does,  however,  assume  that  there  is  some 
stimulation  of  all  the  three  kinds  of  optical 
fibrils  caused  by  each  colour,  however  pure. 
Still  the  sensation,  say,  of  green  is  caused  by 
an  immensely  preponderating  stimulation  of 
the  green  fibrils  over  that  of  the  blue  and  red 
fibrils.  A  corresponding  statement  may  be 
made  with  regard  to  the  sensations  of  blue 
and  of  red.  In  these  instances,  the  fibrils 
not  necessary  to  the  production  of  the  two 
sensations  in  question  are  even  less  stimu- 
lated than  in  the  case  of  green,  a  difference 
which  has  been  attributed  to  the  median 
position  of  the  latter  hue  in  the  spectrum  and 
therefore  to  its  intermediate  wave-length.  It 
is  argued  that  the  green  nerve-fibrils  which 
respond  to  the  vibrations  of  green  light  are 
capable  of  responding,  to  a  slight  extent,  to 
the  vibrations  of  light  on  either  oide  of  green, 


but  that  the  red  nerve-fibrils  are  somewhat 
less  affected  by  the  impact  of  the  vibrations 
at  the  other  end  of  the  spectrum,  and  vice 
versa.  In  confirmation  of  this  view  I  may 
mention  the  curious  observation  that  the  last 
colour  to  disappear  when  a  continuous  and 
normal  spectrum  is  gradually  reduced  in 
luminosity  is  the  green.  That  it  appears 
finally  as  a  grey,  having  but  a  faint  tinge  of 
green,  is  quite  in  accordance  with  theory. 
And  it  may  not  be  out  of  place  to  observe  in 
this  connection  that  the  full,  nearly  normal 
green,  as  represented  by  the  pigment  emerald 
green,  is  much  more  luminous  than  the  full 
red  as  represented  by  vermilion,  probably  in  a 
ratio  approaching  2:1. 

One  reason,  then,  why  pure  white  and  the 
infinite  series  of  tones  of  grey  do  not  offend 
the  eye  as  do  certain  pure,  full,  and  luminous 
colours,  may  be  traced  to  the  equal  stimulation 
of  the  three  sets  of  optical  fibrils  which  they 
cause.  Tints  of  any  colour— the  full  colour 
lightened  with  white ;  shades  of  any  colour — 
the  full  colour  darkened  with  black  ;  broken 
tints  of  any  colour— the  full  colour  dulled  with 
grey,  come  into  the  same  category ;  for  the 
stimulations  they  cause,  though  not  equable 
like  that  of  white  and  of  grey,  either  approach 
equality,  or  are  less  energetic  and  one-sided 
than  those  of  the  full  normal  hues. 

We  are  now  in  a  position  to  offer  some  ex- 
planation, inadequate  though  it  be,  of  the 
peculiar  satisfaction  afforded  to  the  eye  by 
one  of  the  characteristics  of  beautiful  colour. 
We  call  it  "  throbbing,"  "pulsating,"  "pal- 
pitating." This  quality  may  be  imparted  to 
it  in  several  ways,  by  which  its  dead  uniformity 
is  broken,  or  its  criant  effect  is  subdued.  The 
fluctuation  in  question  may  be  caused  by- 
Light  and  shade  from  inequalities  of  surface 
or  irregular  scattering  of  light. 

Varying  surface-reflections. 

Passage  from  translucency  to  opacity. 

Varying  depth  of  hue. 

Variations  of  hue  limited  to  the  "small- 
interval." 

Several  of  these  causes  often  conspire  to 
produce  throbbing  colour  in  one  and  the  same 
case,  and  they  will  be  best  illustrated  by  a  few 
concrete  examples. 

The  case  of  rough  paper  which  has  received 
a  uniform  wash  of  water-colour  furnishes  us 
with  an  illustration  of  the  effect  of  light  and 
shade  as  modifying  hue.  We  will  assume 
that  the  pigment  has  been  so  equally  dis- 
tributed that  the  hollows  of  the  surface  have 


i6 


not  retained  more  than  the  elevations.  .Then 
we  shall  find,  in  the  case  of  many  pigments  of 
full  colour,  that  the  hue  in  the  hollows  differs 
from  that  in  the  prominences.  For  instance, 
if  French  ultramarine  has  been  used,  the 
hollows  will  show  a  colour  tending  slightly 
towards  violet,  while  the  pigment  on  the 
elevations  will  exhibit  a  purer  blue.  In  prac- 
tice the  effect  will  be  augmented  by  the 
varying  amounts  of  pigment  which  have 
lodged  in  different  parts,  the  hollows  retaining 
more  than  the  elevations.  The  same  wash  of 
the  same  pigment  on  smooth  paper  will  pre- 
sent a  different  appearance  ;  and  in  order  that 
the  effect  of  the  pigment  on  the  latter  may 
rival  that  on  the  rough,  it  will  be  necessary  to 
introduce  a  second  pigment,  perhaps  even  a 
third.  That  the  difference  in  question  is  not 
one  of  light  and  shade  only  may  be  proved  by 
comparing  the  two  kinds  of  coloured  sur- 
face in  a  suitable  instrument  constructed 
on  the  principle  of  Lovibond's  tintometer, 
and  admitting  of  the  examination  of  small 
isolated  points  or  patches  of  colour — the 
chromatic  analysis  of  these  points  will  be 
found  to  vary  not  merely  in  depth  but  also 
in  hue. 

That  the  majority  of  painters  in  water- 
colours  should  prefer  a  comparatively  rough 
paper  for  their  work  to  the  smooth  sameness 
of  Bristol  board  is  not  surprising.  One  admits 
of  happy  accidents  of  hue,  and  even  involves 
them  ;  the  other  demands  the  introduction  of 
laboured  effects,  while  the  result,  at  best,  is 
inferior. 

Our  second  cause  has  been  called  "  varying 
surface-reflections."  To  illustrate  it  we  will 
take  a  piece  of  porcelain.  The  glaze  may 
vary  in  thickness  ;  parts  may  be  more  perfect 
in  gloss  than  other  parts  ;  it  may  even  exhibit 
iridescence.  A  colourless  glaze  may  produce 
modifications  of  the  hue  of  the  colours  beneath 
it  by  reflecting  from  its  surface  in  var)  ing 
amounts  the  coloured  rays  which  fall  upon  it 
from  surrounding  objects,  or  by  itself  decom- 
posing the  white  light  by  which  it  is  seen.  In 
both  cases  its  colour  will  be  variously  changed 
even  when  that  colour  was  originally  flat  and 
uniform.  I  have  in  my  mind,  at  the  moment, 
a  vase  of  old  Chinese  egg-shell  porcelain  of 
an  amber-yellow.  This  colour  is  due  to  lead 
antimoniate,  a  substance  which  has  become 
partially  incorporated  with  the  colourless  glaze 
in  the  kiln.  The  surface  reflection  varies  in 
intensity ;  in  some  places  it  reflects  the  in- 
cident white  light  unchanged,  in  others  it 
shows  iridescent  colours,   chiefly  purple  and 


greenish  blue.  The  fluctuation  of  colour  is 
produced  by  the  mingling  of  the  light  which 
has  passed  through  the  yellow  pigmentary 
layer  and  has  then  been  reflected  to  the  eye 
from  the  white  subjacent  ground  with  the  light 
directly  reflected  from  the  glossy  surface. 
From  different  portions  of  the  surface  we 
receive  light  of  at  least  four  different  hues, 
namely,  the  original  yellow;  the  same  colour 
diluted  with  white  ;  pale  orange-yellow,  where 
the  original  yellow  hue  is  modified  by  com- 
mixture with  the  purple  of  the  iridescence  ;  and 
pale  greenish  yellow,  where  it  is  similarly 
mingled  with  the  greenish  blue  rays  from  the 
glaze.  Of  course,  in  some  positions,  the 
iridescence  alone  can  be  perceived,  just  as 
in  others  the  original  amber-yellow  alone  is 
visible. 

When  a  colour  varies  in  transparency  or 
opacity  we  get  a  third  case  of  fluctuation. 
This  variation  is  generally  accompanied  by 
variations  in  depth  and  hue,  but  it  alone 
suffices  to. bring  about  the  quality  we  are  con- 
sidering. Let  us  take  an  illustration  from  oil- 
painting.  We  shall  require  two  pigments,  one 
transparent,  the  other  opaque.  It  will  be  diffi- 
cult to  match  them  exactly  as  to  hue,  but 
vermilion  and  a  kind  of  madder  red  will  answer 
sufficiently  well.  We  spread  a  very  thin  layer 
of  the  latter  upon  a  white  or  colourless  ground; 
some  distance  off  we  prepare  a  similar  patch 
of  the  vermilion  ;  between  the  two  we  make  a 
gradated  mixture  of  the  two  pigments,  and 
thus  obtain  the  passage  of  a  transparent  colour 
into  an  opaque  colour  ;  yet  the  whole  coloured 
area  is  a  red,  and  a  red  which  can  be  repre- 
sented by  one  and  the  same  numerical  expres- 
sion when  referred  to  the  wave  length  of  the 
corresponding  hue  in  the  spectrum.  But  in- 
stead of  employing  these  two  pigments  in  the 
diagrammatic  fashion,  let  us  use  them  in 
pictorial  or  decorative  painting  by  placing 
the  two  pigments  side  by  side,  or  glazing 
with  the  translucent  pigment,  or  scumbling 
with  the  opaque  upon  the  same  background. 
Only  in  some  such  way  is  it  possible  to  suggest 
the  throbbing  colours  seen  in  many  natural 
objects,  feathers,  precious  stones,  marbles, 
&c.  Of  course  in  representing  these  we  are 
not  restricted  to  the  use  of  a  pair  of  colours  of 
the  same  hue  and  depth  ;  the  limitations  we 
imposed  upon  ourselves  were  intended  merely 
to  simplify  the  consideration  of  this  third 
source  of  pulsating  colour.  Let  me  add  that 
the  fluctuation  here  is  between  two  red  lights, 
one  of  which  reaches  the  eye  after  passing 
twice  through  a  translucent  red  medium,  while 


■7 


the  other  is  produced  by  selective  reflection 
from  the  surface  of  an  opaque  red  solid.  I 
say  opaque,  although  in  point  of  fact  the  inci- 
dent light,  or  rather  a  part  of  it,  plunges  to 
some  depth  amongst  the  red  particles  of 
vermilion  and  passes  through  them,  a  chro- 
matic selection  being  thereby  made.  And  it 
is  really  in  this  manner  that  the  light  finally 
reflected  to  the  eye  by  this  pigment,  having 
lost  in  selective  absorption  some  of  its  coloured 
constituents,  is  red.  I  might  cite  many  ex- 
amples of  the  fluctuation  of  colour  produced 
by  the  passage  of  an  opaque  colour  into  a 
transparent  one  or  by  the  juxta-position  of  two 
closely  related  colours,  one  of  which  is  due  to 
surface-reflection,  the  other  to  reflection  from 
an  appreciable  depth  :  the  sea,  for  instance, 
when  it  shows  the  local  blue  colour  of  the  water 
itself,  and,  associated  with  this,  the  reflected 
blue  of  the  sky.  The  effects  produced  in  cer- 
tain textiles,  such  as  linen  and  silk,  damasks 
and  velvets,  partly  belong  here,  but  they  are 
also  connected  with  the  variations  due  to 
inequalities  of  surface  and  to  differing  powers 
of  reflection. 

The  fourth  and  fifth  causes  of  the  throbbing 
colour  are  to  be  traced  to  variations  in  depth 
of  one  colour,  or  to  slight  variations  in  hue  ; 
they  may  be  fitly  considered  together,  for  in 
actual  examples  they  are  generally  associated. 
Again,  we  may  have  recourse  to  Chinese 
porcelain  for  an  illustrative  example.  There 
is  a  beautiful  ceramic  colour  known  as  dragon's 
blood  ;  its  hue  varies  much  in  differeut  speci- 
mens, and  even  in  the  same  specimen,  but  the 
red  element  always  largely  preponderates.  The 
red  sometimes  approaches  a  red-purple,  that 
is,  has  a  small  proportion  of  blue  in  it ;  more 
often  it  oscillates  between  a  crimson  and  the 
colour  known  in  France  as  garatice  doree.  The 
crimson  varies  in  depth.  Sometimes  it  is  a 
full  and  saturated  colour,  sometimes  it  passes 
into  a  paler  tint,  a  kind  of  rich  rose-pink.  The 
garance  doree  is  a  translucent  red,  which, 
when  diluted,  has  a  somewhat  golden-red  or 
orange-red  hue.  When  we  examine  a  good 
specimen  of  this  kind  of  porcelain,  we  may 
sometimes  detect  the  presence  of  all  the  colours 
I  have  named,  as  well  as  of  their  intermediate 
or  passage  tints.  These  hues  are  separated 
from  one  another  in  the  chromatic  circle  by  a 
very  small  number  of  degrees  ;  they  illustrate 
the  effect  of  the  collocation  of  colours  differing 
by  what  is  called  "  the  small  interval."  J  f  the 
circle  be  divided  into  ioo*,  their  extreme  range 
will  amount  to  about  io°.  And  the  most  ex- 
treme colours  are  not  in  juxtaposition,  for  one 


slides  into  another  by  imperceptible  gradations 
both  of  tone  and  of  hue.  And  a  range  so 
extensive  as  io°  is  by  no  means  necessary  in 
order  that  the  prosaic  flatness  of  ordinary 
colour  may  be  avoided ;  possibly  a  range  of 
2°  or  3°  may  suffice,  even  if  it  be  unaccom- 
panied by  variation  of  tone.  Coloured  glass, 
of  good  quality,  may  be  chosen  as  affording 
an  excellent  illustration  of  the  points  now 
under  consideration,  but  I  reserve  it  for 
fuller  consideration  later  on,  although  I  may 
observe,  in  passing,  that  the  fluctuations  in 
colour  of  the  transparent  enamels  on  porcelain, 
and  of  glass,  arise  from  the  same  causes, 
only  that,  as  we  look  at  porcelain  and  through 
glass,  surface  iridescence  in  the  latter  plays 
either  no  part,  or  a  very  small  part,  in  the 
production  of  the  phenomena  in  question.  Of 
course  I  exclude  from  consideration  glass  in- 
tended to  be  looked  at,  that  is,  those  vessels 
of  glass,  coloured  or  uncoloured,  which  owe 
their  beauty  of  hue  to  the  iridescence  of  their 
surface. 

I  have  now  shown,  I  trust,  that  throbbing 
colour  is  produced  in  more  than  one  way,  and 
that  it  is  agreeable  to  the  eye,  even  when  we 
are  unconscious  of  the  elements  that  concur  in 
its  production,  at  least  in  part  through  physio- 
logical causes.  I  do  not  think  these  causes 
furnish  an  adequate  explanation  of  the  pleasure 
such  colour  affords,  for  its  charm  is  doubtless 
connected  with  certain  fluctuations  of  our 
judgment  when  any  element  of  contrast  in 
colour  or  in  tone  comes  in,  with  the  agreeable 
associations  it  recalls,  and  with  its  complexity 
and  mystery.  We  do  not  see  it  all  at  once, 
nor  do  we  instantly  grasp  its  full  meaning. 
Its  effect  may  be  likened  to  that  of  an  intricate 
architectural  vista,  or  of  a  range  of  distant 
mountains,  or  of  the  cadences  in  the  exquisitely 
chosen  language  of  a  beautiful  poem.  I  can- 
not but  think  that  throbbing  colour  is  as  neces- 
sary to  chromatic  decoration  as  to  pictorial 
art.  You  are  familiar  with  the  numerous  and 
most  useful  coloured  designs  which  illustrate 
Owen  Jones's  "Grammar  of  Ornament." 
Translate  these  flat  and  terribly  prosaic  figures 
from  the  uniformly  coloured  paints  with  which 
they  have  brin  printed  into  those  precious 
materials— silk,  and  marble,  and  glass — which 
present  delicate  variations  of  tone  and  of  hue, 
and  at  once  the  chromatic  combinations  are 
ennobled,  changed  from  awkward  prose  into 
refined  poetry  fraught  with  varied  interest.  It 
is  just  in  the  same  way  that  the  sympathetic 
painter  of  landscape  treats  the  clouds  and  the 
sky.    He  is  not  satisfied  witli  white  and  grey  for 


|8 


the  former,  and  with  blue  for  the  latter.  He 
does  not  merely  gradate  his  tints,  but  suffuses 
his  whites  and  greys  with  faint  suggestions  of 


amber  and  apricot,  and  rose  ;  and  varies  his 
azure  with  hints  of  lavender  and  of  aqua- 
marine. 


LECTURE  III— Delivered  March  31,    1890. 


SYLLABUS. — Balance.  Proportion,  and  Distribution  of  Colour  — Interchange  and   Counterchange  of  Colour — Colours  of  some 
Natural  and  Artificial  Materials— Decorative  and  Pictorial  Colour— Colour  in  Relation  to  Architecture  and  Sculpture. 


Distribution  ami  Balance  of  Colour. — 
When  the  constituents  of  a  set  of  colours  to 
be  associated  together  have  been  decided  on, 
it  still  remains  to  determine  their  sequence 
and  the  relative  areas  they  shall  occupy. 
Such  triads  as  were  given  in  the  last  lecture 
may  be  made  disagreeable  or  pleasant  by 
altering  their  distribution  or  their  proportions. 
The  triad  red,  gold,  blue,  affords  as  good  an 
illustration  of  this  fact  as  we  could  wish.  If 
we  make  the  red  and  blue  come  into  contact 
throughout  the  design  in  equal  areas,  and  if 
we  then  spread  over  the  surface  a  spray  of 
gold  foliage  in  such  a  way  as  to  employ,  in 
masses  of  considerable  extent,  just  as  much 
gold  as  red  and  as  blue,  the  result  will  be 
crude  and  unsatisfactory.  But  we  may  develop 
the  varied  beauties  of  which  this  group  is 
susceptible  by  modifying  the  arrangement  and 
proportions  of  its  constituents  in  scores  of 
different  ways.  Let  us  devise  one  such  way, 
of  which  the  plan  shall  be — separation  of  the 
blue  and  red  by  gold,  and  the  use  of  these  three 
chromatic  elements  in  the  ratio  7  :  3  :  1  :  so  we 
make  our  blue  ground  cover  7-nths  of  the  area 
to  be  decorated  ;  our  arabesque  and  its  curves, 
or  our  spray  and  its  foliage,  will  be  of  red, 
3-itths,  bordered  throughout  with  gold,  i-nth. 
I  need  not  tell  you  how  much  we  may  modify 
and  improve  the  result  by  the  beautiful  curves 
of  our  spray,  and  by  half  entangling  patches 
of  the  ground  within  its  borders.  And  this 
end  may  be  reached  by  many  other  methods 
which  I  cannot  stay  to  describe. 

One  of  the  tetrads  named  in  the  last  lecture 
will  serve  to  illustrate  these  matters  of  arrange- 
ment and  proportion.  The  example  is  taken 
from  an  early  Irish  illuminated  missal.  The 
four  elements  are  silver,  gold,  red,  and  black. 
The  proportionate  areas  are  4:4:1:1.  Silver 
and    gold    quatrefoils    alternate.      They   are 


bordered  by  red  in  the  form  of  a  line  of 
uniform  breadth  ;  the  residual  space  is  covered 
with  black,  but  this  is  broken  up  into  such 
small  portions  that  it  does  not  look  heavy, 
while  the  continuous  red  outline  serves  at  once 
to  bind  the  whole  design  together,  and  to 
prevent  too  strong  a  contrast  of  tone  between 
the  black  and  the  gold  or  silver.  You  will 
be  able  to  think  of  many  an  arrangement  of 
these  four  elements  which  would  prove  less 
felicitous,  and,  doubtless,  of  others  equally 
good. 

I  have  before  spoken  of  the  principle  of  the 
"dominant  hue."  It  will  be  easy  to  carry 
out  this  principle  by  modifying  the  area  of  the 
elements  in  our  triads.  In  this  way  one  of  our 
"cold"  triads — such  as  bluish-green,  violet, 
red  ochre,  may  be  made  "  warm."  In  such  a 
case  we  shall  have  to  increase  greatly  the  area 
occupied  by  the  red  ochre,  and  to  proportion- 
ately diminish  that  of  the  other  two  elements 
of  the  group.  We  may,  for  instance,  prepare 
a  large  design  of  foliage  of  red  ochre  upon  a 
ground  of  bluish  green,  separating  these  two 
colours  by  a  contour  line  of  violet,  adding 
perhaps  some  fine  veins  of  violet  to  our  large 
leaves.  But  it  must  be  noted  that  such 
arrangements  often  become  easier  and  more 
pleasing  when  we  are  at  liberty  to  introduce  a 
fourth  element,  even  if  that  element  be  but 
white  or  other  neutral.  A  fine  old  Rhodian 
tile  in  my  collection  affords  a  case  in  point. 
It  has  a  ground  of  a  red  ochre  hue  occupying 
5-ioths  of  the  whole  area.  Upon  this  a  design 
of  white  foliage,  highly  conventionalised, 
spreads  in  a  connected  and  symmetrical 
fashion,  and  covers  3-ioths  of  the  surface.  The 
remaining  2-ioths  are  shared  between  a  full 
blue  and  a  slightly  bluish  green  in  nearly 
equal  proportions.  These  colours  are  dis- 
tributed upon  the  white  portions  of  the  design 


19 


chiefly  in  the  form  of  veinings.  There  is  also 
a  fifth  but  inconspicuous  element  in  the  chro- 
matic scheme,  namely,  a  delicate  contour  line 
of  deep  grey.  The  effect  of  the  whole  arrange- 
ment depends  upon  the  dominant  red  hue  of 
the  ground,  but  this  is  refined  and  lightened 
by  the  net  of  white  foliage,  which,  in  its  turn, 
gives  strength  and  purity  to  the  graceful  curved 
forms  of  blue  and  of  green  which  it  encloses. 
The  uses  of  colour-schemes,  in  which  a  do 
minant  hue  is  present,  are  frequently  of  the 
utmost  importance  in  hangings,  papers,  and 
wall-decoratinns.  These  have  to  perform  the 
office  of  a  background,  and  to  set  off  one  or 
more  conspicuous  chromatic  elements  in  the 
room.  If  you  want  to  display  properly  some 
fine  pieces  of  blue  and  white  porcelain,  your 
walls  must  not  be  so  coloured  as  to  interfere 
with  their  effect,  but  rather  to  enhance  it  both 
as  to  tone  and  hue.  A  flat  buff  or  grey  may  make 
your  porcelain  too  conspicuous  ;  a  bright  blue 
and  a  pure  white  will  clash  with  it  ;  a  strong 
red  will  overpower  it.  A  scheme  of  colouration, 
which  in  its  totality  produces  the  effect  of  a 
greyish  olive  green,  half  way  in  depth  of  tone 
between  the  white  and  the  blue  of  your  vases, 
will  probably  be  found  to  answer  well. 

When  it  is  not  desired  to  direct  attention 
specially  to  the  colours  of  the  objects  in  a 
room,  then  it  is  allowable  to  gather  into 
certain  parts  of  your  wall  decoration  the  more 
telling  of  the  chromatic  elements  which  enter 
into  its  composition.  You  accentuate  the 
design  by  focussing  the  more  saturated  and 
luminous  colours  in  the  more  important  parts 
of  the  design. 

From  what  I  have  stated  thus  far,  I  think  it 
will  be  evident  that,  even  if  we  could  attain 
such  a  chromatic  balance  as  would  produce  a 
true  "  neutralised  bloom  "  on  our  walls,  or  in 
the  carpets  on  our  floors,  we  should  still  have 
left  out  of  our  scheme  the  more  important 
chromatic  elements  belonging  to  our  move- 
able furniture  and  ornaments.  In  fact,  the 
system  of  contrasts  of  hue  and  tone — contrasts 
more  or  less  subdued  — is  the  only  one  by 
which  a  real  unity  of  effect  can  be  reached  ; 
at  the  same  time  'that  due  prominence  and 
relief  are  secured  for  those  parts  or  objects 
where  prominence  and  relief  are  needed. 

Returning  once  more  to  our  triads,  I  would 
mention  a  principle  of  arrangement  often 
adopted  with  success,  namely,  the  separation 
of  two  nearly  related  tones  by  a  tone  which  is 
darker  or  lighter.  Sometimes  this  sequence 
brings  together  chromatic  elements  which 
clash,  and,  of  course,  it  must  then  be  avoided. 


Still,  the  rivalry  of  two  colours  having  the 
same  degree  of  brightness  is  frequently  un- 
pleasant, especially  where  they  are  both 
strong.  The  triad  of  full  red,  gold,  full  blue, 
illustrates  these  observations.  The  use  of  a 
triad  of  three  full  colours  is  rarely  successful, 
and  can  no  more  be  tolerated  than  the 
presence  of  three  trees  of  equal  size  and  equal 
prominence  in  a  landscape  picture.  Where 
three  colours  having  three  decidedly  different 
tones  are  used  in  one  scheme,  we  are  almost 
compelled  to  arrange  them  in  the  order  of 
their  depth  — dark,  medium,  light. 

You  will,  I  think,  excuse  the  elementary 
and  fragmentary  character  of  all  these  re- 
marks of  mine  on  distribution  and  balance  of 
colour  ;  no  one  can  be  more  conscious  of  their 
imperfection  and  of  their  commonplace  cha- 
racter than  I  am. 

Counterchange  and  Interchange.  —  In 
heraldic  colouring  the  principle  of  counter- 
change  is  frequently  adopted.  Ermine  is 
white  spotted  with  black ;  counter-ermine, 
black  spotted  with  white.  Suppose  a  shield 
of  arms  divided  diagonally  from  right  to  left, 
and  bearing  a  star.  Where  the  field  is  azure 
the  star  is  argent,  where  the  field  is  argent 
the  other  half  of  the  star  is  azure.  In  the 
latter  half  of  the  17th  century  the  same 
arrangement  was  adopted  in  textiles  and 
embroideries,  great  skill  being  shown  in  the 
passage  from  a  design,  say,  of  red  upon  a 
blue  ground  to  the  same  design  in  blue  upon 
a  red  ground.  I  have  noticed  that  in  the  more 
successful  of  these  counterchanged  patterns 
the  areas  occupied  by  the  pattern  and  the 
ground  are  about  equal.  When  these  designs 
were  executed  in  "cut"  work  there  was  no 
loss  of  material,  for  the  pattern  cut  out  from 
one  part  of  the  design  formed  the  ground  of 
the  next.  In  the  cut-cloth-work  of  Resht  in 
Persia,  a  similar  mechanical  method  of  pro- 
cedure was  adopted,  but  the  counterchanges 
were  not  effected  in  the  same  piece. 

The  principle  of  interchange  may  be  illus- 
trated by  the  alteration  of  a  set  of  tones  of 
greenish  yellow  with  a  corresponding  set  of 
tones  of  violet.  These  tones  may  be  so 
arranged  that  the  series  begins  with  the 
deepest  tone  of  each  colour  alternated,  the 
rest  following  in  regular  sequence,  or  the 
deepest  tone  of  one  colour  may  be  followed  by 
tin  lightest  tone  of  the  other,  and  so  on  ;  but 
a  satisfactory  effect  is  difficult  of  attainment. 

Colours  of  Minerals. — I  have  time  to  refer 
to  a  very  few  only  of  the  characteristics  of 
coloured   minerals.      The  clours  of  some  of 


20 


the  most  beautiful  precious  stones  are  in  a 
measure  dependent  upon  the  phenomena  of 
dichroism  which  they  exhibit.  The  ruby, 
sapphire,  emerald,  and  tourmaline  may  be 
named  in  this  connection.  Quite  apart  from 
the  prismatic  decomposition  of  light  which 
these  gems  effect  when  facetted,  they  show, 
with  more  or  less  distinctiveness,  the  twin 
colours  of  dichroic  bodies.  The  ruby  exhibits 
in  the  same  stone  a  pure  red  and  a  crimson  or 
carmine-red;  the  sapphire  a  straw-yellow  and 
a  pure  blue  ;  the  emerald  a  bluish-green  and 
a  pure  green ;  and  the  tourmaline  broken 
tints  of  yellowish-green  and  reddish-brown. 
No  monochroic  substance,  such  as  paste, 
enamel,  or  glass,  can  give  rise  to  the  variable 
fluctuations  of  colour  seen  in  these  dichroic 
gems.  The  peculiar  chatoyancy  of  Labrador 
spar  has  also  not  yet  been  imitated  in  any 
artificial  material.  The  beauty  of  lapis-lazuli 
and  of  many  agates  and  jaspers  is  no  doubt 
partly  dependent  upon  the  pulsing  of  the 
colours  they  exhibit,  partly  upon  a  certain 
measure  of  translucency  which  they  possess. 
This  quality  of  trauslucency  is  also  seen  in 
many  marbles,  especially  when  they  are 
polished  ;  its  absence  from  some  artificial 
materials  (such  as  terra-cotta)  is  perhaps  one 
of  the  reasons  why  it  is  difficult  to  associate 
the  two  classes  of  materials  together  with 
satisfactory  effect.  When  both  are  in  small 
pieces,  and  especially  when  they  all  receive 
together  the  same  polish,  the  incongruity  in 
question  does  not  attract  notice.  The  tessel- 
lated Roman  pavements  found  in  this  country 
often  afford  excellent  illustrations  of  this  har- 
monising of  natural  with  artificial  materials — 
marble  and  stone,  with  pottery  and  even  glass. 

The  picturesque  coloured  markings  and 
veinings  of  many  marbles  are  best  developed 
by  polishing,  and  best  seen  in  surfaces  of  con- 
siderable size,  If  these  surfaces  are  not  plane, 
their  curvature  should  not  be  complicated  with 
flutings  or  other  sculptured  treatment.  A 
carved  ornament  in  such  marble  is  a  mistake, 
at  least  whenever  the  coloured  markings  are 
decided.  Man's  art  in  relief  spoils  nature's 
decoration  in  colour.  For  this  reason  the 
carved  work  in  Derbyshire  alabaster,  for  which 
the  late  Sir  Gilbert  Scott  showed  so  much  par- 
tiality (witness  many  a  reredos  which  he  de- 
signed) is  most  unsatisfactory.  Over  and  over 
again  a  dark  veining  makes  a  prominent  part 
of  the  carving  appear  to  recede,  while  a  bright 
and  pale  patch  throws  a  hollow  or  recessed 
detail  into  conspicuous  relief. 

Colours  of  Animate.— The  most  brilliantly 


coloured  of  animals — birds— naturally  attract 
our  attention.  I  do  not  pretend  to  champion 
all  the  chromatic  arrangements  of  nature.  Yet 
two  circumstances  must  be  taken  into  account 
in  considering  the  colours  of  animals  and 
plants.  These  colours  and  colour-associations 
must  not  be  considered  apart  from  their  natural 
entourage  and  the  conditions  of  their  existence. 
And,  secondly,  if  we  are  to  follow  the  leadings 
of  evolutionists,  it  cannot  be  maintained  that 
the  colouration  of  plants  and  animals  in  a 
scate  of  nature  is  connected  with  the  chromatic 
tastes  of  man.  Of  course,  under  domestication, 
the  hues  of  both  are  greatly  modified  by  pro- 
cesses of  artificial  selection  and  of  treatment. 
Let  me  direct  your  attention  to  the  colours 
of  certain  humming  birds  as  typical  examples 
of  peculiarly  powerful  colours,  many  of  them 
belonging,  in  the  intensity  of  their  regular  re- 
flection of  light,  to  the  metallic  group,  but 
being  more  strongly  coloured.  One  of  these  is 
a  Central  American  species,  and  is  known  as 
the  "garnet"  (  Lamprolcsma  Rhami).  It  is 
commonly  spoken  of  as  showing  a  brilliant 
patch  of  garnet-red  upon  its  throat  and  breast. 
But  in  reality  this  hue  is  not  invariable  and 
uniform.  In  the  constant  movements  of  the 
living  bird  it  must  be  ever  changing  with  its 
changes  of  position.  As  you  examine  a 
mounted  specimen  you  will  see  at  first  only  a 
metallic  crimson  ;  but  when  your  view-point  is 
altered,  all  the  passage-tints  between  a  rose- 
madder  and  a  greenish  yellow  follow  in  their 
regular  spectral  sequence.  This  sequence, 
which  will  be  observed,  I  believe,  in  all  similar 
cases,  is  connected  with  the  mode  of  produc- 
tion of  these  metallic  colours.  They  do  not 
arise  directly  from  the  presence  of  actual 
colouring  matters  or  pigments,  but  from  the 
minute  optical  structure  of  the  web.  Another 
hummingbird,  a  "  train-bearer"  (Cynantlius 
forficatas),  has  its  conspicuous  tail-feathers 
adorned  with  metallic  violet ;  but  this  violet 
passes  in  some  positions  and  in  some  parts 
into  a  splendid  greenish  blue,  every  inter- 
mediate hue  being  present.  So  with  one  of  the 
"comets"  (Sappho  spargaiuirus),  the  tail- 
feathers  sparkle  with  a  golden  bronze,  ranging 
from  orange  to  red-orange.  Another  "comet" 
(Sappho  phaon),  is  similarly  decorated,  but 
the  colours  range  from  madder-red  to  red- 
purple.  Another  bird,  the  "  ruby  and  topaz  " 
(Chrysola)iipis  mosquitus),  has  on  its  head  a 
patch  of  metallic  crimson,  passing  into  orange 
when  viewed  from  some  positions  ;  similarly, 
the  fiery  metallic  orange  of  its  breast  passes 
into  yellowish  green  in  some  positions. 


I  cannot  refrain  from  citing  the  case  of 
another  humming-bird,  one  of  the  "sapphires  " 
{F.ucephala  cceruled).  Here  the  head  is  de- 
corated with  a  colour  not  of  the  metallic  order, 
but  still  very  rich,  almost  the  colour  of  French 
ultramarine  blue.  But  on  the  breast  of  this 
bird  a  metallic  colour  re-appears  ;  it  is  a  fine 
blue,  passing  into  an  equally  fine  green.  I 
have  said  nothing  of  the  brownish-black  back- 
ground which  shows  off  all  these  splendid 
hues,  because  I  want  you  to  notice  more  par- 
ticularly that  these  dazzling  metallic  colours 
are  never  really  uniform  and  flat,  even  though 
their  tones  may  be  equivalent,  for  they  show 
large  ranges  of  hue,  not  capricious,  but  follow- 
ing the  orderly  sequence  of  wave-lengths  in 
the  spectrum.  I  must  omit  all  reference  to  the 
colouring  of  butterflies  and  shells,  about  which 
I  had  much  to  say,  in  order  to  pass  on  to  the 
vegetable  kingdom. 

Colours  of  Plants. — The  texture  and  trans- 
lucency  of  flowers  and  leaves  greatly  modify 
the  hues  of  the  colouring  matter  they  contain, 
and  of  the  light  which  they  reflect.  The 
peculiar  glistening  of  the  cell  walls  in  the 
coloured  tissues  of  flowers  is  a  case  in  point ; 
it  is  sometimes  erroneously  spoken  of  as  crys- 
talline. The  distribution  of  the  various  colour- 
ing matters  of  flowers  in  the  cells,  when  the 
coloured  tissues  are  examined  under  the  micro- 
scope, is  seen  to  be  much  less  regular  than 
might  be  imagined,  and  is  doubtless  one  of 
the  causes  of  the  peculiar  chromatic  beauty 
of  many  flowers.  In  speaking  of  the  colours 
of  plants  some  reference  must  be  made  to  the 
green  of  foliage.  If  the  fully  developed  leaves 
of  a  forest  tree  in  summer  sometimes  tend 
towards  a  certain  heaviness  and  monotony  of 
hue,  still  there  is,  even  in  this  case,  a  degree 
of  variety  present.  Some  leaves  are  in  shadow, 
some  transmit  the  incident  light,  some  reflect 
the  blue  of  the  sky  or  the  grey  of  clouds,  some 
display  in  perfection  their  local  colour,  and 
some  show  in  different  parts  the  various  hues 
just  indicated.  And  then,  too,  it  must  not  be 
forgotten  that  the  green  colour  of  foliage  varies 
with  its  age,  and  that  it  always  possesses  a 
singular  characteristic  which  distinguishes  it 
from  other  greens  ;  for  if  we  place  a  spray  of 
green  leaves  upon  a  piece  of  green  cloth  or  of 
green  paper  resembling  it  in  general  hue,  we 
shall  yet  find  that  the  natural  pigment  differs 
materially  from  the  artificial  in  its  chromatic 
constituents.  To  prove  this  you  need  not  have 
recourse  to  prismatic  analysis  ;  you  have  only 
to  illuminate  both  surfaces  with  red  light,  or 
to  inspect  both  through  a  piece  of  red  glass, 


to  see  a  very  striking  difference,  especially 
noticeable  with  the  yellowish-green  foliage  of 
young  branches. 

I  regret  that  time  fails  me,  or  I  should  have 
liked  to  direct  your  attention  to  the  colours 
and  textures  of  wood,  and  of  various  vegetable 
fibres. 

Colours  of  Artificial  Materials  and  of 
Fabrics.—  I    have    already   named    glass    as 
affording    illustrations    of    the    throbbing    or 
vibrating    of    colour.      In    the    examples    of 
coloured  glass  which  I  now  show  you  by  means 
of  the   electric  lantern,  we  may  observe  the 
various  causes  which  conspire  to  produce  the 
artistic  charm  of  really  beautiful  glass.     They 
include   not    merely  fluctuations   in   hue   and 
tone,  but  the  presence  of  bubbles  and  blebs,  of 
stria;,  and  of  solid  and  comparatively  opaque 
particles.     All  these  things  serve  to  prevent 
the   direct   emergence    of    uniformly-coloured 
beams   of    light   from   the   material.     I   have 
mounted  some  of  these  specimens  of  glass  in 
pairs,   putting  side   by   side,    for   instance,  a 
piece  of  builders'  blue  glass  and  a  piece  of 
the    beautiful    blue    glass    made   by    Messrs. 
Rust   and  Co.,   of   353,   Battersea-park-road, 
S.W.,  to  whom,  indeed,  I  am  indebted  for  a 
series   of   choice   specimens,    illustrating   the 
poetry  of  coloured  glass  as  distinguished  from 
its  most  ordinary  prose.     In  this  connection, 
it  is  interesting  to  observe  that  the  good  old 
stained  glass,  like  these  fine  samples  of  Messrs. 
Rust  and  Co.'s  manufacture,   is  immediately 
discriminated  from  the  common-place  kinds  in 
a  strong  light.    When  the  sun  or  the  electric 
light  shines   through   the   former  it  becomes 
itself    illuminated,     but    throws     no    definite 
coloured  images  upon  a  white  screen  suitably 
placed  ;  while  the  optically  perfect  but  wholly 
uninteresting   flat-coloured   modern  glass  re- 
produces by  transmission  its  chromatic  design. 
By  this  test  the  modern  "  restorations  "  in  an 
ancient  window  may  frequently  be  recognised. 
I  have  no  time  to  tell  of  the  colours  of  other 
artificial  products,  of  enamels  and  of  porcelain, 
for  example.    But  I  cannot  refrain  from  direct- 
ing your  attention  to  the  colours  and  patinas 
of  certain  metallic  alloys.     The  Japanese  are 
masters  in  this  particular  line.    Their  shibuichi, 
or  grey  bronze,  consisting  of  copper  alloyed 
with  considerable  but  varying  proportions  of 
silver,  gives  a  series  of  yellowish  greys  ;    their 
shakudu,  copper  containing  a  small  pcr-cent- 
age  of  gold,  when  heated  in  suitable  pickling 
baths,  is  susceptible  of  receiving  a  blackish 
patina,     sometimes     violet-black,    sometimes 
bluish-black.     Their  bronzes,  into  which  lead 


11 


and  antimony,  as  well  as  tin,  often  enter,  fre- 
quently present  very  beautiful  effects  of  colour 
upon  their  surface.  But  perhaps  the  "  red 
copper"  of  the  Japanese  metal-worker  is  as 
beautiful  as  any  alloy.  It  is  pure  copper,  the 
surface  of  which  has  become  coated  with  a 
strongly  adherent  and  coherent  film  of  red 
sub  oxide.  This  film  is  tough  and  strong,  and 
varies  in  colour  in  different  specimens  from  a 
crimson-red  to  a  reddish  brown.  This  patina 
is  often  translucent,  if  not  transparent,  and 
shows  a  fine  gloss  like  that  of  lacquer.  Messrs. 
Christofle,  of  Paris,  and  Messrs.  Tiffany,  of 
New  York,  have  achieved  a  measure  of  success 
in  their  attempts  to  reproduce  some  of  these 
beautiful  Japanese  patinas,  but  there  remains 
a  large  field  for  their  employment  in  artistic 
metal-work,  in  the  form  of  flat  inlays  and 
reliefs. 

I  cannot  do  better,  in  order  to  illustrate  the 
tone  and  colour  effects  which  may  be  produced 
by  the  association  of  different  textile  fibres, 
than  show  you  in  the  light  of  the  electric 
lantern  a  series  of  Japanese  brocades  and  of 
Persian  embroideries.  The  "shot"  silks,  the 
varying  sheen  produced  by  the  different  direc- 
tions of  the  threads,  and  the  association  of 
lustrous  with  comparatively  dull  materials  — all 
conduce  to  the  beauty  of  the  effects. 

Pictorial  and  Decorative  Art. — It  has  often 
been  pointed  out  that  colour  is  an  end  in 
decorative  art,  a  means  in  pictorial.  This 
almost  amounts  to  saying  that  decorative 
colour  is  without  meaning ;  expresses  neither 
the  ideal  nor  the  real.  I  cannot  but  think  that 
this  view  is  far  from  being  correct.  Let  us 
contrast  and  compare  the  colouring  of  a  land- 
scape and  that  of  a  decorative  fabric.  In  the 
picture  great  use  is  made  of  gradation  of  tone 
and  hue,  in  order  to  represent  atmosphere,  the 
play  of  light  and  shade,  and  different  planes  ; 
the  artist,  moreover,  is  restrained  in  his  use  of 
full  and  saturated  colours,  nor  does  he  attempt 
to  represent  all  he  sees,  but  makes  such  a 
selection  of  the  materials  at  his  disposal  as, 
without  violating  nature,  shall  best  serve  to 
realise  his  impression  of  the  scene.  Form  is 
with  him  of  equal  importance  with  colour, 
while  symmetrical  arrangement  and  repetition 
of  similar  elements  are  never  made  evidently 
conspicuous.  The  designer  of  a  fabric,  one, 
say,  for  use  as  a  curtain,  avoids  the  use  of 
those  contrivances  by  which  the  flatness  of  the 
surface  would  be  destroyed  ;  gradation  of  hue 
and  tone,  though  admissible,  plays  a  quite 
subordinate  part  in  his  work.  He  is  at  liberty 
to  use  the  most  saturated  and  intense  colours, 


provided  only  he  can  so  employ  them  as  to 
produce  a  pleasing  harmony,  and  at  the  same 
time  be  in  accord  with  the  nature  of  his 
material  and  the  purpose  to  which  his  design 
is  to  be  put.  Moreover,  the  decorator  selects, 
as  does  the  landscape  painter,  but  he  rejects 
much  more  than  he  absorbs.  To  nature  he 
goes  for  motives,  but  individualisation  assumes 
the  last  place,  generalisation  the  first.  Form 
and  colour  are  not  with  the  decorator  of  equal 
moment,  sometimes  the  former  being  par- 
amount, sometimes  the  latter.  Usually,  the 
less  pronounced  his  colour  the  more  depend- 
ence does  he  place  upon  his  form,  although  in 
complex  chromatic  sshemes  also  he  has  often 
to  rely  greatly  upon  trenchant  contours  in 
order  to  avoid  confusion.  The  notion  that 
bad  or  weak  drawing  is  permissible  in  deco- 
rative art  ought  not  to  be  accepted  for  one 
moment.  The  very  fact  that  the  boundaries 
between  two  colours  in  ornamental  designs 
frequently  need  to  be  sharply  accentuated  by 
means  of  well-defined  outlines  should  suffice 
to  demonstrate  the  necessity  of  thorough 
draughtsmanship.  And,  lastly,  the  decorator 
makes  large  and  frequent  use  of  symmetrical 
and  repetitive  arrangements. 

If  I  am  right  in  this  comparison  and  con- 
trast, then  the  distinction  between  decorative 
and  pictorial  work  is,  like  many  another  dis- 
tinction in  the  domain  of  art,  one  of  degree 
rather  than  of  kind,  quantitative  rather  than 
qualitative.  The  same  elements  are  at  the 
disposal  of  the  decorative  and  of  the  pictorial 
artist,  but  they  must  be  employed  in  different 
proportions.  And  here  I  am  in  accord  with 
the  view  that  there  are  an  infinite  number  of 
possible  transitions  between  the  colouring  that 
is  most  fully  pictorial  and  picturesque,  and  the 
colouring  that  is  most  purely  decorative  or 
conventional.  Much,  but  by  no  means  all,  of 
Japanese  decorative  work  in  colour  illustrates 
some  of  these  transitional  forms. 

Colour  in  Relation  to  Sculpture. — In  the 
very  few  words  on  this  subject  for  which  I  can 
find  time  I  should  wish  to  draw  your  attention 
to  these  two  points,  namely,  the  surroundings 
of  sculpture  in  relation  to  its  colour,  and  the 
material  of  sculpture  in  relation  to  its  colour. 
It  seems  to  me  that  when  sculpture  is  destined 
to  form  an  integral  part  of  an  architectural 
scheme,  its  tone  and  its  hue  must  not  be  such 
as  to  interfere  with  the  unity  of  the  plan,  but 
rather  to  enrich  and  vary  it.  And  it  may 
easily  happen  that  an  association  of  sculpture 
in  marble  with  an  edifice  in  stone  may  be 
harmonious  when  both  marble  and   stone  are 


*3 


fresh,  but  may  in  course  of  time  accord  less 
happily,  as  the  latter  darkens  with  age  much 
more  considerably  than  the  former.  The  same 
effect  is  produced  when  a  glaring  white  maible 
monument  is  intruded  into  a  building  deeply 
toned  with  the  rich  warm  grey  of  centuries. 
So,  on  the  other  hand,  a  statue  in  bronze  may 
be  too  deep  in  tone  to  harmonise  with  new 
clean  cut  stone,  but,  as  years  pass,  the 
startling  difference  between  them  will  abate. 
The  case  is  different  where  the  building  and 
the  sculpture  it  contains  are  not  intended  to 
fuse  into  one  organic  whole.  Under  such 
circumstances,  the  building  must  be  sub- 
ordinated to  and  even  contrasted  with  its 
contents  ;  it  becomes  a  background  so 
coloured  and  so  arranged  as  to  emphasise 
the  statuary  it  protects  ;  and  in  considering 
the  vexed  question  of  the  artificial  colouring 
of  works  in  sculpture,  it  will  be  well  to  glance 
for  a  moment  at  the  four  chief  kinds  of  material 
out  of  which  such  sculpture  is  generally 
wrought.  These  materials  are  terra-cotta, 
bronze,  stone,  and  white  marble.  It  will  be 
owned  that  the  critical  eye  accepts  without 
hesitation  the  refined  colouring  which  the 
exquisite  terra-cotta  figures  from  Tanagra  still 
so  frequently  retain,  as  well  as  the  varied  hues 
of  the  patina  on  statues  in  bronze.  In  the 
latter  case,  we  go  so  far  as  to  dislike  what 
may  be  called  the  natural  hue  of  the  metal, 
unless  it  appears  to  a  limited  extent  only  in 
such  parts  of  a  figure  as  might  be  supposed 
to  have  lost  their  artificial  or  altered  surface 
colour  by  a  process  of  attrition.  But  when 
we  leave  artificial  materials  and  pass  on  to 
those  which  are  natural  our  attitude  as  to  the 
problem  of  colouring  differs.  While  there 
seems  to  be  an  innate  congruity  between  arti- 
ficial materials  and  artificial  colouring,  natural 
materials  lend  themselves  less  readily  to  chro- 
matic treatment.  Perhaps  there  are  here  two 
causes  at  work,  one  being  our  satisfaction  with 
and  appreciation  of  the  natural  beauty  of  the 
tones  and  hues  of  native  substances,  the  other 


.  being  the  difficulty  of  bringing  our  added 
colouration  into  harmony  with  that  which  is 
natural.  This  view  is  supported  by  the  ob- 
servation that  the  addition  of  colour  to  the  rarer 
and  choicer  materials,  such  as  statuary  marble, 
is  more  generally  resented  than  the  similar 
treatment  of  the  commoner  and  less  interesting 
kinds  of  stone.  But  is  there  not  a  third  and 
more  potent  cause  ?  Does  not  pure  white 
marble,  with  its  slight  translucency  and  its 
beautiful  crystalline  texture,  lend  itself  so  per- 
fectly to  the  presentation  of  ideal  forms  that 
even  the  faintest  suggestion  of  realistic  colour 

j    may   look  like  sacrilege,  and  may   only  too 

'    easily  lapse  into  vulgarity  ? 

In   architecture,   too,    the   poorer   and  less 

'  interesting  the  material,  the  more  useful  does 
the  addition  of  artificial  colour  become.  Yet 
it  may  serve,  on  the  one  hand,  to  emphasise 
the  poverty  and  weakness  of  bad  contours  and 
mouldings,  though,  on  the  other  hand,  it  may 
be  made  to  accentuate  and  to  ennoble  forms 
which  are  in  themselves  beautiful.  Its  dis- 
tribution and  arrangement  are  as  important  as 
its  tone  and  hue.  It  may  destroy  the  unity  of 
an  architectural  scheme,  or  it  may  serve  to 
fuse  discordant  or  fragmentary  elements  into 
one  harmonious  whole. 

Excuse,  ladies  and  gentlemen,  the  all  too 
casual  and  imperfect  discourses  which  I  now 
conclude.  Yet  I  trust  my  disjointed  utter- 
ances may  not  prove  to  be  wholly  valueless, 
for  they  may  serve,  if  no  other  end,  that  of 
directing  your  attention  and  guiding  your 
observation  to  some  of  the  infinite  resources 
and  intricate  delights  of  chromatic  combina- 
tions. I  venture,  moreover,  to  express  my 
confidence  that  the  scientific  study  of  the 
glorious  sheaf  of  spectral  colours  which  we 
have  been  making  together  will  not  lead  you 
to  agree  with  the  poet  Keats  when  he  sang — 

"  Do  not  all  charms  fly 
At  the  mere  touch  of  cold  philosophy  ? 
There  was  an  awful  rainbow  once  in  heaven  : 
We  know  her  woof,  her  texture— she  is  given 
In  the  ilull  catalogue  of  common  things." 


1'EIN-TIiD   BV   W.   TROUNCE,    10,    OOCOH-SCjrUJlE,   FLEET-STaEET,    LOMDOX    K.O. 


9